JP5157017B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, a coin gaming machine, and a slot machine, and in particular, includes a variable display unit that displays a plurality of types of identification information that can be distinguished from each other, and is derived to the variable display unit. The present invention relates to a gaming machine that controls a specific gaming state advantageous to a player when a display result of displayed identification information becomes a predetermined specific display result.

  What is generally known as this type of gaming machine is, for example, a variable display unit (for example, an image) that displays a plurality of types of identification information (designs) that can be identified, such as pachinko gaming machines. Display device), and when the display result of the identification information derived and displayed on the variable display section becomes a predetermined specific display result (big hit symbol), a specific gaming state (big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player There was something to control.

  As such a gaming machine, in the variable display section, the identification information that becomes a non-specific display result is temporarily stopped in all the variable display sections from the start of the variable display of the identification information until the display result is derived and displayed. There is a gaming machine that is configured so that a re-variation display effect can be performed in which re-variation for re-execution of variation display is performed once or a plurality of times after all of the variation display sections are performed.

  As a gaming machine that performs such a re-variable display, the probability that the re-variable display will be in a specific gaming state is higher than the case where the re-variable display is not performed, and the number of re-variable display is Depending on the probability of entering the specific gaming state, the determination as to whether or not to perform re-variable display and the number of times of performing re-variable display are determined so that the greater the number, the higher the probability of entering the specific gaming state. (Patent Document 1).

JP 2007-21094 A (paragraph number 0088)

  However, in a conventional gaming machine that determines the number of times a re-variable display is performed according to the probability of entering a specific gaming state, the player's consciousness during the variable display confirms how many times the re-variable display is performed. It tends to concentrate. Therefore, in such a conventional gaming machine, the game effect in the variable display can be felt monotonous for the player, and there is a concern that the interest of the game may be reduced.

  The present invention has been conceived in view of such circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the fun of the effects related to the re-variable display and improving the interest of the game.

Specific examples of means for solving the problems and their effects

(1) A variable display unit (effect display device 9) that displays a plurality of types of identification information (production symbols) each identifiable is provided, and the display result of the identification information derived and displayed on the variable display unit is predetermined. A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that controls to a specific gaming state (big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player when the specified display result (big hit symbol) is obtained,
Operation means (operation button 30) that can be operated by the player;
Predetermining means (game controlling microcomputer 560, S61 in FIG. 35) for determining whether or not to control to the specific gaming state before the display result of the identification information is derived and displayed;
Based on the determination by the pre-determining unit, after temporarily displaying the identification information that is a non-specific display result until the display result is derived and displayed after the variable information is displayed in the variable display section, Fluctuation display of a plurality of predetermined types of identification information including a re-variation display pattern (variation pattern including the effect of pseudo-continuous) for performing re-variation display for performing re-variation for performing variation display again or once Variation display pattern selection means (game control microcomputer 560, S101 to S105 in FIG. 36) for selecting one variation display pattern from among the patterns (variation patterns);
Based on the fluctuation display pattern selected by the fluctuation display pattern selection means, the fluctuation display execution means for executing the fluctuation display of the identification information (production control microcomputer 100, S518 to S521 in FIG. 79 and S841 to S845 in FIG. 85). When,
In the variable display of the identification information when the re-variable display pattern is selected by the variable display pattern selection means, it is selected whether or not to enable a notice effect for notifying that the specific gaming state is to be executed. At the same time, a notice effect selecting means for selecting a notice effect form when executing the notice effect from a plurality of kinds of notice effect forms (microcomputer 100 for effect control, S516a in FIG. 79, S532 to S533 in FIG. 81); ,
When a selection is made to enable execution of the notice effect by the notice effect selecting means, when a first notice effect form (button notice) is selected from the plurality of types of notice effect forms, On the condition that the operation means is operated during the variable display executed in the re-variable display pattern, the notification effect is executed in the selected first notification effect mode (ST15 and ST16a in FIG. 87), and the plural from the kind of announcement attraction mode when the second announcement attraction embodiments (step-up notice) is selected, the Te variable display in odor that runs again variable display pattern, in the second informational display mode selected Performing the notice effect (ST16b in FIG. 88) Notice effect executing means (microcomputer 100 for effect control, S520 in FIG. 79, S845 in FIG. 85, ST1 in FIG. 87) , ST16a, comprising a ST16b) and FIG. 88,
The notice effect selecting means selects the plurality of types of notice effect aspects at different selection ratios according to the total number of re-variations executed by the re-variable display pattern selected by the change display pattern selecting means ( 67 (A) and 67 (B), a table necessary for the notice effect at each stage change is selected according to the total number of pseudo-reams (two times and three times). The table selected according to the total number of fluctuations (2 times, 3 times) of the pseudo-ream differs in the selection ratio of the notice message).

According to such a configuration, since the notice effect is executed in the selected notice effect mode on the condition that the operation means is operated during the variable display executed in the re-variable display pattern, the player for the game Can increase their willingness to participate. In addition, a change display pattern including a re-change display pattern is selected based on the determination as to whether or not to control the specific game state. When the first notice effect form is selected from a plurality of types of notice effect forms, the selected first notice condition is provided on the condition that the operation means is operated during the change display executed in the re-change display pattern. The notice effect is executed in one notice effect mode. Further, when the second announcement attraction mode from among a plurality of types of prediction effect mode is selected, Te variable display in odor that runs again variable display pattern, the announcement attraction in the second informational display mode selected Executed. With regard to the notice effect that is executed on the condition that the operation means is operated, a plurality of types of notice effects are selected at different selection ratios according to the total number of times of re-variation executed in the re-variable display pattern. As a result, the player's willingness to participate in the game is increased, the player's expectation with respect to the total number of re-variations in the re-variation display is increased, and the variation of effects related to the re-variation display is increased. It is possible to improve the fun of the effects related to the variable display and to improve the interest of the game.

It is the front view which looked at the pachinko game machine from the front. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structural example of a game control board (main board). It is a block diagram showing an example of circuit configuration of an effect control board, a lamp driver board and an audio output board. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which CPU in the microcomputer for game control performs. It is a flowchart which shows a 2 ms timer interruption process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a display effect of a pseudo | simulation series. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the re-change effect of the pattern a. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the revariation effect of the pattern b. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the re-change effect of the pattern c. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the re-change effect of the pattern d. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the re-change effect of the pattern d. It is explanatory drawing which shows the quasi-continuous chance eyes. It is explanatory drawing which shows a fluctuation pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows a fluctuation pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is explanatory drawing which shows a jackpot determination table, a jackpot type determination table, and a probability variation promotion effect determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern classification determination table for big hits. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern classification determination table for big hits. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern classification determination table for small hits. It is explanatory drawing which shows a reach determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern classification determination table for reach. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern classification determination table for non-reach. It is explanatory drawing which shows a hit fluctuation pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a hit fluctuation pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a deviation variation pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a deviation variation pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production pattern of a pseudo | simulation series. It is explanatory drawing which shows the quasi-continuous production pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the quasi-continuous production pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows a starting port switch passage process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a pending | holding storage specific information storage area (holding specific area). It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a display result specific command transmission process. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol change process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol stop process. It is a flowchart which shows the big winning opening opening pre-processing. It is a flowchart which shows a big winning opening open process. It is a flowchart which shows a big winning opening open process. It is a flowchart which shows a big hit end process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a display operation in the variation display of an effect symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a display operation in the variation display of an effect symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a display operation in the variation display of an effect symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a display operation in the variation display of an effect symbol. It is a flowchart which shows the presentation control main process which CPU for presentation control performs. It is a flowchart which shows a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows a command analysis process. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the aspect of a variable display of a decoration symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the random number which the microcomputer for production control uses. It is explanatory drawing which shows the last stop symbol determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a left-right output determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the non-reach combination which does not become a final stop symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the last stop symbol determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the last stop symbol determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a specific production pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a temporary stop symbol determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a temporary stop symbol determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the temporary stop symbol in a pseudo | simulation continuous change. It is explanatory drawing which shows a design fluctuation control pattern table. It is explanatory drawing which shows an effect control pattern table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a display operation in the effect display apparatus 9 when the button notice as an example of a notice effect is performed. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a display operation in the effect display apparatus 9 when the step-up notice as an example of a notice effect is performed. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of the notice pattern classification determination table memorize | stored in ROM in the microcomputer for effect control. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a notice selection table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a 1st notification message determination table-a 6th notification message determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a 7th notification message determination table-a 12th notification message determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a 1st notification step determination table-a 6th notification step determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a 7th notification step determination table-a 12th notification step determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of the notice reliability selection table as a data table used in order to select the table used when determining the display mode of the notice reliability display which shows the reliability of a notice effect when performing a notice effect. is there. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a 1st color reliability display determination table-a 6th color reliability display determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a 7th color reliability display determination table-a 12th color reliability display determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a 1st pattern reliability display determination table-a 6th pattern reliability display determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a 7th pattern reliability display determination table-a 12th pattern reliability display determination table. It is a flowchart which shows production control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows an effect design fluctuation start process. It is a flowchart which shows an effect design fluctuation start process. It is a flowchart which shows a notice setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a specific effect setting process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of process data. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the effect performed according to the content of a process table. It is a flowchart which shows the process during effect design change. It is a flowchart which shows an effect design fluctuation stop process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of advancing of production | presentation operation | movement when the notification effect of button notification is performed. It is a flowchart which shows the example of advancing of production | presentation operation | movement when the notification effect of a step-up notification is performed. It is a flowchart which shows the process during effect design change in the effect control process process by 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the notice setting process by 2nd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of the notice selection table by 3rd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a 1st warning message batch determination table-a 3rd warning message batch determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of the 4th notice message batch determination table-the 8th notice message batch determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a 1st notice step collective decision table-a 3rd notice step collective decision table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of the 4th notice step collective decision table-the 8th notice step collective decision table.

[First Embodiment]
Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. A pachinko gaming machine is shown as an example of a gaming machine, but the present invention is not limited to a pachinko gaming machine, and may be a coin gaming machine or other gaming machines such as a slot machine. A specific game state that is advantageous to the player when the display result of the identification information derived and displayed on the variable display unit is a predetermined specific display result, provided with a variable display unit that displays the type of identification information in a variable manner Any gaming machine that can be controlled at any time. First, the overall configuration of a pachinko gaming machine 1 that is an example of a gaming machine will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as seen from the front.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 is a gaming machine in which a predetermined game is played by driving a game ball as a game medium into the game area 7. An outer frame (not shown) formed in a vertically long rectangular shape and a game frame attached to the inside of the outer frame so as to be openable and closable. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a glass door frame 2 formed in a frame shape that is provided in the game frame so as to be opened and closed. The game frame includes a front frame (not shown) installed to be openable and closable with respect to the outer frame, a mechanism plate (not shown) to which mechanism parts and the like are attached, and various parts (games to be described later) attached to them. A structure including the board 6).

  On the lower surface of the glass door frame 2 is a hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 3. Under the hitting ball supply tray 3, there are provided a surplus ball receiving tray 4 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hitting ball supply tray 3, and a hitting operation handle (operation knob) 5 for firing the hitting ball. A game board 6 is detachably attached to the back surface of the glass door frame 2. The game board 6 is a structure including a plate-like body constituting the game board 6 and various components attached to the plate-like body. In addition, a game area 7 is formed on the front surface of the game board 6 in which a game ball that has been thrown can flow down.

  An effect display device 9 composed of a liquid crystal display device (LCD) is provided near the center of the game area 7. On the display screen of the effect display device 9, there is an effect symbol display area for performing a variation display of the effect symbol in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. The effect display device 9 corresponds to a variable display device (variable display unit) that performs variable display of effect symbols as a plurality of types of identification information each of which can be identified. In the effect symbol display area, there is a symbol display area for variably displaying, for example, three decoration (effect) identification information of “left”, “middle”, and “right”. The symbol display area includes “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R, but the position of the symbol display area 9A is not fixed on the display screen of the effect display device 9. Alternatively, the three areas of the symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R may be separated. The effect display device 9 is controlled by an effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board. When the first special symbol display 8a is executing the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control microcomputer causes the effect display device 9 to execute the effect display along with the variable display. When the variation display of the second special symbol is being executed on the symbol display 8b, the effect display is executed by the effect display device along with the variation display, so that it is possible to easily grasp the progress of the game.

On the left side of the lower part of the game board 6, there is provided a first special symbol display (first variation display unit) 8a for variably displaying a first special symbol as a plurality of types of identification information that can be identified. In this embodiment, the first special symbol display device 8a is realized by a simple and small display device (for example, 7 segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0 to 9. In other words, the first special symbol display 8a is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9.
On the right side of the lower part of the game board 6, a second special symbol display (second variation display unit) 8b that variably displays a second special symbol as a plurality of types of identification information each identifiable is provided. The second special symbol display 8b is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7-segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0 to 9. In other words, the second special symbol display 8b is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9.

  The small indicator is formed in, for example, a square shape. In this embodiment, the type of the first special symbol and the type of the second special symbol are the same (for example, both 0 to 9), but the types may be different. Further, the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b may be configured to variably display, for example, a number (or a two-digit symbol) of 00 to 99, for example.

  Hereinafter, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol, and the first special symbol indicator 8a and the second special symbol indicator 8b are collectively referred to as a special symbol indicator (variable display unit). There are things to do.

  The variation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is the first start condition (that the game ball has won the first start winning opening 13) or the second start condition (the game ball is the first one) After the 2 start winning opening 14 is established), the variable display start condition (for example, when the number of reserved memories is not 0 and the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is executed) In the absence of the game and the big hit game is not executed), the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed when the variable display time elapses. Data relating to the variable display in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied is held and stored as hold storage data until the start condition is satisfied. In the specific storage, the on-hold storage data is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 55 of the game control microcomputer 560 described later.

  Note that winning means that a game ball has entered a predetermined area such as a winning opening. Deriving and displaying a display result is to stop and display a symbol (an example of identification information) (excluding stop before so-called re-variation). Further, in this embodiment, the start condition of the variable display is established in the order in which the start winning occurs regardless of the winning at the first starting winning opening 13 and the winning at the second starting winning opening 14. The variable display start condition may be established by giving priority to one of winning in the winning opening 13 and winning in the second start winning opening 14. For example, when giving priority to winning at the first start winning opening 13, the display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is not executed and the jackpot game is not executed. For example, even when the second reserved memory number is not 0, the variable display of the first special symbol is continuously executed until the first reserved memory number becomes 0.

  In the vicinity of the first special symbol display 8a, during the time of the first special symbol change display time by the first special symbol display 8a, the first decorative symbol as a decorative (design) symbol is displayed in a variable manner. A first decorative symbol display 9a is provided. In this embodiment, the first decorative symbol display 9a is composed of two LEDs. The first decorative symbol display 9a is controlled by an effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board. Also, in the vicinity of the second special symbol display unit 8b, during the variation display time of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display unit 8b, the variation display of the second decorative symbol as a symbol for decoration (for production) is performed. A second decorative symbol display 9b is provided. The second decorative symbol display 9b is composed of two LEDs. The second decorative symbol display 9b is controlled by an effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board.

  In addition, a 1st decorative design and a 2nd decorative design may be named generically. Further, the first decorative symbol display 9a and the second decorative symbol display 9b may be collectively referred to as a decorative symbol display.

  The variation of the decorative pattern (variable display) is realized by continuing the state where the two LEDs are alternately lit. The fluctuation display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a and the fluctuation display of the first decoration symbol on the first decoration symbol display 9a are synchronized. The variation display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b and the variation display of the second decorative symbol on the second decoration symbol display 9b are synchronized. Synchronous means that the start point and end point of variable display are the same and the period of variable display is the same. In addition, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, the LED on the side that recalls the big hit on the first decorative symbol display 9a remains lit. When the big-hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b, the LED on the side that recalls the big-hit on the second decorative symbol display 9b remains lit. The functions of the first decorative symbol display 9a and the second decorative symbol display 9b may be realized by the effect display device 9. That is, the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol may be controlled to be variably displayed as images on the display screen of the effect display device 9.

  A winning device having a first start winning port 13 is provided below the effect display device 9. The game ball won in the first start winning opening 13 is guided to the back of the game board 6 and detected by the first start opening switch 13a.

  A variable winning ball device 15 having a second starting winning port 14 through which a game ball can be won is provided below a winning device having a first starting winning port (first starting port) 13. The game ball that has won the second start winning opening (second start opening) 14 is guided to the back of the game board 6 and detected by the second start opening switch 14a. The variable winning ball device 15 is opened by a solenoid 16. When the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state, the game ball can be won in the second start winning opening 14 (it is easy to start winning), and is in a state advantageous to the player (first state). In the state where the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is in the open state, it is easier for the game ball to win the second start winning opening 14 than the first starting winning opening 13. Further, the state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in a closed state is a disadvantageous state (second state) for the player, and the game ball does not win the second start winning opening 14. Accordingly, in a state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the closed state, it is easier for the game ball to win the first starting winning port 13 than the second starting winning port 14. In the state where the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is in the closed state, it may be configured that the winning is possible (that is, it is difficult for the gaming ball to win) although it is difficult to win a prize.

  Hereinafter, the first start winning opening 13 and the second start winning opening 14 may be collectively referred to as a start winning opening or a starting opening.

  When the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to be in the open state, the game ball heading for the variable winning ball device 15 is very likely to win the second start winning port 14. The first start winning opening 13 is provided immediately below the effect display device 9, but the winning rate of the second starting winning opening 14 is set to be higher than that of the first starting winning opening 13. May be. Specifically, the space between the lower end of the effect display device 9 and the first start winning opening 13 is further narrowed, nails are densely arranged around the first starting winning opening 13, or the first start winning opening The nail arrangement around 13 is made difficult to guide the game ball to the first start winning opening 13 so that the winning rate of the second starting winning opening 14 is higher than the winning rate of the first starting winning opening 13. It may be.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, the variable winning ball apparatus 15 that opens and closes only the second start winning opening 14 is provided. Any of the start winning ports 14 may be provided with a variable winning ball device that performs an opening / closing operation.

  On the side of the first decorative symbol display 9a, the number of effective winning balls that have entered the first starting winning opening 13, that is, the first reserved memory number (the reserved memory is also referred to as the starting memory or the starting prize memory) is displayed. A first special symbol storage memory display 18a comprising four displays is provided. The first special symbol storage memory indicator 18a increases the number of indicators to be lit by 1 each time there is an effective start winning. Then, each time the variable display on the first special symbol display 8a is started, the number of indicators to be turned on is reduced by one.

  On the side of the second decorative symbol display 9b is a second special symbol reserved memory display 18b comprising four indicators for displaying the number of effective winning balls that have entered the second start winning opening 14, that is, the second reserved memory number. Is provided. The second special symbol storage memory display 18b increases the number of indicators to be lit by 1 every time there is an effective start winning. And whenever the fluctuation | variation display by the 2nd special symbol display 8b is started, the number of the indicators to light is reduced by one.

  In addition, the display screen of the effect display device 9 displays an area (hereinafter referred to as a summed pending storage display unit 18c) that displays a total number (total number of pending pending memories) that is the sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number. .) Is provided. Since the summation pending storage display unit 18c for displaying the total number is provided, it is possible to easily grasp the total number of execution conditions that have not met the variable display start condition. In addition, since the total reserved memory display unit 18c is provided, the first special symbol reserved memory display 18a and the second special symbol reserved memory display 18b may not be provided.

  The effect display device 9 is for decoration (for effects) during the variable display time of the first special symbol by the first special symbol indicator 8a and during the variable display time of the second special symbol by the second special symbol indicator 8b. The effect symbol as a symbol is displayed in a variable manner. The change display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a and the change display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 9 are synchronized. Further, the variation display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b and the variation display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 9 are synchronized. Further, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a and when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b, the effect display device 9 is made to recall the jackpot. The combination of effect symbols as a specific display result is stopped and displayed.

  On the right side of the decorative portion around the effect display device 9, an upper effect LED 85a, a middle effect LED 85b, and a lower effect LED 85c are provided. The upper effect LED 85a, the middle effect LED 85b, and the lower effect LED 85c execute display effects related to a pseudo-continuous effect as a specific effect (each re-variation period (including the initial variation period) during one variation period). Blinks when an effect is performed. Here, the pseudo-ream is an effect display that makes it appear that a plurality of fluctuations corresponding to a plurality of reserved memories are continuously performed although it is a single fluctuation corresponding to one reserved memory. Abbreviation for pseudo-continuous variation.

In addition, the pseudo-ream is within the variation time determined with respect to one start winning prize in order to make it appear as if multiple symbols of variable display (variable display) have been executed for one starting winning prize. In this case, a special variation pattern (also referred to as a variation display pattern) in which temporary stop and re-variation are executed a predetermined number of times for all the symbol strings (left, middle, right). In general, the greater the number of re-variation repeated executions (the number of pseudo-continuations), the higher the reliability. In addition, when a quasi-continuous change is executed, a certain reach effect may be finally executed. Furthermore, the production | generation ratio may change with the frequency | count of repeated execution of re-variation (the number of times of pseudo continuous). For example, when the re-variation execution count goes up to 2 (pseudo-continuous count 3 times), “reach determination” is reached, and when the re-variation execution count goes up to 3 times (pseudo-continuous count 4 times), “super-reach determination” If the number of executions of the fluctuation reaches 4 times (5 times of pseudo-continuous times), it may be “big hit fixed”. For example,
Appeal the pseudo-ream to the player by giving out a distinctive but distinctive appearance like the odd number of “1”, “3”, “5”, and “1”, “2”, “3” be able to. Further, the pseudo-ream can be appealed when temporarily stopping and / or re-changing. Further, a step-up notice as described later may be executed even at the time of re-variation during “pseudo continuous variation”. That is, when re-variation is executed three times (pseudo continuous number of times four times), the step-up notice can be executed four times. In that case, it is possible to notify the player that the reliability is higher by increasing the number of step-ups as the number of pseudo-reams progresses. In the present embodiment, an example will be described in which the step-up notice is executed at the time of re-variation during the “pseudo-series fluctuation” among the above-described pseudo-series effects.

  Here, the step-up notice is a kind of notice that is executed during the change display of the symbol executed for one starting prize, and in particular, the form of the notice (display, sound, lamp, movable object, etc.) Indicates a notice that changes (steps up) into multiple stages. For general enemies, the greater the number of changes (number of steps), the higher the reliability. Many of the notices are for notifying that a jackpot or reach will be made, but the target for notifying the probability change jackpot, a specific reach, or promotion to probability change may also be changed. For example, it may be “reach confirmation” when going to step 3, “super reach confirmation” when going to step 4, and “big hit confirmation” when going to step 5. The change of the notice mode (step-up) is not only a case where different characters appear in order as in this embodiment, but also a step-up due to a change in the shape or color of one character. But you can. That is, if it is possible to recognize that the state of the notice (display, sound, lamp, movable object, etc.) as seen from the player has changed stepwise, it is not limited to the above example, but can be said to be a step-up notice. .

  On the left side, a movable member 78 that is attached to the rotating shaft of the motor 86 and moves when the motor 86 rotates is provided. The movable member 78 operates when a pseudo-series effect is executed. A vibration motor (not shown) that vibrates the mounting portion of each LED is provided in the vicinity of the upper effect LED 85a, the middle effect LED 85b, and the lower effect LED 85c.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 1, a special variable winning ball device 20 is provided below the variable winning ball device 15. The special variable winning ball apparatus 20 includes an opening / closing plate, and when the specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, and the specific display result (big hit symbol) on the second special symbol display 8b. When the open / close plate is controlled to be open by the solenoid 21 in the specific game state (big hit game state) that occurs when the symbol is derived and displayed, the big winning opening serving as the winning area is opened. The game ball that has won the big winning opening is detected by the count switch 23.

  The game area 6 is also provided with winning ports (ordinary winning ports) 29, 30, 33, 39 for paying out a predetermined number of premium game balls determined in advance based on winning of game balls. The game balls won in the winning openings 29, 30, 33, 39 are detected by the winning opening switches 29a, 30a, 33a, 39a.

  A normal symbol display 10 is provided on the right side of the game board 6. The normal symbol display 10 variably displays a plurality of types of identification information called “normal symbols” (for example, “◯” and “x”).

  When the game ball passes through the gate 32 and is detected by the gate switch 32a, the display variation of the normal symbol display 10 is started. In this embodiment, the upper and lower lamps (the symbols can be visually recognized when turned on) are turned on alternately to perform variable display. For example, if the lower lamp is turned on at the end of the variable display, it is a hit. . When the stop symbol on the normal symbol display 10 is a predetermined symbol (winning symbol), the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for a predetermined number of times. In other words, the state of the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is a state that is advantageous from a disadvantageous state for the player when the normal symbol is a stop symbol (a state in which a game ball can be awarded at the second start winning port 14). To change. In the vicinity of the normal symbol display 10, a normal symbol holding storage display 41 having a display unit with four LEDs for displaying the number of winning balls that have passed through the gate 32 is provided. Each time there is a game ball passing through the gate 32, that is, every time a game ball is detected by the gate switch 32a, the normal symbol storage memory display 41 increases the number of LEDs to be turned on by one. Then, each time the variable display of the normal symbol display 10 is started, the number of LEDs to be lit is reduced by one. Further, in the probability variation state where the probability of being determined to be a big hit as compared to the normal state is high, the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 becomes a winning symbol is increased, and the variable winning ball apparatus 15 Opening time and opening times are increased. In addition, even when the symbol variation time is shortened (the gaming state in which the special symbol variation display time is shortened), which is not the probability variation state, the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball device 15 are increased.

  On the left and right sides of the game area 7 of the game board 6, there are provided decorative LEDs 25 that are blinked during the game. In the lower part of the game area 7 of the game board 6, there is provided an out port 26 through which a hit ball that has not won a prize is taken. In addition, two speakers 27 that utter sound effects and sounds as predetermined sound outputs are provided on the left and right upper portions outside the game area 7. On the outer periphery of the game area 7, a frame LED 28 provided on the front frame is provided.

  At a predetermined position in the gaming machine frame of the pachinko gaming machine 1, such as a central position on the front side of the top surface of the hitting ball supply tray 3, an operation button 30 that can be operated by the player by a pressing operation or the like is provided. Note that the operation button 30 is not limited to a button that can be pressed, and may be a button that can be rotated, such as a rotary selector, or a touch operation or a pressing operation, such as a touch panel. It may be a thing, and the thing which can be tilted like a lever type switch may be sufficient. Further, instead of the operation button 30, a sensor that can detect a predetermined operation action by the player, such as an infrared sensor, a CCD sensor, or a CMOS sensor, may be used. That is, the operation button 30 only needs to be able to detect a predetermined operation action by the player mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically.

  In the gaming machine, a ball striking device (not shown) that drives a driving motor in response to a player operating the batting operation handle 5 and uses the rotational force of the driving motor to launch a gaming ball to the gaming area 7. ) Is provided. A game ball launched from the ball striking device enters the game area 7 through a ball striking rail formed in a circular shape so as to surround the game area 7, and then descends the game area 7. When the game ball enters the first start winning port 13 and is detected by the first start port switch 13a, if the variation display of the first special symbol can be started (for example, the variation display of the special symbol ends, 1), the first special symbol display unit 8a starts the variable display (variation) of the first special symbol, and the first decorative symbol display unit 9a displays the variable display of the first decorative symbol. The effect display device 9 starts displaying the effect symbols in a variable manner. That is, the variable display of the first special symbol, the first decorative symbol, and the effect symbol corresponds to winning in the first start winning opening 13. If the variable display of the first special symbol cannot be started, the first reserved memory number is increased by 1 on condition that the first reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value.

  When the game ball enters the second start winning port 14 and is detected by the second start port switch 14a, if the variation display of the second special symbol can be started (for example, the variation display of the special symbol ends, 2), the second special symbol display 8b starts the variable display (variation) of the second special symbol, and the second decorative symbol display 9b displays the variable display of the second decorative symbol. The effect display device 9 starts displaying the effect symbols in a variable manner. That is, the change display of the second special symbol, the second decorative symbol, and the effect symbol corresponds to winning in the second start winning opening 14. If the variable display of the second special symbol cannot be started, the second reserved memory number is increased by 1 on condition that the second reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value.

  FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an example of the circuit configuration of the main board (game control board) 31. FIG. 2 also shows a payout control board 37, an effect control board 80, and the like. A game control microcomputer (corresponding to game control means) 560 for controlling the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program is mounted on the main board 31. The game control microcomputer 560 includes a ROM 54 for storing a game control (game progress control) program and the like, a RAM 55 as a storage means used as a work memory, a CPU 56 for performing control operations in accordance with the program, and an I / O port unit. 57. In this embodiment, the ROM 54 and the RAM 55 are built in the game control microcomputer 560. That is, the game control microcomputer 560 is a one-chip microcomputer. The one-chip microcomputer only needs to incorporate at least the CPU 56 and the RAM 55, and the ROM 54 may be external or built-in. The I / O port unit 57 may be externally attached. The game control microcomputer 560 further includes a random number circuit 503 that generates hardware random numbers (random numbers generated by the hardware circuit).

  The RAM 55 is a backup RAM as a non-volatile storage means, part or all of which is backed up by a backup power source created on the power supply substrate 910. That is, even if the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 55 is stored for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply cannot be supplied). In particular, at least data (special symbol process flag, etc.) corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means, and data indicating the number of unpaid winning balls are stored in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the power is restored after a power failure or the like occurs. Further, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress state of the game. In this embodiment, it is assumed that the entire RAM 55 is backed up.

  In the game control microcomputer 560, the CPU 56 executes control in accordance with a program stored in the ROM 54. Therefore, the game control microcomputer 560 (or CPU 56) executes (or performs processing) hereinafter. Specifically, the CPU 56 executes control according to a program. The same applies to microcomputers mounted on substrates other than the main substrate 31.

  The random number circuit 503 is a hardware circuit that is used to generate a random number for determination to determine whether or not to make a big hit based on the display result of the special symbol variation display. The random number circuit 503 updates the numerical data according to the set update rule within a numerical range in which an initial value (for example, 0) and an upper limit value (for example, 65535) are set, and generates the random data at random timing. Based on the fact that the starting winning time is the time of reading (extracting) the numerical data, it has a random number generation function in which the read numerical data becomes a random value.

  The random number circuit 503 includes a numeric data update range selection setting function (initial value selection setting function and upper limit value selection setting function), numeric data update rule selection setting function, and numeric data update rule selection. It has various functions such as a switching function. With such a function, the randomness of the generated random numbers can be improved.

  Further, the game control microcomputer 560 has a function of setting an initial value of numerical data updated by the random number circuit 503. For example, the game control microcomputer 560 includes an ID number of the game control microcomputer 560 stored in a predetermined storage area such as the ROM 54 (an ID number assigned with a different value for each product of the game control microcomputer 560). ) Is used as the initial value of the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 503. By performing such processing, the randomness of the random number generated by the random number circuit 503 can be further improved.

  Further, an input driver circuit 58 for supplying detection signals from the gate switch 32a, the start port switch 13a, the count switch 23, and the winning port switches 29a, 30a, 33a, 39a to the game control microcomputer 560 is also mounted on the main board 31. Yes. Also, an output circuit 59 for driving the solenoid 16 for opening and closing the variable winning ball device 15 and the solenoid 21 for opening and closing the special variable winning ball device 20 that forms a big winning opening according to a command from the game control microcomputer 560 is also provided. It is mounted on the substrate 31.

  Further, the game control microcomputer 560 includes a first special symbol display 8a, a second special symbol display 8b, which variably displays special symbols, a normal symbol display 10, which variably displays normal symbols, and a first special symbol hold memory. Display control of the display 18a, the second special symbol storage memory display 18b, and the normal symbol storage memory display 41 is performed.

  An information output circuit (not shown) that outputs an information output signal such as jackpot information indicating the occurrence of a jackpot gaming state to an external device such as a hall computer is also mounted on the main board 31.

  In this embodiment, effect control means (effect control microcomputer 100 described later) mounted on the effect control board 80 instructs effect contents from the game control microcomputer 560 via the relay board 77. The command is received, and the surface control of the first decorative symbol display unit 9a and the second decorative symbol display unit 9b that displays the decorative symbols in a variable manner and the display control of the effect display device 9 that displays the decorative symbols in a variable manner are performed. In addition, the effect control means mounted on the effect control board 80 receives an operation detection signal from the operation button 30 and performs various effects such as a notice effect described later according to the signal.

  The effect control means mounted on the effect control board 80 controls the display of the decoration LED 25 provided on the game board and the frame LED 28 provided on the frame side via the lamp driver board 35. The sound output from the speaker 27 is controlled via the sound output board 70.

  FIG. 3 is a block diagram illustrating a circuit configuration example of the relay board 77, the effect control board 80, the lamp driver board 35, and the audio output board 70. In the example shown in FIG. 3, the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70 are not equipped with a microcomputer, but may be equipped with a microcomputer. Further, without providing the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70, only the effect control board 80 may be provided for effect control.

  The effect control board 80 includes an effect control CPU 101 and an effect control microcomputer 100 including a RAM for storing information related to effects such as effect symbol process flags. The RAM may be externally attached. In this embodiment, the RAM in the production control microcomputer 100 is not backed up. In the effect control board 80, the effect control CPU 101 operates in accordance with a program stored in a built-in or external ROM (not shown), and receives signals from the main board 31 input via the relay board 77. In response to the (effect control INT signal), an effect control command is received via the input driver 102 and the input port 103. Further, the effect control CPU 101 causes the VDP (video display processor) 109 to perform display control of the effect display device 9 based on the effect control command.

  An operation signal from the operation button 30 is input to the effect control microcomputer 100 via the input port 107. As will be described later, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs a game effect such as a notice effect based on an operation signal from the operation button 30.

  In this embodiment, a VDP 109 that performs display control of the effect display device 9 in cooperation with the effect control microcomputer 100 is mounted on the effect control board 80. The VDP 109 has an address space independent of the production control microcomputer 100, and maps a VRAM therein. VRAM is a buffer memory for developing image data. Then, the VDP 109 outputs the image data in the VRAM to the effect display device 9 via the frame memory.

  The effect control CPU 101 outputs to the VDP 109 a command for reading necessary data from a CGROM (not shown) in accordance with the received effect control command. The CGROM stores character image data and moving image data displayed on the effect display device 9, specifically, a person, characters, figures, symbols (including effect symbols), and background image data in advance. ROM. The VDP 109 reads the image data from the CGROM in response to a command from the effect control CPU 101. The VDP 109 executes display control based on the read image data.

  The effect control command and the effect control INT signal are first input to the input driver 102 on the effect control board 80. The input driver 102 passes the signal input from the relay board 77 only in the direction toward the inside of the effect control board 80 (does not pass the signal in the direction from the inside of the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77). It is also a unidirectional circuit as a regulating means.

  As a signal direction regulating means, the signal inputted from the main board 31 is allowed to pass through the relay board 77 only in the direction toward the effect control board 80 (the signal is not passed in the direction from the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77). The unidirectional circuit 74 is mounted. For example, a diode or a transistor is used as the unidirectional circuit. FIG. 3 illustrates a diode. A unidirectional circuit is provided for each signal. Furthermore, since the effect control command and the effect control INT signal are output from the main board 31 via the output port 571 that is a unidirectional circuit, the signal from the relay board 77 toward the inside of the main board 31 is restricted. That is, the signal from the relay board 77 does not enter the inside of the main board 31 (the game control microcomputer 560 side). The output port 571 is a part of the I / O port unit 57 shown in FIG. Further, a signal driver circuit that is a unidirectional circuit may be further provided outside the output port 571 (on the relay board 77 side).

  The effect control CPU 101 drives the motor 86 to operate the movable member 78 via the output port 106. Further, the effect control CPU 101 is provided in the vicinity of the upper effect LED 85a, the middle effect LED 85b, and the lower effect LED 85c, and drives the vibration motors 87a, 87b, 87c that signal the mounting portions of the LEDs via the output port 106. The vibration motor 87a vibrates the upper effect LED 85a. The vibration motor 87b vibrates the middle effect LED 85b, and the vibration motor 87c vibrates the lower effect LED 85c.

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 outputs a signal for driving the LED to the lamp driver board 35 via the output port 105. Further, the production control CPU 101 outputs sound number data to the audio output board 70 via the output port 104.

  In the lamp driver board 35, a signal for driving the LED is input to the LED driver 352 via the input driver 351. The LED driver 352 supplies a current to a light emitter provided on the frame side such as the frame LED 28 based on a signal for driving the LED. Further, current is supplied to the decoration LED 25, the upper effect LED 85a, the middle effect LED 85b, and the lower effect LED 85c provided on the game board side.

  In the voice output board 70, the sound number data is input to the voice synthesis IC 703 via the input driver 702. The voice synthesizing IC 703 generates voice or sound effect according to the sound number data, and outputs it to the amplifier circuit 705. The amplification circuit 705 outputs an audio signal obtained by amplifying the output level of the speech synthesis IC 703 to a level corresponding to the volume set by the volume 706 to the speaker 27. The voice data ROM 704 stores control data corresponding to the sound number data. The control data corresponding to the sound number data is a collection of data indicating the sound effect or sound output mode in a time-series manner in a predetermined period (for example, the changing period of the effect design).

  Next, the operation of the gaming machine will be described. FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by the game control microcomputer 560 on the main board 31. When power is supplied to the gaming machine and power supply is started, the input level of the reset terminal to which the reset signal is input becomes high. Then, the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) executes a security check process that is a process for confirming whether or not the contents of the program are valid, and then performs step S (hereinafter simply referred to as S). ) The main process after 1 is started. In the main process, the CPU 56 first performs necessary initial settings.

  In the initial setting process, the CPU 56 first sets the interrupt prohibition (S1). Next, the interrupt mode is set to interrupt mode 2 (S2), and a stack pointer designation address is set to the stack pointer (S3). Then, after initialization of the built-in device (CTC (counter / timer) and PIO (parallel input / output port) which are built-in devices (built-in peripheral circuits)) is performed (S4), the RAM 55 is made accessible. Set (S5). In the interrupt mode 2, the address synthesized from the value (1 byte) of the specific register (I register) built in the CPU 56 and the interrupt vector (1 byte: least significant bit 0) output from the built-in device is This mode indicates an interrupt address.

  Next, the CPU 56 checks the state of the output signal of the clear switch (for example, mounted on the power supply board) input via the input port (S6). When the ON is detected in the confirmation, the CPU 56 executes a normal initialization process (S10 to S15).

  If the clear switch is not on, check whether data protection processing for the backup RAM area (for example, power supply stop processing such as addition of parity data) was performed when power supply to the gaming machine was stopped (S7). If it is confirmed that such a protection process has not been performed, the CPU 56 executes an initialization process. Whether there is backup data in the backup RAM area is confirmed, for example, by the state of the backup flag set in the backup RAM area in the power supply stop process.

  If it is confirmed that the power supply stop process has been performed, the CPU 56 checks the data in the backup RAM area (S8). In this embodiment, a parity check is performed as a data check. Therefore, in S8, the calculated checksum is compared with the checksum calculated and stored by the same process in the power supply stop process. When the power supply is stopped after an unexpected power failure or the like, the data in the backup RAM area should be saved, so the check result (comparison result) is normal (matched). That the check result is not normal means that the data in the backup RAM area is different from the data when the power supply is stopped. In such a case, since the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, an initialization process that is executed when the power is turned on is not performed when the power supply is stopped.

  If the check result is normal, the CPU 56 performs a game state restoration process (in S41 to S43) for returning the internal state of the game control means and the control state of the electric component control means such as the effect control means to the state when the power supply is stopped. Process). Specifically, the start address of the backup setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set as a pointer (S41), and the contents of the backup setting table are sequentially set in the work area (area in the RAM 55) (S42). The work area is backed up by a backup power source. In the backup setting table, initialization data for an area that may be initialized in the work area is set. As a result of the processing of S41 and S42, the saved contents remain as they are in the portion of the work area that should not be initialized. The parts that should not be initialized include, for example, data indicating a gaming state before stopping power supply (special symbol process flag, probability change flag, time reduction flag, etc.), and an area where the output state of the output port is saved (output port buffer) ), A portion where data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls is set.

  Further, the CPU 56 transmits a power failure restoration designation command (power failure restoration 1 designation command) as an initialization command at the time of power supply restoration to the effect control board 80 (S43). Then, the process proceeds to S14.

  In this embodiment, it is confirmed whether the data in the backup RAM area is stored using both the backup flag and the check data. However, only one of them may be used. That is, either the backup flag or the check data may be used as an opportunity for executing the game state restoration process.

  In the initialization process, the CPU 56 first performs a RAM clear process (S10). The RAM clear process initializes predetermined data (for example, count value data of a counter for generating a big hit determination random number) to 0, but is initialized to an arbitrary value or a predetermined value. You may make it do. Alternatively, the entire area of the RAM 55 may not be initialized, and predetermined data (for example, count value data of a counter for generating a big hit determination random number) may be left as it is. Further, the start address of the initialization setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set as a pointer (S11), and the contents of the initialization setting table are sequentially set in the work area in the RAM 55 (S12).

  By the processing of S11 and S12, an initial value is set to a flag for selectively performing processing according to a control state such as a special symbol process flag.

  Further, the CPU 56 initializes a sub board (a board on which a microcomputer other than the main board 31 is mounted) (a command indicating that the game control microcomputer 560 has executed an initialization process). Is also transmitted to the effect control board 80 (S13). For example, when the production control microcomputer 100 mounted on the production control board 80 receives the initialization designation command, the production display device 9 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized. Display, that is, initialization notification is performed. In the initialization process, the CPU 56 also transmits a customer waiting demonstration designation (demonstration) command.

  Further, the CPU 56 executes a random number circuit setting process for initially setting the random number circuit 503 (S14). For example, the CPU 56 performs setting according to the random number circuit setting program to cause the random number circuit 503 to update the value of the random R.

  Then, the CPU 56 sets a CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 560 so that a timer interrupt is periodically taken every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (S15). That is, for example, a value corresponding to 2 ms is set in a predetermined register (time constant register) as an initial value. In this embodiment, it is assumed that a timer interrupt is periodically taken every 2 ms.

  When the execution of the initialization process (S10 to S15) is completed, the CPU 56 repeatedly executes the display random number update process (S17) and the initial value random number update process (S18) in the main process. When executing the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process, the interrupt disabled state is set (S16), and when the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process are completed, the interrupt enabled state is set. (S19). In this embodiment, the display random number is a random number for determining a variation pattern or the like, and the display random number update process is a process for updating the count value of the counter for generating the display random number. . The initial value random number update process is a process for updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number. In this embodiment, the initial value random number is an initial value of a count value such as a counter for generating a random number for determining whether or not to hit a normal symbol (normal symbol determination random number generation counter). It is a random number for determining. A game control process for controlling the progress of the game, which will be described later (the game control microcomputer 560 controls itself a game device such as a variable display device, a variable winning ball device, a ball payout device, etc. provided in the gaming machine. In a process to transmit, a command signal to be controlled by another microcomputer, or a game machine control process), the count value of a random number generation counter for normal symbol determination is one round (a value that can be taken by a random number). When the number of steps between the minimum value and the maximum value is increased), an initial value is set in the counter.

  In the game control microcomputer 560 according to the present embodiment, hardware random numbers by a built-in random number circuit 503 are used as a jackpot determination random number generation counter. Therefore, such initial values are not set for the jackpot determination random number. However, when the game control microcomputer 560 uses a software random number as the big hit determination random number generation counter, the initial value may be set using the initial value random number as described above. . In this case, since the initial value after the jackpot determination random number generation counter advances to the maximum value becomes a random value, the same random number value as the jackpot determination value is illegally taken out and the jackpot is won. It is possible to make it difficult for an illegal act to occur.

  When the timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 56 executes the timer interrupt process of S20 to S34 shown in FIG. In the timer interrupt process, first, a power-off detection process for detecting whether or not a power-off signal has been output (whether or not an on-state has been turned on) is executed (S20). The power-off signal is output, for example, when the power monitoring circuit 920 mounted on the power board detects a drop in the voltage of the power supplied to the gaming machine. In the power-off detection process, when detecting that the power-off signal has been output, the CPU 56 executes a power supply stop process for saving necessary data in the backup RAM area. Next, detection signals from the gate switch 32a, the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, the count switch 23, and the winning port switches 29a, 30a, 33a, and 39a are input via the input driver circuit 58, A switch process for determining these states is executed (S21).

  Next, the CPU 56 has a first special symbol display 8a, a second special symbol display 8b, a normal symbol display 10, a first special symbol hold storage display 18a, a second special symbol hold storage display 18b, a normal symbol. A display control process for controlling the display of the on-hold storage display 41 is executed (S22). For the first special symbol display 8a, the second special symbol display 8b, and the normal symbol display 10, control for outputting a drive signal to each display according to the contents of the output buffer set in S32 and S33. Execute.

  Also, a determination random number update process is performed to update the count value of each counter for generating each determination random number such as a random number for determining a normal winning symbol used for game control (S23). The CPU 56 further executes an initial value random number update process (S24) and a display random number update process (S25) for updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number and the display random number.

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a special symbol process (S26). In the special symbol process, corresponding processing is executed in accordance with a special symbol process flag for controlling the first special symbol indicator 8a, the second special symbol indicator 8b, and the special winning opening in a predetermined order. The CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag according to the gaming state.

  Next, the normal symbol process is performed (S27). In the normal symbol process, the CPU 56 executes the corresponding process according to the normal symbol process flag for controlling the display state of the normal symbol display 10 in a predetermined order. The CPU 56 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag according to the gaming state.

  Further, the CPU 56 performs an effect control command control process for sending an effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (S28).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs an information output process for outputting data such as jackpot information, starting information, probability variation information supplied to the hall management computer, for example (S29).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a prize ball process for setting the number of prize balls based on detection signals from the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, the count switch 23, and the winning port switches 29a, 30a, 33a, 39a. Execute (S30). Specifically, the CPU 56 pays out in response to winning detection based on one of the first starting port switch 13a, the second starting port switch 14a, the count switch 23, and the winning port switches 29a, 30a, 33a, 39a being turned on. A payout control command (award ball number signal) indicating the number of winning balls is output to a payout control microcomputer mounted on the control board 37. The payout control microcomputer drives the ball payout device 97 in accordance with a payout control command indicating the number of winning balls.

  In this embodiment, a RAM area (output port buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided. However, the CPU 56 relates to on / off of the solenoid in the RAM area corresponding to the output state of the output port. An output process for outputting the contents to the output port is executed (S31).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs special symbol display control processing for setting special symbol display control data for effect display of special symbols in an output buffer for setting special symbol display control data according to the value of the special symbol process flag ( S32). For example, if the change speed is 1 frame / 0.2 seconds until the end flag is set when the start flag set in the special symbol process is set, the CPU 56, for example, every 0.2 seconds passes. Then, the value of the display control data set in the output buffer is incremented by one. Further, the CPU 56 outputs a drive signal in S22 according to the display control data set in the output buffer, whereby the first special symbol and the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b. 2 Executes the variable display of special symbols.

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a normal symbol display control process of setting normal symbol display control data for effect display of the normal symbol in the output buffer for setting the normal symbol display control data according to the value of the normal symbol process flag ( S33). For example, when the start flag related to the variation of the normal symbol is set, the CPU 56 switches the display state (“◯” and “×”) for the variation rate of the normal symbol every 0.2 seconds until the end flag is set. With such a speed, the value of the display control data set in the output buffer (for example, 1 indicating “◯” and 0 indicating “x”) is switched every 0.2 seconds. Further, the CPU 56 outputs a normal signal on the normal symbol display 10 by outputting a drive signal in S22 in accordance with the display control data set in the output buffer.

Thereafter, the interrupt permission state is set (S34), and the process ends.
With the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is started every 2 ms. The game control process corresponds to the processes of S21 to S33 (excluding S29) in the timer interrupt process. In this embodiment, the game control process is executed by the timer interrupt process. However, in the timer interrupt process, for example, only a flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred is set, and the game control process is performed by the main process. May be executed.

  Next, a pseudo-continuous display effect executed by the effect display device 9 in the gaming machine of this embodiment will be described. Each of the patterns a to d shown below indicates that re-variation is performed when pseudo-continuous display is executed, that the effect display device 9, the upper effect LED 85a, the middle effect LED 85b, the lower effect LED 85c, and An effect pattern including a notification effect that is notified in a predetermined notification mode using a notification means such as the movable member 78 is shown.

  FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a pseudo-continuous display effect. In the pattern a shown in FIG. 6A, one of the upper effect LED 85a, the middle effect LED 85b, and the lower effect LED 85c that are lit is increased one by one during each re-variation (including the initial variation). It is controlled to go. In the temporary stop period, all LEDs (upper effect LED 85a, middle effect LED 85b, and lower effect LED 85c) may be in an unlit state. Further, during the period of re-variation (including the first-time variation), the LED may be controlled to blink, the display color may be controlled to change, or one to be lit is turned on one by one. Instead of being controlled so as to increase, it may be controlled so that what is lit among the upper effect LED 85a, the middle effect LED 85b, and the lower effect LED 85c is changed. Further, FIG. 6A shows an example in which two hypothetical periods are provided during one fluctuation of the effect symbol and three re-variations (including the initial fluctuation) are performed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of temporary stops may be one or may be three or more. Further, each re-variation (including initial variation) A1, A2, A3 may be referred to as a re-variation effect of the first re-variation effect mode.

  It should be noted that the production mode (A1, B1, C1, D1 in the example shown in FIG. 6) used in the initial fluctuation of the pseudo-continuous is a fluctuation pattern that does not involve the pseudo-continuous (for example, a super-reach fluctuation pattern or a normal reach fluctuation pattern). (Fluctuation pattern) may be used as part of the production mode.

  In the pattern b shown in FIG. 6B, the movable member 78 operates during the period of each re-variation (including the initial variation). Note that the movable member 78 may be in a stopped state during the temporary stop period. FIG. 6B shows an example in which two hypothetical periods are provided during one fluctuation of the effect symbol and three re-variations (including the initial fluctuation) are performed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of temporary stops may be one or may be three or more. In addition, each re-variation (including initial variation) B1, B2, and B3 may be referred to as a re-variation effect in the second re-variation effect mode (I).

The pattern c shown in FIG. 6C is during the period of each re-variation (including the initial variation).
A specific character image is displayed on the effect display device 9. Note that the specific character image may not be displayed during the temporary stop period. FIG. 6C shows an example in which two hypothetical periods are provided during one fluctuation of the effect symbol and three re-variations (including the first fluctuation) are performed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of temporary stops may be one or may be three or more. Each re-variation (including initial variation) C1, C2, C3 may be referred to as a re-variation effect in the second re-variation effect mode (II).

  The pattern d shown in FIG. 6D has a first re-variation effect mode and a second re-change effect mode (second re-variation) in one or more periods of a plurality of re-changes (including initial changes). This is a pattern in which an effect is executed in the effect mode (I) or the second re-variation effect mode (II), or in the second re-change effect mode (I) and the second re-change effect mode (II)). In the temporary stop period, the effects of the first re-change effect mode and the second re-change effect mode may not be executed. FIG. 6D shows an example in which two hypothetical periods are provided during one fluctuation of the effect symbol and three re-variations (including the initial fluctuation) are performed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of temporary stops may be one or may be three or more. Each re-variation (including initial variation) D1, D2, and D3 may be referred to as a re-variation effect in the third re-variation effect mode.

  In FIG. 6D, the “two lit” box is indicated by a broken line indicates that the effect may or may not be executed. If not executed, an effect using the LED (upper effect LED 85a, middle effect LED 85b, or lower effect LED 85c) is executed in the first change, and an effect using the movable member 78 is executed in the next change to be executed. However, the effect using the LED is not executed.

  FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the re-variation effect of the pattern a in the effect display device 9. In the re-change effect of pattern a, the change of the effect symbol is executed for a predetermined period after the change of the effect symbol is started from the state shown in FIG. 7A (the state in which the left, middle, and right effect symbols are stopped). (Refer to FIG. 7 (B)), when the predetermined period elapses, the left middle right effect symbol temporarily stops (see FIG. 7 (C)). In the example shown in FIG. 7, when the predetermined temporary stop period elapses, the left, middle, and right production symbols re-variate (see FIG. 7D), and reach when the predetermined re-variation period elapses (FIG. 7). 7 (E)). Thereafter, the left, middle and right effect symbols are finally stopped (confirmed). In the example shown in FIG. 7, the lower effect LED 85 c is lit during the initial variation period, and the middle effect LED 85 b and the lower effect LED 85 c are lit during the re-variation period following the initial variation. In addition, the example shown in FIG. 7 is an example when one temporary stop is performed. 7A to 7C corresponds to the period A1 shown in FIG. 6A, and the periods in FIGS. 7D to 7E correspond to those in FIG. This corresponds to the period A2. However, in the example illustrated in FIG. 7, the temporary stop is an example, and the reach is reached when the period A <b> 2 ends. Then, after the reach effect is executed, the left, middle, and right effect symbols are finally stopped (confirmed). Here, it has been described that reach is reached when the re-variation effect ends, but when the re-change effect ends, the effect symbol may not be reached but may finally stop.

  In FIG. 7, among the upper effect LED 85a, the middle effect LED 85b, and the lower effect LED 85c, the LED displayed in black is an LED that is lit. Further, the LED in the lighting state is vibrated by vibration motors 87a, 87b, 87c (see FIG. 3). In FIG. 7, the downward arrow indicates that the effect symbol is variably displayed (varied). The same applies to FIGS. 8 to 11.

  Note that FIG. 7 shows an example in which the lower effect LED 85c is lit while all symbols are changing like the timing (B) in the period of the first change. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and during the initial fluctuation period, for example, the lower effect LED 85c may be turned on at the time of temporary stop such as the timing of (C) and at the start of re-variation such as the timing of (D). That is, the lighting timing of the upper effect LED in the pseudo-continuous may be at each temporary stop or at each re-variation.

  FIG. 8 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the re-variation effect of the pattern b in the effect display device 9. In the re-change effect of pattern b, the change of the effect symbol is executed for a predetermined period after the effect symbol starts to change from the state shown in FIG. 8A (the state in which the left middle right effect symbol is stopped). (See FIGS. 8B and 8C) When the predetermined period has elapsed, the left, middle, and right effect symbols are temporarily stopped (see FIG. 8D). When the predetermined temporary stop period elapses, the left, middle, and right effect symbols re-variate (see FIG. 8E), and when the predetermined re-variation period elapses, the left and right effect symbols stop and reach. (See FIG. 8F). Thereafter, after the reach effect is executed, the left, middle, and right effect symbols are finally stopped (confirmed). In the example shown in FIG. 8, the movable member 78 operates (operates so as to return to the original position (outside the display screen) after entering the display screen of the effect display device 9) during the first variation period, and the first variation occurs. The movable member 78 also operates during the subsequent re-variation period. In addition, the example shown in FIG. 8 is an example when one temporary stop is performed. 8A to 8D corresponds to the period B1 shown in FIG. 6B, and the periods shown in FIGS. 8E to 8F are shown in FIG. This corresponds to the indicated period B2. However, in the example illustrated in FIG. 8, the temporary stop is an example, and reach is reached when the period of B <b> 2 ends. Then, after the reach effect is executed, the left, middle, and right effect symbols are finally stopped (confirmed). Here, it has been described that reach is reached when the re-variation effect ends, but when the re-change effect ends, the effect symbol may not be reached but may finally stop.

  FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the re-variation effect of the pattern c in the effect display device 9. In the re-change effect of pattern c, the change of the effect symbol is executed for a predetermined period after the change of the effect symbol is started from the state shown in FIG. 9A (the state where the left, middle, and right effect symbols are stopped). (Refer to FIG. 9 (B)), when the predetermined period elapses, the left middle right effect symbol temporarily stops (see FIG. 9 (C)). When the predetermined temporary stop period elapses, the left, middle, and right effect symbols re-variate (see FIG. 9D), and when the predetermined re-variation period elapses, the left and right effect symbols stop and reach. (See FIG. 9F). Thereafter, after the reach effect is executed, the left, middle, and right effect symbols are finally stopped (confirmed). In the example shown in FIG. 9, the specific character image 79a is displayed on the effect display device 9 during the first variation period, and the specific character image 79b (related to the specific character image 79a is associated with the re-variation period following the first variation. An image that the player feels as if the effect has developed is displayed on the effect display device 9. In addition, the example shown in FIG. 9 is an example when one temporary stop is performed. 9A to 9C corresponds to the period C1 shown in FIG. 6C, and the periods in FIGS. 9D to 9E correspond to those in FIG. It corresponds to the period of C2 shown. However, in the example shown in FIG. 9, the temporary stop is an example, and reach is reached when the period of C2 ends. Then, after the reach effect is executed, the left, middle, and right effect symbols are finally stopped (confirmed). Here, it has been described that reach is reached when the re-variation effect ends, but when the re-change effect ends, the effect symbol may not be reached but may finally stop.

  10 and 11 are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of the re-variation effect of the pattern d in the effect display device 9. In the re-change effect of pattern a, the change of the effect symbol is executed for a predetermined period after the change of the effect symbol is started from the state shown in FIG. 10 (A) (the state where the left, middle, and right effect symbols are stopped). (See FIG. 10 (B)), when the predetermined period elapses, the left, middle, and right effect symbols temporarily stop (see FIG. 10 (C)). When the predetermined temporary stop period elapses, the left, middle and right effect symbols re-variate (see FIGS. 10D and 10E), and when the predetermined re-variation period elapses, the left, middle and right effect symbols become Temporarily stop again (see FIG. 10F). When the predetermined temporary stop period elapses, the left, middle, and right production symbols re-variate (see FIG. 11G), and reach when the predetermined re-variation period elapses (see FIG. 11H). . Then, after the reach effect is executed, the left, middle, and right effect symbols are finally stopped (confirmed). In the example shown in FIGS. 10 and 11, the lower effect LED 85 c is lit during the initial variation period, and during the re-variation period following the initial variation, the middle effect LED 85 b and the lower effect LED 85 c are lit, and the movable member 78 operates. . Further, during the subsequent re-variation period, the movable member 78 operates and the player feels as if the specific character image 79c (the image related to the specific character images 79a and 79b is further developed. Are displayed on the effect display device 9. Note that the examples shown in FIGS. 10 and 11 are examples in which two temporary stops are performed. 10A to 10C corresponds to the period D1 shown in FIG. 6D, and the periods in FIGS. 10D to 10F correspond to those in FIG. It corresponds to the period of D2 shown. Further, the period from FIG. 11G to FIG. 11H corresponds to the period D3 shown in FIG.

  In FIGS. 10 and 11, the LED displayed in black among the upper effect LED 85 a, the middle effect LED 85 b, and the lower effect LED 85 c is an LED that is lit. Further, the LED in the lighting state is vibrated by vibration motors 87a, 87b, 87c (see FIG. 3).

  As illustrated in FIG. 10, in this embodiment, after the initial variation (see FIGS. 10A to 10C) constituting the pattern a is executed, the re-variation (see FIG. D) to (F)) are executed. That is, it is possible to execute the second re-variation effect (for example, the pattern b) after executing the first re-change effect (for example, the pattern a). In the example shown in FIG. 10, the re-variation (revariation accompanied by the lighting of the LED) constituting pattern a is also performed when re-variation (see FIGS. 10D to 10F) constituting pattern b is executed. ) Is executed, but when the re-variation that constitutes the pattern b (see FIGS. 10D to 10F) is executed, the re-variation that constitutes the pattern a (re-variation accompanying the lighting of the LED) May not be executed. Moreover, what combined the re-variation which comprises the pattern a as shown to FIG.10 (D)-(F), and the re-variation which comprises the pattern b can also be regarded as a 2nd re-change effect. That is, it can be understood that any two re-variation effects having different aspects of the effect correspond to the first re-change effect and the second re-change effect.

  Further, the re-variation constituting the pattern a is regarded as the first re-variation, the re-variation constituting the pattern different from the pattern a (in this example, the pattern b) is regarded as the second re-variation, and the re-variation constituting the pattern a is considered. A combination of the fluctuation and the re-variation constituting the pattern different from the pattern a (in this example, the pattern b) can be regarded as the third re-variation. In such a case, it is possible to execute the third re-change effect after executing the first re-change effect or the second re-change effect.

  Note that, as described above, in the example illustrated in FIGS. 7 to 11, it is assumed that reach is reached when the re-variation effect ends, but when the re-change effect ends, the effect symbol becomes reach. There may be a final stop.

  Further, in the above example, the non-specific display result (a combination of effect symbols that does not evoke a big hit) is generated from the start of the variable display of the identification information (here, the effect symbol) until the display result is derived and displayed. A plurality of types of re-variation effects in a re-variation display pattern in which re-variation is performed once or a plurality of times after the identification information is temporarily stopped and then the variation display is performed again for all the identification information (that is, a notification effect for informing the re-variation) ) As an illuminant (upper effect LED 85a, middle effect LED 85b, and lower effect LED 85c), the movable member 78, and specific character images 79a, 79b, and 79c, but other effect modes are used. Also good. For example, a difference in the output of sound or sound effect from the speaker 27, a difference in motion of the effect target (for example, the movable member 78) (difference in operating speed, difference in operating distance, difference in operating direction, etc.), effect display device The effect of the re-variation effect is changed depending on the difference in the motion of the character image displayed on the screen 9 (the difference in the operation speed, the difference in the operation distance, the difference in the operation direction, etc.). Or the background image may be changed to change the effect of the re-variation effect.

  In the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b, after a predetermined time (variation time) has elapsed after the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) is started to be displayed, the special symbol is displayed. The stop symbol that is the result of symbol variation display is stopped (displayed). If it is decided to win, a special special symbol (big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed. When it is decided to make a small hit, a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol) different from the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed. If it is determined to be off, special symbols other than the big hit symbol and the small hit symbol are stopped and displayed. When the big hit symbol is derived and displayed, the gaming state is controlled to the big hit gaming state as the specific gaming state. Further, when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed, the small hit game state different from the big hit game state is controlled. In this embodiment, as an example, the numbers indicating “1”, “3”, and “7” are big hit symbols, the numbers indicating “5” are small hit symbols, and the symbol indicating “−” is an off symbol. To do.

  In this embodiment, among the special symbols indicating the numbers “1”, “3”, and “7” that are the jackpot symbols, the special symbols indicating the numbers “3” and “7” are the 15 round jackpot symbols. . The special symbol indicating the number “1” is made a big hit symbol for two rounds. When the 15-round big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display 8, the opening / closing plate in the variable winning ball apparatus 20 has a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning balls. During the period until the occurrence, a round in which the variable winning ball apparatus 20 is changed to the first state advantageous to the player is started. In the 15 round big hit state, the number of rounds is the first number (for example, 15). Hereinafter, the jackpot gaming state in which the number of rounds is the first number is also referred to as 15 rounds jackpot state.

  Also, when the two round big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b, the big hit gaming state in which the number of rounds is the second number (for example, “2”). Transition to (2 round big hit state). Further, in the 2 round big hit state, the period of each round becomes a second period (for example, 0.5 seconds) shorter than the first period in the 15 round big hit state. In the 2 round big hit state, the number of executions of the round is a second number (for example, “2”) that is smaller than the first number in the 15 round big hit state. In the two-round big hit state, at least one of the period in which the winning opening is opened in each round is the second period and the number of executions of the round is the second number is performed. It suffices to be controlled. In the two-round big hit state, the predetermined winning ball apparatus provided separately from the variable winning ball apparatus 20 in each round is changed from the second state which is disadvantageous to the player to the first state which is advantageous to the player. The second state may be restored after a predetermined period (first period or second period) has elapsed.

  In addition, after the big hit gaming state is finished, the gaming state is controlled to the short time state. In the short time state, the variation time of the special symbol in the variation display of the special symbol is shortened as compared with the normal state (the state which is not the probability variation state or the short time state). In the short-time state, for example, either a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) of special symbol variation display is executed and the variation display result is “big hit”, either condition is satisfied first. When it ends. In addition, after the big hit state is ended, the normal state may be set instead of the time reduction state.

  When it is determined to control the gaming state to the probability changing state, the gaming state is controlled to the probability changing state after the big hit gaming state ends. The probability variation state continues until, for example, a jackpot symbol is derived and displayed as a variation display result. The special symbol stop symbol that is derived and displayed when it is determined to control the gaming state to the jackpot gaming state is referred to as a jackpot symbol. The special symbol stop symbol that is derived and displayed when it is determined not to control the gaming state to the big hit state is referred to as an outlier symbol.

  Even after the two-round big hit state is over, the gaming state is controlled to the probability change state (high probability state). The probability variation state controlled after the end of the two round big hit state is also referred to as a sudden probability variation (surprise) state.

  When the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b, the gaming state is controlled to a small hit gaming state different from the big hit gaming state. In the small hit game state, similarly to the two round big hit state, the open / close plate in the variable winning ball apparatus 20 is opened for the second period (for example, 0.5 seconds), and the big winning opening is opened. The number of rounds is the second number (for example, 2). However, unlike the two round big hit state, the gaming state is not changed. That is, the gaming state before being controlled to the small hit gaming state continues. However, when it is decided to end the probability change state or the time-short state, the gaming state is controlled to the normal state after the small hit gaming state is ended. In addition, when changing the winning ball apparatus provided separately from the variable winning ball apparatus 20 in each round in the two round big hit state to the first state, the same as in the case of the two round big hit state even in the small hit gaming state Then, the winning ball apparatus is changed to the first state.

  Further, in the probability variation state, the probability of determining a big hit is higher than in the low probability state (normal state). For example, it is 10 times. Specifically, in the probability variation state, the number of determination values determined to be a big hit when it matches the value of the random number for jackpot determination is 10 times that in the normal state. In addition, the probability that the stop symbol of the normal symbol display 10 becomes a winning symbol is increased. That is, the start winning opening 13 is easily opened, and the start winning is likely to occur. Specifically, in the probability variation state, the number of determination values determined to be a hit when it matches the value of the random number for determination per normal symbol is larger than that in the normal state. Further, in addition to increasing the probability that the stop symbol of the normal symbol display 10 becomes a winning symbol, the number of opening or the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15 is increased, or the number of opening and the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15 is increased. You may increase. Further, even in the short time state, the probability that the stop symbol of the normal symbol display 10 becomes a winning symbol is increased, the number of opening or the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15 is increased, and the number of opening and opening of the variable winning ball device 15 is increased. You may spend more time.

  In the probability variation state, in addition to increasing the probability of determining the big hit, the control for shortening the variation time of the normal symbol and the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15 are prolonged (lengthened) than usual. ) Any one of the control and the control that increases the probability that the stop symbol of the normal symbol becomes a winning symbol, the control that combines any two, and the control that combines all the two You may make it perform. In the short time state (short time for special symbols), control for shortening the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, control for extending the opening time of the variable winning ball apparatus 15 (longer) than usual, and control for the normal symbol Of the control for increasing the probability that the stop symbol becomes a winning symbol, at least the control for reducing the variation time of the normal symbol than that of the normal symbol may be executed.

  In the display area of the effect display device 9, the effect symbols are displayed in a variable manner in response to the special symbol change display by the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b. That is, in the display area of the effect display device 9, based on the fact that the start condition is satisfied, the variation of the effect symbols is started in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R. For example, the stop symbols of the effect symbols are stopped and displayed (derived display) in the order of “left” → “right” → “middle”. In the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R, the effect symbols may be stopped and displayed in a predetermined order, or “left”, “middle”, and “right” The stop symbols may be stopped and displayed simultaneously in the symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R.

  The period from the start of the variable display of the effect symbol until the stop symbol is derived and displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, 9R (variable display period = variable time) Thus, the variation display state of the effect symbol may become a predetermined reach state. The reach state is a display state in which the variation of the effect symbols that are not yet stopped when the effect symbols that are stopped and displayed in the display area of the effect display device 9 constitute a part of the jackpot combination, or This is a display state in which all or part of the design symbols change synchronously while constituting all or part of the jackpot combination. The display effect in the reach state is reach effect display (reach effect).

  In addition, during the variation display of the production symbol, unlike the reach production, it is possible that the variation display state of the production symbol may become the reach state, and that the variation display result may be a big hit symbol. There may be a case where a specific effect for informing the player is made depending on the display pattern variation. In this embodiment, specific effects such as “slip” and “pseudo-run” can be executed.

  In the “slip” specific effect, the effect symbols are changed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R, and then two or more symbol display areas (for example, “left”) are displayed. And the “right” symbol display areas 9L and 9R), after a temporary stop display of the effect symbols, a predetermined number (for example, “1” or “2”) of the symbol display areas in the temporarily stopped display (For example, one or both of the “left” symbol display area 9 </ b> L and the “right” symbol display area 9 </ b> R) and the effect symbols to be stopped are displayed after being changed again, thereby changing the effect symbols to be stopped and displayed. An effect display is performed. In addition, by notifying the player that the effect symbol that has been stopped and displayed is not finalized (final stop), such as by displaying fluctuation fluctuation in the temporary stop display, or by changing the effect symbol again after a short temporary stop. Is preferred. In addition, the effect design may be re-variable after the effect design is temporarily stopped to the extent that the player recognizes that the stop-displayed effect design has been confirmed.

  As described above, in the special effect of “pseudo-continuous”, the symbol display areas 9L and 9C for “left”, “middle”, and “right” are displayed based on the fact that the start condition of the special symbol variation display is satisfied once. , After changing the effect symbol in 9R, temporarily rendering the effect symbol in all symbol display areas 9L, 9C, 9R, then changing the effect symbol in all symbol display areas 9L, 9C, 9R again (pseudo) The effect display to be continuously changed) is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, up to three times).

  FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram showing pseudo consecutive chances. In the “pseudo-ream” specific effect, in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R in the effect display device 9, the pseudo-near chances GC1 to GC8 shown in FIG. The effect symbols constituting any of the above are temporarily stopped and displayed. The “left symbol” is an effect symbol displayed (stop display or temporary stop display) in the “left” symbol display area 9L, and the “middle symbol” is an effect symbol displayed in the “medium” symbol display area 9C. The “right symbol” is an effect symbol displayed in the “right” symbol display area 9R. The pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 may be determined in advance as a combination of effect symbols included in the special combination.

  When the shift symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b and the effect display device 9, the change display state of the effect symbol is displayed after the effect symbol change display is started. There may be a case where a predetermined combination of effect symbols that does not reach reach is stopped and displayed without reaching the reach state. Such a variation display mode of the effect symbol is referred to as a “non-reach” (also referred to as “normal shift”) variation display mode in a case where the variation display result is a loss symbol.

  When the shift symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b and the effect display device 9, the change display state of the effect symbol is displayed after the effect symbol change display is started. Depending on the reach state, after the reach effect is executed, or the reach effect is not executed, a combination of predetermined effect symbols that will reach may be stopped and displayed. Such a variation display result of the effect symbol is referred to as a variation display mode of “reach” (also referred to as “reach disengagement”) when the variation display result is “out of”.

  In this embodiment, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b, the reach effect is executed after the variation display state of the effect symbol becomes the reach state. Or the reach effect is not executed, and the effect symbols are all stopped and displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R on the effect display device 9.

  When “5”, which is a small hit symbol, is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b, the variation display mode of the production symbol is “accurate” in the production display device 9. After the effect symbols are displayed in the same manner as in some cases, a predetermined non-reach combination (for example, the stop symbols in the “left” and “right” symbol display areas 9L and 9R do not match). In some cases, a stop symbol that is displayed as a stop or a stop symbol that is a predetermined reach combination is stopped and displayed. The display effect in the effect display device 9 corresponding to the fact that “5”, which is a small hit symbol, is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol indicator 8b, is referred to as a “small hit” variable display mode. .

  FIG. 13 shows the variation of the effect symbols prepared in advance corresponding to the case where the variation display mode of the effect symbol is “non-reach” and the case where it is “reach” when the variation display result is an out-of-order symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows a pattern. As shown in FIG. 13, in this embodiment, non-reach PA1-1 to non-reach PA1-5 and non-reach PB1- are used as the variation patterns corresponding to the case where the variation display mode of the effect symbol is “non-reach”. 1 and non-reach PB1-2, non-reach PC1-1 and non-reach PC1-2 variation patterns are prepared. Further, as variation patterns corresponding to the case where the variation display mode of the production symbol is “reach”, normal PA2-1 to normal PA2-4, super PA3-1 to super PA3-6, super PB3-1 to super PB3— 3. Fluctuation patterns of Super PC 3-1 to Super PC 3-4 are prepared.

  FIG. 14 is an explanatory diagram exemplifying a variation pattern of a production symbol prepared in advance corresponding to a case where the variation display result is a big hit symbol or a small hit symbol. As shown in FIG. 14, in this embodiment, normal PA2-5 to normal PA2-8 and super PA4-1 are used as variation patterns corresponding to the case where the special symbol variation display result is a big hit symbol or a small hit symbol. ~ Super PA4-6, Super PA5-1 to Super PA5-3, Super PB4-1 to Super PB4-3, Super PB5-1 to Super PB5-3, Super PD1-1 and Super PD1-2, Super PE1-1 Also, variation patterns of super PE1-2, special PG1-1 to special PG1-3, special PG2-1 to special PG2-3 are prepared.

FIG. 15 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. Each random number is used as follows.
(2-1) Random 2-1 (MR2-1): Determine the type of jackpot (probability big hit, sudden probability change big hit, normal big hit) (for big hit type judgment)
(2-2) Random 2-2 (MR2-2): Determines whether or not to reach (for reach determination)
(3) Random 3 (MR3): The type (type) of the variation pattern is determined (for variation pattern type determination)
(4) Random 4 (MR4): A variation pattern (variation time) is determined (for variation pattern determination)
(5) Random 5 (MR5): Determines whether or not to generate a hit based on a normal symbol (for normal symbol hit determination)
(6) Random 6 (MR6): Determine the initial value of random 5 (for determining the initial value of random 5)
(7) Random 7 (MR7): Determines the pattern of pseudo-continuous production (for determining pseudo-continuous pattern)
In S23 in the game control process shown in FIG. 5, the game control microcomputer 560 generates a (2-1) big hit type determination random number and (5) a normal symbol per determination random number. Count up (add 1). That is, they are determination random numbers, and other random numbers are display random numbers (random 2-2, random 3, random 4, random 7) or initial value random numbers (random 6). In addition, in order to improve a game effect, you may use random numbers other than said random number. In this embodiment, a random number generated by hardware incorporated in the game control microcomputer 560 (or hardware external to the game control microcomputer 560) is used as the jackpot determination random number. In addition, for the big hit type determination random number, an initial value may be set using the initial value random number as described above. In this case, since the initial value after the big hit type determination random number generation counter advances to the maximum value becomes a random value, the same random number value as the probable big hit type determination value is illegally targeted. Thus, it is possible to make it difficult for a fraudulent act that causes a jackpot of a certain type to be taken out.

  FIGS. 16A and 16B are explanatory diagrams showing a jackpot determination table. The jackpot determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 54 and is a table in which a jackpot determination value to be compared with the random R is set. The jackpot determination table includes a normal-time jackpot determination table used in a normal state (a gaming state that is not a probability change state) and a probability change jackpot determination table used in a probability change state. Each numerical value described in the left column of FIG. 16 (A) and each numerical value described in FIG. 16 (B) are set in the normal time big hit determination table. Each numerical value described in the right column of (A) and each numerical value described in FIG. 16 (B) are set. The numerical values described in FIGS. 16A and 16B are the big hit determination value or the small hit determination value. Hereinafter, the big hit determination value and the small hit determination value may be collectively expressed as “big hit determination value”.

  The CPU 56 extracts the count value of the random number circuit 503 at a predetermined time and uses the extracted value as the value of the jackpot determination random number (random R). The jackpot determination random number is shown in FIGS. If it matches any of the big hit judgment values shown in B), it is decided to make a big hit (probability big hit, normal big hit or sudden big hit) or small hit for the special symbol. Note that the “probability” shown in FIGS. 16A and 16B indicates the probability (ratio) of a big hit or a small hit. Further, determining whether or not to make a big hit or a small hit means determining whether or not to shift to a big hit gaming state or a small hit gaming state. It may also be determined whether the stop symbol in the symbol display 8b is a big hit symbol or a small hit symbol.

  FIG. 16C is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table 131 stored in the ROM 54. The jackpot type determination table 131 sets the jackpot type to “normal jackpot”, “based on the random number for determining the jackpot type (random 2-1), when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol. This table is referred to in order to determine either “probable big hit” or “surprise big hit”. The big hit type determination table 131 is a numerical value to be compared with the value of the random 2-1, and corresponding to each of “normal big hit”, “probability big hit”, and “crash big hit” (big hit type determination value) Is set. When the random value 2-1 matches any of the jackpot type determination values, the CPU 56 determines the jackpot type as a type corresponding to the matched jackpot type determination value.

  FIGS. 17A to 17F and FIG. 18G are explanatory diagrams showing the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132G. The jackpot variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132G, when it is determined that the variation display result is a jackpot symbol, according to the determination result of the jackpot type, the variation pattern type is determined as a random number for variation pattern type determination. It is a table referred to in order to determine any of a plurality of types based on (Random 3). Each of the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132G is selected according to a table selection rule as shown in FIG. In other words, the game state is selected according to whether the game state is the normal state, the probability variation state, or the short time state, and the determination result of the jackpot type.

  In each of the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132G, a random number (random 3) for determining the variation pattern type is determined according to whether the determination result of the big hit type is “normal”, “probability variation”, or “probability”. ) And a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with normal CA3-1, super CA3-2 to super CA3-6, super CB3-1, super CB3-2, special CA4-1, and special CA4-2. A determination value corresponding to one of the variation pattern types of special CB4-1, special CB4-2, special CC4-1, and special CC4-2 is set.

  For example, when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal state, the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132A shown in FIG. 17A used when the big hit type is “normal” and the big hit type is “ The allocation of determination values for the variation pattern types of normal CA3-1 and super CA3-2 is different from the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132B shown in FIG. In the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132A, a determination value is assigned to the variation pattern type of the super CA 3-3, and in the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132B, the variation value type of the super CA 3-3 is determined. Judgment value is not assigned. In the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132A, no determination value is assigned to the variation pattern type of the super CA 3-4, and in the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132B, the variation value type of the super CA 3-4 is not assigned. Judgment value is assigned.

  As described above, when the gaming state is one of the normal state, the probability variation state, and the short-time state, the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132C selected according to the big hit type in the gaming state (when in the normal state) When the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132D to 132F (selected when the probability variation state is selected) and the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A, 132B and 132G (selected during the short time state) are compared, Accordingly, the assignment of the judgment value to each variation pattern type is different. Also, determination values are assigned to different variation pattern types depending on the jackpot type. Therefore, different variation pattern types can be determined according to the determination result of whether the big hit type is a plurality of types, and the ratio determined for the same variation pattern type can be varied.

  Further, in the big hit variation pattern type judgment tables 132C, 132F, 132G used when the big hit type is “surprise”, for example, special CA4-1, special CA4-2, special CB4-1, special CB4-2, When the big hit type such as special CC4-1 or special CC4-2 is other than “surprise”, the determination value is assigned to the variation pattern type to which the determination value is not assigned. Therefore, when controlling to the 2 round big hit state according to the fact that the fluctuation display result becomes “big hit” and the big hit type becomes “surprising”, the fluctuation pattern type different from the case of controlling to the 15 round big hit state is determined. be able to.

  When the big hit type is determined to be “normal”, the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132A shown in FIG. 17A used when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal state or the short-time state. With the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132E shown in FIG. 17D used when the gaming state is a probable variation state, the determination values are assigned to the variation pattern types of normal CA3-1 and super CA3-2. Is different. In the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132A, a determination value is assigned to the variation pattern type of the super CA3-3, and in the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132D, a determination value is assigned to the variation pattern type of the super CA3-3. It is not done. As described above, when the big hit type is determined to be “normal”, “probability change”, or “surprise change”, the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A and 132D (“normal”) selected according to the gaming state. ), The big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132B and 132E (selected when “probability change”), and the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132C, 132F and 132G (selected when “probability”) are compared. Depending on whether the gaming state is a normal state, a short time state, or a probable variation state, the determination value is assigned to each variation pattern type. In addition, a determination value may be assigned to a different variation pattern type depending on the gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to determine different variation pattern types depending on whether the gaming state is a normal state, a short-time state or a probable variation state, and the ratio determined for the same variation pattern type can be varied. it can.

  FIGS. 19A to 19C are explanatory diagrams showing variation patterns type determination tables 133A to 133C for small hits stored in the ROM 54. FIG. The small hit variation pattern type determination tables 133A to 133C indicate that when it is determined that the variation display result is a small hit symbol, the variation pattern type is determined based on the random number (random 3) for variation pattern type determination. It is a table referred to in order to determine any of a plurality of types. Each of the small hit variation pattern type determination tables 133A to 133C is selected, for example, according to a table selection rule as shown in FIG. That is, the game state is selected according to whether it is a normal state, a probability change state, or a time-short state. Each of the small hit variation pattern type determination tables 133A to 133C is a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random number (random 3) value for variation pattern type determination, and includes special CA4-1, special CB4-1, The judgment value corresponding to one of the variation pattern types of the special CC4-1 is included.

  The variation pattern type of the special CA4-1 to which the determination value is assigned in the small hit variation pattern type determination table 133A shown in FIG. 19A is the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132C shown in FIG. Is also assigned a decision value. The variation pattern type of the special CB4-1 to which the determination value is assigned in the small hit variation pattern type determination table 133B shown in FIG. 19B is the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132F shown in FIG. Is also assigned a decision value. The variation pattern type of the special CC 4-1 to which the determination value is assigned in the small hit variation pattern type determination table 133C shown in FIG. 19C is the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132G shown in FIG. Is also assigned a decision value. As described above, the variation pattern types of the special CA 4-1, the special CB 4-1, and the special CC 4-1 are common variations in the case where the big hit type is “surprise” and the case where the fluctuation display result is “small hit”. It is a pattern type. That is, the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132C shown in FIG. 17 (C), the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132F shown in FIG. 17 (F), and FIG. The big hit variation pattern type determination table 132G shown in G) is set so as to include a variation pattern type common to the variation pattern type determined when the variation display result is “small hit”.

  20A to 20C are explanatory diagrams showing reach determination tables 134A to 134C stored in the ROM 54. FIG. The reach determination tables 134A to 134C indicate whether or not the variation display state of the effect symbol is set to the reach state when it is determined that the variation display result is “off”. -2) is a table that is referred to for determination based on (2). Reach determination tables 134A to 134C are selected according to a table selection rule as shown in FIG. That is, the game state is selected according to whether it is a normal state, a probability change state, or a time-short state. Each of the reach determination tables 134A to 134C is a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the random number for reach determination (random 2-2), and is non-reach HA1-1 to non-reach HA1-5, non-reach HB1. −1, non-reach HB1-2, non-reach HC1-1, non-reach HC1-2, the determination result indicating that the reach state is not reached, reach HA2-1 to reach HA2-3, reach HB2-1, reach HC2-1 The determination value corresponding to any of the determination results indicating the reach state is included.

  For example, in the setting of the reach determination table 134A shown in FIG. 20A, the value in the range of “1” to “204” is set to the non-reach HA 1-1 corresponding to the case where the number of reserved storage is “0”. Assigned, a value in the range of “205” to “239” is assigned to the reach HA 2-1. Corresponding to the case where the number of reserved memories is “1”, a value in the range of “1” to “217” that is larger than the number of determination values assigned to the non-reach HA 1-1 is assigned to the non-reach HA 1-2. It has been. A value in the range of “1” to “220”, which is larger than the number of determination values assigned to the non-reach HA 1-1 and the non-reach HA 1-2 corresponding to the case where the number of reserved storage is “2”, is non-reach. Assigned to HA1-3. Corresponding to the case where the number of reserved memories is “3” or “4”, “1” to “1”, which are larger than the number of determination values assigned to each of the non-reach HA 1-1 to non-reach HA 1-3. 230 ”is assigned to non-reach HA1-4. Corresponding to the case where the number of reserved memories is “5” to “8”, “1” to “235”, which is larger than the number of determination values assigned to each of the non-reach HA 1-1 to non-reach HA 1-4. A range decision value is assigned to non-reach HA 1-5. With such a setting, when the number of reserved memories is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (for example, “3”), it is determined that the variation display state of the effect symbol is set to the reach state compared to when the number is less than the predetermined number. The ratio is lower. If the average special symbol variation time in the variation pattern corresponding to “non-reach” is set to be shorter than the average special symbol variation time in the variation pattern corresponding to “reach”. When the number of reserved memories is greater than or equal to the predetermined number, the average special symbol variation time can be shortened compared to when the number is less than the predetermined number.

  FIGS. 21A to 21C are explanatory diagrams showing reach variation pattern type determination tables 135 </ b> A to 135 </ b> C stored in the ROM 54. The reach variation pattern type determination tables 135 </ b> A to 135 </ b> C change the variation pattern type based on the random number (random 3) for determining the variation pattern type when it is determined that the variation display state of the effect symbol is in the reach state. Is a table that is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types. Each of the reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C is selected as a use table according to the determination result indicating the reach state such as reach HA2-1 to reach HA2-3, reach HB2-1, reach HC2-1. The That is, the reach variation pattern type determination table 135A is selected as a use table according to the determination result indicating reach HA2-1 to reach HA2-3, and for reach according to the determination result indicating reach HB2-1. The variation pattern type determination table 135B is selected as the use table, and the reach variation pattern type determination table 135C is selected as the use table according to the determination result indicating that the reach HC2-1 is selected. Each of the reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C has a determination result indicating that the reach state is set to reach HA2-1 to reach HA2-3, reach HB2-1, or reach HC2-1. A numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random number (random 3) value for determining the variation pattern type, which is normal CA2-1, super CA2-2, super CA2-3, super CB2-1, super CB2-2. Data (determination value) for determining any of the fluctuation pattern types.

For example, in the reach variation pattern type determination table 135A shown in FIG.
Corresponding to the determination result that the reach is HA 2-1, a value (determination value) in the range of “1” to “128” is assigned to the variation pattern type of the normal CA 2-1, and other values are super CA 2. -2 and super CA2-3 variation pattern types. Corresponding to the determination result that the reach HA 2-2 is selected, a value in the range of “1” to “170” is assigned to the variation pattern type of the normal CA 2-1. Further, in response to the determination result that the reach HA2-3 is selected, a value in the range of “1” to “182” is assigned to the variation pattern type of the normal CA2-1. The reach HA 2-1 is compared with the reach determination random number (random 2-2) according to the reach determination table 134A shown in FIG. Judgment value to be assigned is assigned. A determination value is assigned to the reach HA 2-2 corresponding to the case where the number of reserved storage is “1” or “2”. A determination value is assigned to the reach HA2-3 corresponding to the case where the number of reserved memories is “3” to “8”. With these settings, the fluctuation pattern of the normal CA 2-1 in which the “normal” reach effect is executed when the reserved storage number is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (for example, “1”) compared to when the number is less than the predetermined number. The rate determined for the type increases. And, the variation time of the average special symbol in the variation pattern that executes the “normal” reach effect is shorter than the variation time of the average special symbol in the variation pattern that executes the reach effect other than “normal”. If the number of reserved memories is greater than or equal to a predetermined number, the average special symbol variation time can be shortened compared to when the number is less than the predetermined number.

  22A to 22C are explanatory diagrams showing non-reach variation pattern type determination tables 136A to 136C stored in the ROM 54. FIG. The non-reach variation pattern type determination tables 136A to 136C indicate the variation pattern based on the random number (random 3) for determining the variation pattern type when it is determined that the variation display state of the effect symbol is not the reach state. It is a table referred in order to determine the type as one of a plurality of types. The non-reach variation pattern type determination tables 136A to 136C are non-reach HA1-1 to non-reach HA1-5, non-reach HB1-1, non-reach HB1-2, non-reach HC1-1, non-reach HC1-2, and the like. The table is selected as a use table according to the determination result indicating that the reach state is not set. That is, the non-reach variation pattern type determination table 136A is selected as a use table according to the determination results of the non-reach HA1-1 to non-reach HA1-5, and the determination results of the non-reach HB1-1 and the non-reach HB1-2. Accordingly, the non-reach variation pattern type determination table 136B is selected as the use table, and the non-reach variation pattern type determination table 136C is selected as the use table according to the determination results of the non-reach HC1-1 and non-reach HC1-2. The In each of the non-reach variation pattern type determination tables 136A to 136C, the determination result indicating that the non-reach state is not set is non-reach HA1-1 to non-reach HA1-5, non-reach HB1-1, non-reach HB1-2, non-reach HC1. -1 or non-reach HC1-2, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random number (random 3) value for determining the variation pattern type depending on whether it is non-reach HC1-2, and non-reach CA1-1 to non-reach It includes data (determination value) corresponding to any of the variation pattern types of reach CA1-4, non-reach CB1-1 to non-reach CB1-3, non-reach CC1-1 to non-reach CC1-3.

  FIGS. 23, 24A and 24B are explanatory diagrams showing hit variation pattern determination tables 137A to 137C stored in the ROM 54. FIG. The hit variation pattern determination tables 137A to 137C determine the variation pattern according to the determination result of the big hit type or the variation pattern type when it is determined that the variation display result is “big hit” or “small hit”. This is a table that is referred to in order to determine a variation pattern as one of a plurality of types based on a random number (random 4). Each of the variation pattern determination tables 137A to 137C is selected as a usage table according to the determination result of the variation pattern type. That is, the hit variation pattern determination table 137A is selected as the usage table in accordance with the determination result that the variation pattern type is either normal CA3-1 or super CA3-2 to super CA3-6, and the variation pattern type is selected as the super table. The hit variation pattern determination table 137B is selected as a use table in accordance with the determination result to select one of CB3-1 to super CB3-2, and the variation pattern type is special CA4-1, special CA4-2, special CB4-. 1, the hit variation pattern determination table 137C is selected as the use table in accordance with the determination result indicating that any one of the special CB4-2, the special CC4-1, and the special CC4-2 is selected. Each hit variation pattern determination table 137A to 137C is a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of random number (random 4) for variation pattern determination according to the variation pattern type, and the variation display result of the effect symbol is Data (determination value) corresponding to any of a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to the case of “big hit” or “small hit” is included.

  FIG. 25 and FIG. 26 are explanatory diagrams showing the deviation variation pattern determination tables 138A and 138B stored in the ROM. The deviation variation pattern determination tables 138A and 138B determine the variation pattern according to whether or not to reach the reach state and the determination result of the variation pattern type when it is determined that the variation display result is “out of range”. This is a table that is referred to in order to determine a variation pattern as one of a plurality of types based on a random number (random 4). Each deviation variation pattern determination table 138A, 138B is selected as a usage table according to the determination result of the variation pattern type. That is, the determination result that the variation pattern type is any one of non-reach CA1-1 to non-reach CA1-4, non-reach CB1-1 to non-reach CB1-3, non-reach CC1-1 to non-reach CC1-3. Accordingly, the deviation variation pattern determination table 138A is selected as the usage table, and the variation pattern type is any one of normal CA2-1, super CA2-2, super CA2-3, super CB2-1, and super CB2-2. Depending on the determination result, the deviation variation pattern determination table 138B is selected as the usage table.

  The deviation variation pattern determination table 138A is a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the random number (random 4) for variation pattern determination in accordance with the variation pattern type. And data (determination value) for determining one of a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to the case where the variation display mode is “non-reach”. The deviation variation pattern determination table 138B is a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the random pattern random number (random 4) value according to the variation pattern type, and the variation display result of the effect symbol is “out of”. And the data (determination value) for determining one of a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to the case where the variation display mode is “reach”.

  In the deviation variation pattern determination table 138A shown in FIG. 25, non-reach PA1-4 to non-reach PA1-5, etc., corresponding to non-reach variation pattern types such as non-reach CA1-4 and non-reach CC1-3. A numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of a random number (random 4) for determining the variation pattern is assigned to the variation pattern (see FIG. 13) for executing the specific effect. With such a setting, non-reach PA1-4 to non-reach corresponds to the determination that the variation display result of the effect symbol is “out” and the determination that the variation display state of the effect symbol is not the reach state. Make a decision to make one of the fluctuation patterns of reach PA1-5 and execute a specific effect (effect of non-reach PA1-4 ("slip") or effect of non-reach PA1-5 ("pseudo-run")). Can do.

  Also, it is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of non-reach PB1-1 corresponding to the fluctuation pattern type of non-reach CB1-1, and assigned to the fluctuation pattern of non-reach PB1-2 corresponding to the fluctuation pattern type of non-reach CB1-2. It has been.

  Then, for a variation pattern type of non-reach CA1-4 including non-reach PA 1-5, a random number (random 3 for determining the variation pattern type) in non-reach variation pattern type determination table 136A shown in FIG. ), A determination value in the range of “217” to “241” is assigned to the non-reach HA 1-1, and “230” is assigned to the non-reach HA 1-2. ”To“ 241 ”is assigned, determination values in the range of“ 231 ”to“ 241 ”are assigned to the non-reach HA1-3, and“ 237 ”to the non-reach HA1-4. A judgment value in the range of “241” is assigned, and a judgment value in the range of “237” to “241” is assigned to the non-reach HA 1-5. Further, for the non-reach HA 1-1, the reach determination random number (random 2-2) corresponding to the case where the number of reserved storage is “0” in the reach determination table 134A shown in FIG. A determination value in the range of “1” to “204” is assigned. For the non-reach HA1-2, in the reach determination table 134A, the reserved storage number corresponds to “1” and is a numerical value (determination value) that is compared with the value of the random number for determination of reach (random 2-2). Thus, determination values in the range of “1” to “217” are assigned. For the non-reach HA1-3, in the reach determination table 134A, the reserved storage number corresponds to “2” and is a numerical value (determination value) that is compared with the value of the random number for reach determination (random 2-2). Thus, determination values in the range of “1” to “220” are assigned. For the non-reach HA1-4, in the reach determination table 134A, the numbers to be compared with the values of the random numbers for reach determination (random 2-2) corresponding to the numbers of reserved storage “3” and “4” ( Determination value) and a determination value in the range of “1” to “230” is assigned, and the non-reach HA1-4 has a storage number “5” to “8” in the reach determination table 134A. Corresponding to the random number (random 2-2) for reach determination, a determination value in the range of “1” to “235” is assigned. Therefore, when the number of reserved memories is “1” or “2”, the ratio determined as the variation pattern type of non-reach CA1-4 is lower than when the number of reserved memories is “0”. . Further, when the reserved storage number is “3” or “4”, the non-reach CA1-4 is compared to the case where the reserved storage number is “0” or “1” or “2”. The ratio determined for the variation pattern type becomes lower. Further, when the number of reserved memories is “5” to “8”, non-reach PA 1-5 (including “pseudo-continuous”) is compared with the case where the number of reserved memories is “0” to “4”. The ratio determined for the variation pattern type of non-reach CA1-4 including the lower becomes lower.

  Further, for the variation pattern types of the non-reach CC1-3 including the non-reach PA1-5, in the variation pattern type determination table 136C for non-reach shown in FIG. ) Is a numerical value (determination value) that is compared with the non-reach HC1-1, a determination value in the range of “234” to “241” is assigned to the non-reach HC1-2, and “235” is assigned to the non-reach HC1-2. ”To“ 241 ”is assigned. In addition, for the non-reach HC1-2, in the reach determination table 134C shown in FIG. 20C, when the number of reserved memories is “2” or more, the number of reserved memories is “0” or “1”. In some cases, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the random number for reach determination (random 2-2) is assigned a determination value in the range of “1” to “231”. Since the number of determination values assigned to non-reach HC1-2 is smaller than that for non-reach HC1-1, if the number of reserved memories is “2” or more, the number of reserved memories is “0” or Compared to the case of “1”, the ratio determined for the variation pattern type of non-reach CC1-3 including non-reach PA1-5 (including “pseudo-continuous”) is lower.

  Note that when the deviation variation pattern determination table 138B illustrated in FIG. 25 is used, only non-reach PA1-5 can be selected as a variation pattern including “pseudo-continuous”, but a plurality of types including “pseudo-continuous” can be selected. The shift variation pattern determination table 138B may be configured so that the variation pattern can be selected.

  In the variation pattern illustrated in FIG. 13, the variation time of the special symbol in the variation pattern of the non-reach PA1-1 in which the specific effect is not executed is 5.75 seconds, and the variation time of the special symbol in the variation pattern of the non-reach PA1-2. Is 3.75 seconds, and the variation time of the special symbol in the variation pattern of non-reach PA1-3 is 1.50 seconds. On the other hand, the variation time of the special symbol in the variation pattern of the non-reach PA1-4 in which the “slip” specific effect is executed is 8.25 seconds, and the non-reach in which the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect is executed. The variation time of the special symbol in the variation pattern of PA1-5 is 16.70 seconds. That is, the variation time of the special symbol in the variation pattern in which the specific effect is executed corresponding to “non-reach” is longer than the variation time of the special symbol in the variation pattern in which the specific effect is not executed. When the number of reserved memories is “1” or more, the ratio determined as the variation pattern type of the non-reach CA 1-4 that executes the specific effect is lower than when it is “0”. In addition, when the number of reserved storage is “3” or more, the ratio determined as the variation pattern type of non-reach CA1-4 is lower than when the number is less than “3”. Therefore, when the number of reserved memories is equal to or greater than the predetermined number, the average special symbol variation time can be shortened compared to when the number is less than the predetermined number.

  In the deviation variation pattern determination table 138B shown in FIG. 26, the variation pattern for executing the “normal” reach effect such as normal PA2-1 to normal PA2-4 corresponding to the variation pattern type of normal CA2-1. A numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random number (random 4) value for variation pattern determination is assigned. Corresponding to the case of the change pattern type of super CA2-2, the change pattern for executing reach effect α1 such as super PA3-1 to super PA3-3, or the reach effect such as super PA3-4 to super PA3-6. A numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random number (random 4) for determining the variation pattern is assigned to the variation pattern for executing α2. Corresponding to the case where the variation pattern type is super CA2-3 or super CB2-1, random numbers for variation pattern determination (random 4) are added to the variation patterns for executing the reach effect β1 such as super PB3-1 to super PB3-3. ) Is assigned a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value.

  Further, for example, with respect to a variation pattern for executing a “pseudo-continuous” specific effect, such as a super-PA 3-3, super-PA 3-6, and super-PB 3-3 variation pattern, an effect design is performed after the quasi-continuous variation is performed. The variation pattern type is classified according to the type of effect operation in the reach effect that is executed based on the fact that the variation display state becomes the reach state. In other words, since the fluctuation pattern of the super PA 3-3 is a fluctuation pattern for executing the reach effect α1, this corresponds to the case where the fluctuation pattern type of the super CA 2-2 in the deviation fluctuation pattern determination table 138B shown in FIG. Thus, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the random number (random 4) value for variation pattern determination is assigned. Since the variation pattern of the super PA 3-6 is a variation pattern for executing the reach effect α2, the variation pattern determination table 138B corresponds to the variation pattern type of the super CA 2-2 in the variation pattern determination table 138B. A numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random number (random 4) value is assigned. Since the variation pattern of the super PB3-3 is a variation pattern for executing the reach effect β1, the variation pattern type of the super CA2-3 or the super CB2-1 in the outlier variation pattern determination table 138B corresponds to the variation pattern type. A numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random number (random 4) value for variation pattern determination is assigned.

  FIG. 27 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the effect pattern of the pseudo-continuous used in this embodiment. FIG. 27A shows a pseudo-continuous effect pattern of pattern a. In FIG. 27A, “A · A” means that the re-variation effect of the first re-variation effect mode shown in FIG. 6A is executed in each of the initial variation and the subsequent re-variation. To do. “A / A / A” indicates that the re-variation effect of the first re-variation effect mode shown in FIG. 6A is executed in each of the initial variation, the subsequent re-variation, and the subsequent re-variation. means. A1, A2, and A3 indicate re-variation effects in the first re-variation effect mode shown in FIG. Further, the period of the re-change effect A1 in “A · A” and “A · A · A” corresponds to the period of FIGS. 7A to 7C, and the change-change effect A2 in “A · A”. The period corresponds to the period shown in FIGS. The period of the re-variation effect A2 in “A, A, A” corresponds to the periods of FIGS. However, the display pattern of the effect symbol at the end of the period is a temporary stop mode, unlike the final stop mode shown in FIG. Further, in the period of the re-change effect A3 in “A, A, A”, for example, all of the upper effect LED 85a, the middle effect LED 85b, and the lower effect LED 85c are controlled to be in the lighting state and controlled to the vibration state.

  FIG. 27B shows a pseudo-continuous effect pattern of pattern B. In FIG. 27 (B), “B · B” executes the re-variation effect of the second re-variation effect mode (I) shown in FIG. 6 (B) in each of the initial variation and the subsequent re-variation. Means that. In “B, B, B”, the re-variation effect of the second re-variation effect mode (I) shown in FIG. 6B is executed in each of the initial variation, the subsequent re-variation, and the subsequent re-variation. Means that. B1, B2, and B3 indicate re-variation effects in the second re-variation effect mode (I) shown in FIG. Further, the period of the revariation effect B1 in “B · B” and “B · B · B” corresponds to the period of FIGS. 8A to 8D, and the revariation effect B2 in “B · B”. The period corresponds to the period shown in FIGS. The period of the revariation effect B2 in “B, B, B” corresponds to the period of FIGS. However, the display mode of the effect symbol at the end of the period is a temporary stop mode, unlike the reach mode shown in FIG. Further, in the period of the re-variation effect B3 in “B, B, B”, the movable member 78 is controlled to be in the operating state, similarly to the period of the re-change effect B1 and B2.

  FIG. 27C shows a pseudo-continuous effect pattern of pattern c. In FIG. 27 (C), “C · C” executes the re-variation effect of the second re-variation effect mode (II) shown in FIG. 6 (C) in each of the initial variation and the subsequent re-variation. Means that. In “C, C, C”, the re-variation effect of the second re-variation effect mode (II) shown in FIG. 6C is executed in each of the initial variation, the subsequent re-variation, and the subsequent re-variation. Means that. C1, C2, and C3 indicate re-variation effects in the second re-variation effect mode (II) shown in FIG. The period of the re-change effect C1 in “C · C” and “C · C · C” corresponds to the period of FIGS. 9A to 9C, and the re-change effect C2 in “C · C”. The period corresponds to the period shown in FIGS. The period of the re-change effect C2 in “C, C, C” corresponds to the period of FIGS. However, the display mode of the effect symbol at the end of the period is a temporary stop mode, unlike the reach mode shown in FIG. Further, in the period of the re-change effect C3 in “C, C, C”, for example, a specific character image 79c (see FIG. 11G) is displayed on the effect display device 9.

  FIG. 27D shows a pseudo-continuous effect pattern of pattern d. In FIG. 27D, A and AB means that the re-variation effect A1 is executed in the first change, and both the re-change effect A2 and the re-change effect B2 are executed in the re-change. A / AC means that the re-variation effect A1 is executed in the first change, and both the re-change effect A2 and the re-change effect C2 are executed in the re-change. B / BC means that the re-variation effect B1 is executed in the first change, and both the re-change effect B2 and the re-change effect C2 are executed in the re-change.

  For A, B, and BC, the re-variation effect A1 is executed in the first change, the re-change effect B2 is executed in the re-change, and both the re-change effect B3 and the re-change effect C3 are executed in the subsequent re-change. Means that. For B, B, and BC, the re-variation effect B1 is executed in the first change, the re-change effect B2 is executed in the re-change, and both the re-change effect B3 and the re-change effect C3 are executed in the subsequent re-change. Means that. As for A, AB, and ABC, the re-variation effect A1 is executed in the first change, the re-change effect A2 and the re-change effect B2 are both executed in the re-change, and the re-change effect A3 and the re-change effect in the subsequent re-change. It means that B3 and re-variation effect C3 are executed.

  27 is merely an example, and the re-variation effect of the first re-change effect mode, the second re-change effect mode (I), and the second re-change effect mode (II). ) Can be arbitrarily combined to produce a pseudo-continuous production pattern. As an example, the second re-variation effect mode (I) or the second re-change effect mode (II) may be executed first, and then the re-change effect of the first re-change effect mode may be executed. .

  FIG. 28 and FIG. 29 are explanatory diagrams showing the pseudo-continuous effect pattern determination tables 139A and 139B stored in the ROM. The pseudo-continuous effect pattern determination tables 139A and 139B include non-reach PA1-5, super PA3-3, super PA3-6, super PB3-3, super PA4-3, super PA4-6, which are fluctuating patterns with pseudo-continuous. The determination values corresponding to the super PA 5-3, super PB 4-3, super PB 5-3, and special PG 1-3 (see FIGS. 13 and 14) are set. The determination value corresponds to a specific variation pattern.

  When the game control microcomputer 560 determines that the variation pattern is a variation pattern with a pseudo-ream, the variation of the effect symbol that uses the specific variation pattern corresponding to the determination value that matches the random 7 value. Determine as a pattern. When determining a specific variation pattern, the game control microcomputer 560 refers to the total pending memory number counter in which the total pending memory number that is the sum of the first pending number and the second pending number is set. If the value of the total pending storage number counter is 0-3, the pseudo-continuous effect pattern determination table 139A shown in FIG. 28 is used, and if the value of the total pending storage number counter is 4-8, it is shown in FIG. The pseudo continuous effect pattern determination table 139B is used.

  28 and 29, symbols in parentheses (A, A, etc.) in specific variation patterns correspond to the symbols in FIGS. 27 (A) to (D). That is, for example, non-reach PA1-5 (A · A) corresponds to the first re-variation effect mode indicated by A · A in FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 28 and 29, the game control microcomputer 560 generates a first re-variation effect (effect indicated by A), a second re-change effect (B or The selection ratio of the effect indicated by C) and the third re-variation effect (the effect in which two or more of A, B, and C are combined as in AB) are made different.

  In this embodiment, when the variation pattern with the “pseudo-ream” is not a big hit, non-reach PA1-5, super PA3-3, super PA3-6, and super PB3-3 can be selected (FIG. 13).

  In the case of a big hit, super PA4-3, super PA4-6, super PA5-3, super PB4-3, super PB5-3, and special PG1-3 can be selected (see FIG. 14).

  As shown in FIG. 28 and FIG. 29, when a big hit is made to a group of non-reach PA1-5, super PA3-3, super PA3-6, and super PB3-3 that can be selected when a big hit is not made The group of Super PA4-3, Super PA4-6, Super PA5-3, Super PB4-3, Super PB5-3, and Special PG1-3 that can be selected has two re-variation effects (the effect of the first variation) (Including (A / AB), for example, the first variation effect is an effect of A, and the re-variation effect is a combination of the effect of A and the effect of B). Each of the ratio and the three re-change effects (including the first change effect) is different (for example, (A, AB, ABC), the first change effect is the A effect, and the re-change Out a combination of the effect of directing and B of A, effect and to have) the ratio different to a combination of the effect of C rendition and B of the next re-variation effect is A is higher. Therefore, by executing an effect in which the two re-change effects are different or the three re-change effects are different, the player can have a sense of expectation for the occurrence of the big hit.

  In other words, as shown in FIG. 28 and FIG. 29, for the group of non-reach PA1-5, super PA3-3, super PA3-6, and super PB3-3 that can be selected in the case of not hitting the jackpot, The group of super PA4-3, super PA4-6, super PA5-3, super PB4-3, super PB5-3, and special PG1-3 that can be selected in the case of AB, AC, BC, ABC There is a high probability that a combination of re-variation effects in different modes will appear. Therefore, the player can have a sense of expectation for the occurrence of the big hit by executing the effect in which the different variation effects are combined.

  In the case of a normal big hit, the fluctuation pattern type is determined based on the big hit fluctuation pattern determination tables 132A and 132D shown in FIG. 17, and the hit fluctuation pattern determination table 137A shown in FIG. 23 and FIG. Since the variation pattern is determined based on ˜137C, the super PA 4-3, the super PA 4-6, and the super PB 4-3 can be selected as the variation pattern accompanied by the “pseudo-continuous” effect. In the case of a promising big hit, the fluctuation pattern type is determined based on the big hit fluctuation pattern determination tables 132B and 132E shown in FIG. 17, and the hit fluctuation pattern determination tables 137A to 137C shown in FIGS. Therefore, in addition to Super PA4-3, Super PA4-6, and Super PB4-3, Super PA5-3 and Super PB5- 3 can be selected.

  In Super PA 5-3 and Super PB 5-3 that can be selected only when the probability variation is a big hit, the number of judgment values corresponding to combinations of re-variation effects of different modes such as AB, BC, and ABC becomes larger. ing. That is, in the case of a probable big hit, there is a high probability that a combination of re-variation effects of different modes such as AB, BC, ABC will appear.

  Therefore, the player can have a sense of expectation for the occurrence of the probable big hit by executing the effect in which the re-variation effects of different modes are combined.

  In this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 includes the hit variation pattern determination tables 137A, 137B, and 137C shown in FIG. 23 to FIG. 26 or the deviation variation pattern determination tables 138A and 138B and the random number 4. After determining the variation pattern using, a specific variation pattern of the pseudo-continuous is determined using the pseudo-continuous effect pattern determination table 139A or the pseudo-continuous effect pattern determination table 139B, but the hit variation pattern determination tables 137A, 137B, By setting a specific variation pattern of the pseudo-continuous and a corresponding determination value in 137C and the deviation variation pattern determination tables 138A and 138B, and determining a variation pattern that coincides with random 4, the specific of the pseudo-continuous So that even the fluctuation pattern can be determined It may be.

  Since the variation pattern including the pseudo-continuous production also includes information regarding the number of times of variation in the pseudo-continuous, by determining the variation pattern including the pseudo-continuous production using the pseudo-continuous performance pattern determination table, The number of changes will also be determined.

  As the variation pattern of the pseudo-continuous, for example, a variation pattern such as a reach variation pattern accompanied by the pseudo-continuous is included in the variation pattern to be selected. The variation pattern is selected and determined first, and the variation pattern selected and determined Is a variation pattern with pseudo-continuations, a specific pseudo-run mode is selected from a plurality of types of pre-defined pseudo-run modes. Further, as the variation pattern of the pseudo-continuous, for example, when selecting the variation pattern, whether or not to make the pseudo-continuous and the mode of the pseudo-continuous are determined first. A specific variation pattern may be selected from a plurality of types of variation patterns.

  FIG. 30 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560. In the example shown in FIG. 30, the command 80XX (H) is an effect control command (variation pattern command) for designating a variation pattern of the effect symbol that is variably displayed on the effect display device 9 in response to the variation display of the special symbol. (Corresponding to the variation pattern XX, respectively). That is, when a unique number is assigned to each of the variation patterns that can be used shown in FIG. 13, FIG. 14, and FIG. 28, variation pattern commands corresponding to each of the variation patterns specified by the number are displayed. is there. “(H)” indicates a hexadecimal number. The effect control command for designating the variation pattern is also a command for designating the start of variation. Therefore, when the production control microcomputer 100 receives the command 80XX (H), the production control device 100 controls the first design symbol display 9a or the second design design display 9b so as to start the design design variation display. In step 9, control is performed so as to start the variation display of the effect symbols.

  The commands 8C01 (H) to 8C05 (H) are effect control commands indicating whether or not to make a big hit and the type of the big hit game. The production control microcomputer 100 determines the display results of the decorative symbols and the production symbols in response to the reception of the commands 8C01 (H) to 8C05 (H), so that the commands 8C01 (H) to 8C05 (H) are specified as the display results. It is called a command.

  The command 8D01 (H) is an effect control command (first symbol variation designation command) indicating that the variation display (variation) of the first special symbol is started. Command 8D02 (H) is an effect control command (second symbol variation designation command) indicating that the variation display (variation) of the second special symbol is started. The first symbol variation designation command and the second symbol variation designation command may be collectively referred to as a special symbol specifying command (or symbol variation designation command). Note that information indicating whether to start the variable display of the first special symbol or the variable display of the second special symbol may be included in the variable pattern command.

  The command 8F00 (H) is an effect control command (symbol determination designation command) indicating that the display (change) of the effect symbol (and decoration symbol) is terminated and the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. When receiving the symbol confirmation designation command, the effect control microcomputer 100 ends the variation display (variation) of the effect symbol and the decorative symbol and derives and displays the display result.

  Command 9000 (H) is an effect control command (initialization designation command: power-on designation command) transmitted when power supply to the gaming machine is started. Command 9200 (H) is an effect control command (power failure recovery designation command) transmitted when power supply to the gaming machine is resumed. When the power supply to the gaming machine is started, the gaming control microcomputer 560 transmits a power failure recovery designation command if data is stored in the backup RAM, and if not, initialization designation is performed. Send a command.

  Command 9F00 (H) is an effect control command (customer waiting demonstration designation command) for designating a customer waiting demonstration.

  The commands A001 to A003 (H) are for displaying a fanfare screen, that is, an effect control command for designating the start of a jackpot game or the start of a jackpot game (a jackpot start designation command or a jackpot start designation command: a fanfare designation command). is there. The big hit start designation command or the small hit start designation command includes a big hit start 1 designation command, a big hit start designation 2 designation command, and a small hit / rush start designation command corresponding to the type or small hit. The command A1XX (H) is an effect control command (special command during opening of a big winning opening) indicating a display during the opening of the big winning opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX. A2XX (H) is an effect control command (designation command after opening the big winning opening) indicating the closing of the big winning opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX.

  Command A301 (H) displays a jackpot end screen, that is, specifies the end of the jackpot game, and also specifies an effect control command (special jackpot end 1 designation command: ending) that specifies that the game is a non-probable big hit (usually a big hit) 1 designation command). Command A302 (H) is an effect control command for displaying the jackpot end screen, that is, the end of the jackpot game and specifying that it is a probable big hit (big hit end 2 designation command: ending 2 designation command). is there. Command A303 (H) is an effect control command (small hit / probability end designation command: ending 3 designation command) for designating the end of the small hit game or the sudden probability change game.

  The command C000 (H) is an effect control command (first start winning designation command) that designates that the first start winning has been won. The command C100 (H) is an effect control command (second start winning designation command) for designating that the second starting win has been won. The first start prize designation command and the second start prize designation command may be collectively referred to as a start prize designation command.

  The command C2XX (H) is an effect control command (total pending storage number designation command) for designating a total number (total pending storage number) that is the sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number. “XX” in the command C2XX (H) indicates the total pending storage number. The command C300 (H) is an effect control command (total pending storage count subtraction designation command) that designates that the total pending storage count is decremented by one. In this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits a total pending storage number subtraction designation command when subtracting the total pending storage number, but does not use the total pending storage number subtraction designation command, and does not use the total pending storage number subtraction designation command. When the stored number is subtracted, the combined pending storage number after the subtraction may be specified by a combined pending storage number designation command.

  The effect control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 101) mounted on the effect control board 80 receives the above-described effect control command from the game control microcomputer 560 mounted on the main board 31. Then, the display state of the image display device 9 is changed in accordance with the contents shown in FIG.

  For example, the game control microcomputer 560 designates the variation pattern of the effect symbol every time there is a start prize and the variation display of the special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b. The variation pattern command and the display result specifying command are transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100.

  In this embodiment, the presentation control command has a 2-byte structure, the first byte represents MODE (command classification), and the second byte represents EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always set to “1”, and the first bit (bit 7) of the EXT data is always set to “0”. Note that such a command form is an example, and other command forms may be used. For example, a control command composed of 1 byte or 3 bytes or more may be used.

  In addition, as the transmission method of the effect control command, the effect control command data is output from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80 via the relay board 77 on the eight parallel signal lines of the effect control signals CD0 to CD7, In addition to the effect control command data, a method of outputting a pulse-like (rectangular wave) capture signal (effect control INT signal) for instructing capture of the effect control command data is used. The 8-bit effect control command data of the effect control command is output in synchronization with the effect control INT signal. The effect control microcomputer 100 mounted on the effect control board 80 detects that the effect control INT signal has risen, and starts a 1-byte data capturing process through an interrupt process.

  In the example shown in FIG. 30, a variation pattern command and a display result specifying command are displayed as a decorative symbol variation display (variation) and a second special symbol display corresponding to the variation of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a. The image display device 9 that can be used in common with the variation display (variation) of the decorative symbol corresponding to the variation of the second special symbol in 8b, and that produces effects in accordance with the variation display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. When controlling the effect parts, it is possible to prevent an increase in the types of commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 to the effect control microcomputer 100.

  Note that the command 8D01 (H) (first symbol variation designation command) and the command 8D02 (H) (second symbol variation designation command) are executed by the effect control microcomputer 100 by the first special symbol display 8a. Whether the first decorative symbol display 9a that performs variable display of the first decorative symbol as a decorative (designating) symbol during the variable symbol display time is subjected to the decorative symbol variation or by the second special symbol display 8b. It is used to determine whether or not the decorative symbol is to be changed in the second decorative symbol display unit 9b that performs the variable display of the second decorative symbol during the variation display time of the second special symbol.

  FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol process (S26) program executed by the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) mounted on the main board 31. As described above, in the special symbol process, a process for controlling the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b and the special winning opening is executed. In the special symbol process, the CPU 56 detects that the game ball has won the first start port switch 13a or the second start port 14 for detecting that the game ball has won the first start game port 13. If the second start opening switch 14a is turned on, that is, if a start winning is generated, the start opening switch passing process is executed (S311 and S312). Then, any one of S300 to S310 is performed. If the first start winning port switch 13a or the second start port switch 14a is not turned on, any one of S300 to S310 is performed according to the internal state.

The processes of S300 to S310 are as follows.
Special symbol normal processing (S300): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is zero. When the game control microcomputer 560 enters a state where the special symbol variation display can be started, the game control microcomputer 560 checks the number of stored numerical data (total number of reserved memories) stored in the reserved memory number buffer. The number of numerical data stored in the reserved storage number buffer can be confirmed by the count value of the total reserved storage number counter. If the count value of the total reserved memory number counter is not 0, it is determined whether the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a big hit or a small hit. In case of big hit, set big hit flag. In the case of a small hit, a small hit flag is set. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (1 in this example) corresponding to S301. The big hit flag and the small hit flag are reset when the big hit game or the small hit game ends.

  Fluctuation pattern setting process (S301): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 1. Also, the variation pattern is determined, and the variation time in the variation pattern (variation display time: the time from the start of the variation display until the display result is derived and displayed (stopped display)) is the variation time of the variation display of the special symbol. Decide to do. Also, a variable time timer for measuring the special symbol variable time is started. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to S302 (2 in this example).

  Display result specifying command transmission process (S302): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 2. Control for transmitting a display result specifying command to the effect control microcomputer 100 is performed. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to S303 (3 in this example).

  Special symbol changing process (S303): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 3. When the variation time of the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern setting process elapses (the variation time timer set in S301 times out, that is, the variation time timer value becomes 0), the internal state (special symbol process flag) is set to S304. Update to the corresponding value (4 in this example).

  Special symbol stop process (S304): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 4. The variable display on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b is stopped, and the stopped symbol is derived and displayed. Further, control is performed to transmit a symbol confirmation designation command to the production control microcomputer 100. When the big hit flag or the small hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (5 or 8 in this example) corresponding to S305 or S308. If neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to S300. The effect control microcomputer 100 controls the effect display device 9 to stop the effect symbol and the decorative symbol when receiving the symbol confirmation designation command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560.

  Preliminary winning opening opening process (S305): This is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 5. In the pre-opening process for the big prize opening, control for opening the big prize opening is performed. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the big prize opening) is initialized, and the solenoid 21 is driven to open the big prize opening. Also, the execution time of the special winning opening opening process is set by the timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to S306 (6 in this example). The pre-opening process for the big winning opening is executed for each round, but when the first round is started, the pre-opening process for the big winning opening is also a process for starting the big hit game. In addition, when the big hit gaming state is a probable change state and the probability change flag is set, the probability change flag is reset (regardless of whether the big hit is a promiscuous big hit or not) )

  Large winning opening open process (S306): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 6. A control for transmitting a round display effect control command during the big hit game state or the small hit game to the effect control microcomputer 100, a process for confirming the establishment of the closing condition of the big prize opening, and the like are performed. If the closing condition for the special prize opening is satisfied and there are still remaining rounds, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (5 in this example) corresponding to S305. When all the rounds are completed, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to S307 (7 in this example).

  Big hit end process (S307): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 7. Control for causing the microcomputer 100 for effect control to perform display control for notifying the player that the big hit gaming state has ended is performed. In addition, a process for setting a flag indicating a gaming state (for example, a probability change flag or a time reduction flag) is performed. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to S300.

  Small hit release pre-processing (S308): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 8. In the pre-opening process for small hits, control is performed to open the big winning opening. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the big prize opening) is initialized, and the solenoid 21 is driven to open the big prize opening. Also, the execution time of the special prize opening opening process is set by the timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to S309 (9 in this example). It should be noted that although the pre-opening process for small hits is executed for each round, the pre-opening process for small hits is also a process for starting a small hit game when starting the first round.

  Small hit release processing (S309): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 9. A control for transmitting a presentation control command for round display during the small hit gaming state to the microcomputer 100 for the presentation control, a process for confirming the establishment of the closing condition of the big prize opening, and the like are performed. If the closing condition for the big prize opening is satisfied and there are still remaining rounds, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to S308 (8 in this example). When all the rounds are completed, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to S310 (in this example, 10 (decimal number)).

  Small hit end process (S310): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 10. Control for causing the microcomputer 100 for effect control to perform display control for notifying the player that the small hit gaming state has ended is performed. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to S300.

  FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the start port switch passing process of S312. In the start port switch passing process executed when at least one of the first start port switch 13a and the second start port switch 14a is in the on state, the CPU 56 is turned on by the first start port switch 13a. Whether or not (S211). If the first start port switch 13a is on, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the first reserved memory number counter for counting the first reserved memory number is 4 (S212). If the value of the first reserved memory number counter is 4, the process proceeds to S221.

  If the value of the first reserved memory number counter is not 4, the CPU 56 increases the value of the first reserved memory number counter by 1 (S213). Further, the CPU 56 corresponds to the value of the total reserved storage number counter in the reserved storage specific information storage area (hold specific area) for storing the winning order to the first start winning opening 13 and the second start winning opening 14. Data indicating “first” is set in the area (S214).

  In this embodiment, when the first start opening switch 13a is turned on (that is, when a game ball starts and wins the first start winning opening 13), data indicating “first” is set, When the second start port switch 14a is turned on (that is, when a game ball starts and wins the second start winning port 14), data indicating “second” is set. For example, the CPU 56 sets 01 (H) as data indicating “first” when the first start port switch 13 a is turned on in the reserved storage specifying information storage area (holding specified area), 2 When the start port switch 14a is turned on, 02 (H) is set as data indicating “second”. In this case, when there is no corresponding reserved storage, 00 (H) is set in the reserved storage specific information storage area (hold specific area).

  FIG. 33A is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of a reserved storage specifying information storage area (holding specified area). As shown in FIG. 33A, an area corresponding to the maximum value (8 in this example) of the total reserved memory number counter is secured in the reserved specific area. FIG. 33A shows an example in which the value of the total pending storage number counter is 5. As shown in FIG. 33A, an area corresponding to the maximum value (8 in this example) of the total reserved memory number counter is secured in the reserved specific area, and the first start winning opening 13 or the second start is determined. Data indicating “first” or “second” is set in the order of winning based on winning in the winning opening 14. Therefore, in the reserved storage specific information storage area (hold specific area), the winning order to the first start winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14 is stored. Note that the reserved specific area is formed in the RAM 55. “Formed in RAM” means an area in the RAM.

  FIG. 33B is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of an area (hold buffer) for storing random numbers and the like corresponding to the hold memory. As shown in FIG. 33 (B), a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value (4 in this example) of the first reserved storage number is secured in the first reserved storage buffer. In addition, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value of the second reserved storage number (4 in this example) is secured in the second reserved storage buffer. The first reserved storage buffer and the second reserved storage buffer are formed in the RAM 55.

  In the start port switch passing process, the CPU 56 executes a process of extracting values from the random number circuit 503 and a counter for generating software random numbers and storing them in the storage area in the first reserved storage buffer (S215). In the process of S215, random R (a big hit determination random number) and random 2-1 (see FIG. 15) that is a software random number are stored in the storage area.

  Next, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the first start winning designation command (S216). Further, the CPU 56 increases the value of the total pending memory number counter indicating the total pending memory number that is the sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number by 1 (S217). Then, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a total pending storage number designation command indicating the total pending storage number based on the value of the total pending storage number counter (S218). Note that the total pending storage number designation command may be transmitted before the first start winning designation command.

  When transmitting an effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 100, the CPU 56 sets an address of a command transmission table (preliminarily set for each command in the ROM) corresponding to the effect control command as a pointer. . Then, the address of the command transmission table corresponding to the effect control command is set in the pointer, and the effect control command is transmitted in effect control command control processing (S29).

  Next, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the second start port switch 14a is turned on (S221). If the second start port switch 14a is on, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the second reserved memory number counter for counting the second reserved memory number is 4 (S222). If the value of the second reserved memory number counter is 4, the process is terminated. If the value of the second reserved memory number counter is 4, the CPU 56 may perform the process of confirming again whether or not the first start port switch 13a is on (see S211).

  If the value of the second reserved memory number counter is not 4, the CPU 56 increases the value of the second reserved memory number counter by 1 (S223). Further, the CPU 56 sets data indicating “second” in an area corresponding to the value of the total reserved storage number counter in the reserved storage specifying information storage area (holding specified area) (S224).

  Next, the CPU 56 extracts values from the random number circuit 503 and a counter for generating software random numbers, and executes a process of storing them in the storage area in the second reserved storage buffer (S225). In the process of S225, random R (big hit determination random number) and random 2-1 (see FIG. 15) are stored in the storage area.

  Next, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a second start winning designation command (S226). Further, the CPU 56 increases the value of the total pending storage number counter by 1 (S227). Then, the CPU 56 transmits a total pending storage number designation command based on the value of the total pending storage number counter (S228). Note that the total pending storage number designation command may be transmitted before the second start winning designation command.

  In addition, you may implement | achieve the process of S213-218 and the process of S223-228 by one common routine. In that case, the CPU 56 first sets data indicating “first” when detecting that the first start port switch 13a is turned on, and indicates that the second start port switch 14a is turned on. When data is detected, the data indicating “second” is set, and the common storage routine selects the reserved memory number buffer (first reserved memory number buffer or second reserved memory number buffer) according to the set data. Or a start prize designation command (first start prize designation command or second start prize designation command) is selected. In this way, when the processing of S213 to 218 and the processing of S223 to 228 are realized by one common routine, the reserved storage buffer shown in FIG. 33 is stored in the first reserved memory (first special symbol) and the second It may be used in common with reserved storage (second special symbol). Specifically, in such a common reserved storage buffer, information indicating whether the storage is “first” or “second” in the order in which winning occurs in each storage area, and extracted. Information indicating random values (big hit determination value and big hit type determination value) may be stored and read according to the stored order to be used for variable display. As in the case of the above-described embodiment, the maximum value of the number of reserved memories may be managed separately for each of the “first” and “second” reserved memories.

  34 and 35 are flowcharts showing the special symbol normal process (S300) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol normal process, the CPU 56 confirms the value of the total number of reserved storage (S51). Specifically, the count value of the total pending storage number counter is confirmed. If the total pending storage number is 0, the process is terminated.

  If the total pending storage number is not 0, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the first data among the data set in the pending specific area (see FIG. 33A) is data indicating “first”. (S52). If it is data indicating “first”, a special symbol pointer (a flag indicating whether special symbol process processing is being performed for the first special symbol or special symbol process processing is being performed for the second special symbol) is set to “first”. 1 "is set (S53). If it is not data indicating “first”, that is, if it is data indicating “second”, data indicating “second” is set in the special symbol pointer (S54).

  In the RAM 55, the CPU 56 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number = 1 indicated by the special symbol pointer, and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55 (S55). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 determines each disturbance stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = 1 in the first reserved memory number buffer. The numerical value is read and stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the CPU 56 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = 1 in the second reserved memory number buffer. And stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55.

  Then, the CPU 56 decrements the count value of the reserved storage number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (S56). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 decrements the count value of the first reserved memory number counter by 1 and saves each storage area in the first reserved memory number buffer. Shift the contents of. When the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the count value of the second reserved memory number counter is decremented by 1, and the contents of each storage area in the second reserved memory number buffer are shifted.

  That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 saves the first reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first reserved memory number buffer of the RAM 55. Are stored in a storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = n−1. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, it is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved memory number buffer of the RAM 55. Each random number value is stored in a storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n−1.

  Therefore, the order in which each random value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first reserved memory number (or each second reserved memory number) is extracted is always the first reserved memory number (or (Second reserved storage number) = 1, 2, 3, 4 in order.

  Then, the CPU 56 stores the count value of the total pending storage number counter in a predetermined area of the RAM 55 (S57), and then decreases the value of the total pending storage number by one. That is, 1 is subtracted from the count value of the total pending storage number counter (S58). The CPU 56 stores the value of the total pending storage number counter before the count value is decremented by 1 in a predetermined area of the RAM 55.

  In the special symbol normal process, first, data indicating “first” indicating that the process is executed for the first start winning opening 13, that is, “first” indicating that the process is executed for the first special symbol. ”Or“ second ”indicating that the process is performed on the second special symbol, that is,“ second ”indicating that the process is performed on the second start winning opening 14. Data is set in the special symbol pointer. In the subsequent processing in the special symbol process, processing corresponding to the data set in the special symbol pointer is executed. Therefore, the process of S300-S310 can be made common by the case where the 1st special symbol is made object and the case where the 2nd special symbol is made object.

  Next, the CPU 56 reads a random R (a jackpot determination random number) from the random number buffer area (S61), and executes a jackpot determination module (S62). The big hit determination module is a program that compares a predetermined big hit determination value (see FIG. 16) with a big hit determination random number, and executes a process of determining a big hit or a small hit if they match. In other words, this is a program for executing the big hit determination process.

  The jackpot determination process is configured such that when the gaming state is a probable change state (high probability state), the probability of a big hit is higher than when the gaming state is a non-probability change state (normal game state and short-time state). ing. Specifically, a jackpot determination table at the time of probability change in which a large number of jackpot determination values are set in advance (a table in which the value on the right side of FIG. 16A in the ROM 54 is set) and the number of jackpot determination values are variable There is provided a normal big hit determination table (a table in which the numerical values on the left side of FIG. 16A in the ROM 54 are set) set to be smaller than the big hit determination table. Then, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the gaming state is a probability variation state. When the gaming state is a probability variation state, the CPU 56 performs a jackpot determination process using the probability variation jackpot determination table. When in the gaming state, the big hit determination process is performed using the normal big hit determination table. That is, when the value of the big hit determination random number (random R) matches any of the big hit determination values shown in FIG. 16A, the CPU 56 determines that the special symbol is a big hit (probability big hit or normal big hit). . When it is determined to be a big hit (S61), the process proceeds to S71. Note that deciding whether to win or not is to decide whether or not to shift to the big hit gaming state, but to decide whether or not to stop the special symbol display as a big hit symbol. But there is.

  Note that whether or not the current gaming state is the probability variation state is determined by whether or not the probability variation flag is set. The probability variation flag is set when the gaming state is shifted to the probability variation state, and is reset when the probability variation state is terminated. Specifically, the confirmation flag is set in the process of ending the big hit game when it is determined to be a probable big hit or suddenly probable big hit, and is reset at the start of the big hit game when the next big hit occurs. (Even if the next big hit is a promising big hit, it is reset once at the start of the big hit game).

  If the random R value does not match any of the big hit determination values, it is checked whether the random R value matches any of the small hit determination values (S62). If they match, a small hit flag is set (S63). Then, the process proceeds to S75. If it does not coincide with the small hit determination value, the process proceeds to S75 as it is.

  In S71, the CPU 56 sets a big hit flag. Then, the jackpot type determination table 131 shown in FIG. 16C is selected as a table used to determine the jackpot type as one of a plurality of types (S72). The type corresponding to the value of the jackpot type determination random number (random 2-1) stored in the random number buffer area (“normal”, “probability” or “surprise”) is determined as the jackpot type ( S73). Further, the data indicating the determined jackpot type is set in the jackpot type buffer in the RAM 55 (S74). For example, when the jackpot type is “normal”, “01” is set as the data indicating the jackpot type, and when the jackpot type is “probability”, “02” is set as the data indicating the jackpot type. Is “03”, “03” is set as data indicating the big hit type. In addition, about the 1st special symbol corresponding to the 1st start winning opening 13 in which the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is not provided, you may make it not allocate "accuracy" among jackpot types. In that case, the ratio of the jackpot type of “probability change” (“Accuracy” is not selected) is selected for the first special symbol, and the jackpot type that is the combination of “probability” and “surprise” is selected for the second special symbol The setting is made so that the ratio is equal. In addition, regarding the second special symbol corresponding to the second start winning opening 14 provided with the variable winning ball apparatus 15, it is possible not to allocate “accuracy” among the big hit types. In that case, the ratio of the jackpot type of “probability change” (“Accuracy” is not selected) is selected for the second special symbol, and the jackpot type is selected that combines “probability” and “surprise” for the first special symbol. The setting is made so that the ratio is equal. If it does in this way, it will become easy to generate | occur | produce 15R big hits about the start winning to the 2nd starting winning opening 14, and it can improve the interest of a game.

  Next, the CPU 56 determines a stop symbol of the special symbol (S75). Specifically, when the big hit flag and the small hit flag are not set, “−” as a special symbol is determined as the special symbol stop symbol. When the small hit flag is set, “5” as the small hit symbol is determined as a special symbol stop symbol. When the big hit flag is set, one of “1”, “3”, and “7”, which is a big hit symbol, is determined as a special symbol stop symbol according to the determination result of the big hit type. That is, when the big hit type is determined to be “surprise”, “1”, which is the two round big hit symbol, is determined as a special symbol stop symbol. When the big hit type is determined as “normal” or “probability change”, “3” or “7” is determined as a special symbol stop symbol.

  Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (S301) (S76).

  FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern setting process (S301) in the special symbol process. In the variation pattern setting process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the big hit flag is set (S91).

  When the big hit flag is set, the table used for determining the variation pattern type as one of a plurality of types is based on the gaming state according to the table selection rule shown in FIG. One of the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132G is selected (S92). Then, the process proceeds to S101. The CPU 56 can determine the gaming state based on the state of the probability change flag and the time reduction flag.

  If the big hit flag is not set, it is confirmed whether or not the small hit flag is set (S93). When the small hit flag is set, the small hit variation according to the table selection rule shown in FIG. 19D is used as a table used to determine the variation pattern type as one of a plurality of types. One of the pattern type determination tables 133A to 133C is selected (S94). Then, the process proceeds to S101.

  If the small hit flag is set in S93, that is, if neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal state, the probability variation state, or the short-time state Based on the above, according to the table selection rule shown in FIG. 20D, any one of the reach determination tables 134A to 134C is used as a table used to determine whether or not to change the effect symbol display state to the reach state. Is selected (S95). Further, random 2-2 is extracted by extracting the count value of the counter for generating random 2-2 (S96). Then, the CPU 56 is in the reach state corresponding to the value that matches the value of random 2-2 in the area corresponding to the reserved storage number (the value of the reserved storage number counter) in any of the selected reach determination tables 134A to 134C. Based on the data indicating presence / absence, whether or not to reach the reach state and the type of effect when not reaching the reach state or the reach type when reaching the reach state are determined (S97). Note that the value before being decremented by the process of S53 may be used as the reserved storage number used in the process of S97.

  Then, in the determination at S97, it is determined whether or not it has been determined to reach the reach state (S98). When it is determined to reach the reach state, the variation pattern type is determined according to the reach type (reach HA2-1 to reach HA2-3, reach HB2-1, or reach HC2-1) determined in the process of S97. Is selected as one of a plurality of types, one of reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C is selected (S99). On the other hand, when it is determined not to reach the reach state, the types of effects determined in the process of S97 (non-reach HA1-1 to non-reach HA1-5, non-reach HB1-1, non-reach HB1-2, non-reach) Any one of non-reach variation pattern type determination tables 136A to 136C as a table used to determine one of a plurality of variation pattern types according to reach HC1-1 or non-reach HC1-2). Is selected (S100). Then, the process proceeds to S101.

  In S101, the CPU 56 extracts the value of random 3 by extracting the count value of the counter for generating random 3. Based on the extracted random 3 value, the variation pattern type is determined as one of a plurality of types by referring to the table selected in the processing of S92, S94, S99, or S100 (S102).

  Next, based on the determination result of the variation pattern type in S102, the CPU 56 uses hit variation pattern determination tables 137A to 137C as the tables used for determining any one of a plurality of variation patterns. One of the tables 138A and 138B is selected (S103). Further, the value of random 4 is extracted by extracting the count value of the counter for generating random 4 (S104). Based on the extracted random value 4, the variation pattern is determined as one of a plurality of types by referring to the variation pattern determination table selected in the process of S103 (S105).

  Then, it is confirmed whether or not a variation pattern including a pseudo-continuous effect is determined as the variation pattern (S105A). When the variation pattern including the pseudo-continuous effect is determined as the variation pattern, the CPU 56 determines the pseudo-continuous effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 28 if the value of the total pending storage number counter is 0 to 3. 139A is selected, and if the value of the total pending storage number counter is 4 to 8, the pseudo-continuous effect pattern determination table 139B shown in FIG. 29 is selected, and the count value of the counter for generating random 7 is extracted. To extract a random value of 7. Then, based on the extracted random value 7, by referring to the selected pseudo-continuous effect pattern determination table, the variation pattern including the pseudo-continuous effect is determined as one of a plurality of types (S105B). On the other hand, when a variation pattern other than the variation pattern including a pseudo-continuous effect is determined as the variation pattern, the variation pattern based on the value of the random value 7 is not determined.

  The processes of S105A and S105B are the re-variation effect selection process for selecting the first re-variation effect or the second re-variation effect as the re-variation effect, or the first re-variation effect and the second re-effect as the re-variation effect. A variation effect selection process for selecting a variation effect or a third variation effect in which the first variation effect and the second variation effect are combined is included.

  Next, an effect control command (variation pattern command) corresponding to the determined variation pattern is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 (S106).

  Also, the special symbol change is started (S107). For example, the start flag corresponding to the special symbol referred to in the special symbol display control process of S33 is set. Further, a value corresponding to the variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the variation time timer formed in the RAM 55 (S108). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the display result specifying command transmission process (S302) (S109).

  FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the display result specifying command transmission process (S302). In the display result specifying command transmission process, the CPU 56 transmits an effect control command (see FIG. 30) of one of the display results 1 to 5 specified in accordance with the determined big hit type, small hit, and loss. Control to do. Specifically, the CPU 56 first checks whether or not the big hit flag is set (S110). If not set, the process proceeds to S116. When the big hit flag is set, it is confirmed whether or not the big hit type is a probable big hit (S111). When the big hit type is a probable big hit, control is performed to transmit a display result 3 designation command (S112). On the other hand, when the big hit type is not a probable big hit, it is checked whether or not the big hit type is a sudden probable big hit (S113). (S114). On the other hand, when the big hit type is not suddenly probable big hit, that is, when the big hit type is neither probable big hit nor sudden probable big hit, control is performed to transmit a display result 2 designation command (S115).

  When the CPU 56 confirms that the small hit flag is set in the process of S116, the CPU 56 performs a control to transmit a display result 5 designation command (S117). When the small hit flag is not set, control is performed to transmit a display result 1 designation command (S118).

  Then, a total pending storage number subtraction designation command designating that 1 is subtracted from the total pending storage number is transmitted (S119). Instead of transmitting the total pending storage number subtraction designation command, a total pending storage number designation command for designating the total pending storage number after subtraction may be transmitted. In addition, the CPU 56 stores the transmitted display result specifying command in the effect symbol type storage area in the RAM 55.

  Thereafter, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol changing process (S303) (S120).

  FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the special symbol changing process (S303) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol changing process, the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the variable time timer (S125). When the variable time timer times out (S126), the value of the special symbol process flag is set to a value corresponding to the special symbol stop process (S304). Update (S127). If the variable time timer has not timed out, the process ends.

  FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the special symbol stop process (S304) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 56 sets the end flag referred to in the special symbol display control process of S32 to end the variation of the special symbol, and the first special symbol display unit 8a or the second special symbol display unit 8b Control for deriving and displaying the stop symbol is performed (S131). If data indicating “first” is set in the special symbol pointer, the variation of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a is terminated, and “second” is indicated in the special symbol pointer. When data is set, the variation of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b is terminated. Further, control for transmitting a symbol confirmation designation command to the production control microcomputer 100 is performed (S132). If the big hit flag is not set, the process proceeds to S139 (S133).

  If the big hit flag is set, the CPU 56 resets the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag (S134), and performs control to transmit a big hit start designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (S135). Specifically, when the type of jackpot is a probabilistic jackpot, a jackpot start 2 designation command is transmitted. When the big hit type is suddenly a probable big hit, a small hit / surprise start designation command is transmitted. Otherwise, a jackpot start 1 designation command is transmitted. Whether or not the big hit type is a probable big hit or a sudden probable big hit is determined based on the data indicating the big hit type stored in the RAM 55 (data stored in the big hit type buffer).

  Further, a value corresponding to the big hit display time (time for notifying the occurrence of the big hit, for example, in the effect display device 9) is set in the big hit display time timer (S136). In addition, the number of times of opening (for example, 15 times in the case of a normal big hit and a probable big hit (15 round big hit), 2 times in the case of a sudden hit (2 round big hit)) is set in the big prize opening number counter (S137). ). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special winning opening opening pre-processing (S305) (S138).

  In S139, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the time reduction flag indicating that the time reduction state is set. If the time reduction flag is set, the value of the time reduction counter indicating the number of times the special symbol can be changed in the time reduction state is decremented by 1 (S140). Then, it is checked whether or not the value of the time reduction counter is 0 (S141). If the value of the time reduction counter is 0, the time reduction flag is reset (S142). Then, it is confirmed whether or not the small hit flag is set (S143). When the small hit flag is set, control is performed to transmit a small hit / probability start designation command to the production control microcomputer 100 (S144). In addition, a value corresponding to the small hit display time (for example, the time when the effect display device 9 notifies that the small hit has occurred) is set in the small hit display time timer (S145). Further, the number of times of opening (2 times) is set in the special winning opening opening number counter (S146). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small hit release pre-processing (S308) (S147). If the small hit flag is not set, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (S300) (S148).

  FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the pre-opening process for the special winning opening in the special symbol process (S305). In the pre-opening process for the big winning opening, the CPU 56 decrements the value of the big winning opening control timer by 1 (S401). Then, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the big prize opening control timer is 0 (S402). If the value of the big prize opening control timer is not 0, the process is terminated.

  When the value of the big prize opening control timer is 0, the CPU 56 designates the big prize opening opening designation command (A1XX) for designating the display state according to the number of rounds during the opening of the big prize opening (during round). (H)) is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100 (S403). Note that the CPU 56 recognizes the number of rounds by checking the value of the number-of-releases counter for counting the number of rounds in the big hit game. Then, the CPU 56 performs control for driving the solenoid 21 to open the special winning opening (special variable winning ball apparatus 20) (S404), and decrements the value of the opening number counter by -1 (S405).

  In addition, a value corresponding to the maximum time that the big prize opening can be opened in each round is set in the big prize opening control timer (S406). For example, in the case of 15 round big hits, the maximum time is 29 seconds, and in the case of sudden probability big hit or small hit, the maximum time is 0.5 seconds. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the step large winning opening opening process (S306) (S415).

  FIG. 41 and FIG. 42 are flowcharts showing the special winning opening opening process (S306) in the special symbol process. In the special prize opening opening process, the CPU 56 decrements the value of the special prize opening control timer by 1 (S420).

  Then, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the value of the special winning opening control timer has become 0 (S421). When the value of the big prize opening control timer is not 0, it is confirmed whether or not the count switch 23 is turned on (S432). If the count switch 23 is not turned on, the process is terminated. When the count switch 23 is turned on, the value of the winning number counter for counting the number of winning game balls to the big winning opening is incremented by one (S433). Then, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the winning number counter is a predetermined number (for example, 10) (S434). If the value of the winning number counter is not a predetermined number, the process is terminated. Note that the determination order of S421 and S432 may be reversed.

  When the value of the big prize opening control timer is 0, or when the value of the winning number counter is a predetermined number, the CPU 56 performs control to drive the solenoid 21 and close the big prize opening (S435). ). Then, the value of the winning number counter is cleared (set to 0) (S436).

  Next, the CPU 56 confirms the value of the opening number counter (S438). When the value of the number-of-opening counter is not 0, the CPU 56 designates the post-big prize opening after-opening designation command (A2XX (H)) for designating the display state according to the number of rounds after the big prize opening is opened (after the round is completed). ) Is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100 (S439). Then, a value corresponding to the time (interval period) from the end of the round to the start of the next round (interval period) is set in the big prize opening control timer (S440), and the value of the special symbol process flag is opened. The value is updated according to the preprocessing (S305) (S441). The interval period is, for example, 5 seconds. In the case of sudden hits or small hits suddenly, it may be shorter than 15R big hits.

  When the value of the number-of-opens counter is 0, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a big hit end 2 designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 when the data showing the big hit type is data showing the probability variation big hit. (S442, S447). Then, the CPU 56 sets a value corresponding to the jackpot end time (for example, the time at which the effect display device 9 notifies that the jackpot game has ended) to the jackpot control timer (S449), and the value of the special symbol process flag Is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot end process (S307) (S450).

  When the data indicating the big hit type is not the data indicating the probability variation big hit but the data indicating the sudden probability variation big hit, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a small hit / surprise end designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 ( S443, S444). When the data indicating the big hit type is not the data indicating the probable big hit, control is performed to transmit the big hit end 1 designation command to the production control microcomputer 100 (S445). Then, the process proceeds to S449.

  FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end process (S307) in the special symbol process. In the jackpot end process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the jackpot end display timer is set (S150). If the jackpot end display timer is set, the process proceeds to S154. If the jackpot end display timer is not set, the jackpot flag is reset (S151), and control for transmitting a jackpot end designation command is performed (S152). Here, if it is a probable big hit, a big hit end 2 designation command is transmitted. Also, if suddenly a big odd hit, a small hit / surprise end designation command is transmitted. If neither the probability variation big hit nor the sudden probability variation big hit is found, a big hit end 1 designation command is transmitted. Then, a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time during which the big hit end display is being performed in the image display device 9 (big hit end display time) is set in the big hit end display timer (S153), and the processing is ended.

  In S154, 1 is subtracted from the value of the big hit end display timer. Then, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the jackpot end display time has elapsed (S155). If not, the process ends. If it has elapsed, it is confirmed whether or not the type of jackpot is a probability variation jackpot or a sudden probability variation jackpot (S158).

  If the big hit type is a probability change big hit or a sudden probability change big hit, the probability change flag is set to shift the gaming state to the probability change state (S161). Then, the process proceeds to S162. On the other hand, if the type of jackpot is not a probability variation jackpot or a sudden probability variation jackpot, the process proceeds to S162. In S162, the time reduction flag is set (S162), and for example, 100 is set in the time reduction counter (S163). As a result, after the big hit gaming state is ended, the time-saving state is always controlled. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (S300) (S164).

  Note that although the timers and flags to be handled are different, the processing for pre-opening small hits in S308 is the same as the processing for pre-opening big hits in S305. This is a process, and the small hit end pre-processing in S310 is the same as the big hit end process in S307.

  Next, specific examples of effects executed during variable display will be described with reference to the explanatory diagrams of FIGS. 44 to 47, the display screen of the effect display device 9 is shown by a rectangle. That is, in FIGS. 44 to 47, a part of the display screen of the circular effect display device 9 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 44 is a result of the control of the effect control microcomputer 100 when the variation display mode of the effect symbol is “non-reach”, when the specific effect is not executed, and when the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect is executed. 12 is an explanatory diagram showing a display operation example in the effect display device 9. FIG.

  When the fluctuation pattern of the non-reach PA1-1 is designated by the fluctuation pattern designation command, the specific effect is not executed as shown in FIGS. 44 (C1) and (C2). When the variation pattern of the non-reach PA1-4 is designated, a specific effect of “slip” as shown in FIGS. 44 (E1) to (E4) is executed. When the variation pattern of the non-reach PA 1-5 is designated, the “pseudo-continuous” specific effects as shown in FIGS. 44 (D1) to (D6) are executed. 44 (D1) to 44 (D6) show simplified pseudo-continuous effects.

  The example shown in FIG. 44A corresponds to, for example, “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R corresponding to the start of variation of special symbols in the special symbol variation display. In all, the production design changes. After that, as shown in FIG. 44B, the effect symbol “6” is stopped (temporarily stopped) in the “left” symbol display area 9L.

  When the specific effect is not executed or when the “slip” specific effect is executed, in response to the determination that the effect symbol “6” is determined as the left final stop symbol FZ1-1, FIG. The stop display of the effect symbol as shown in FIG. Note that if the variation display mode of the effect symbol is “non-reach”, the specific effect pattern is always determined to be the slip TP1-1 if the variation pattern of the non-reach PA1-4 in which the specific effect of “slip” is executed. Then (see FIG. 58), a “slip” specific effect is performed in which the effect symbol is re-varied at high speed in the “right” symbol display area 9R. Therefore, the effect symbol stopped and displayed in the “left” symbol display area 9L is not changed depending on the specific effect of “slip”. When the specific effect of “pseudo-continuous” is executed, when the effect symbol “6” is determined as the left final stop symbol FZ1-1, the effect symbol stop display as shown in FIG. Done.

  Thereafter, when the specific effect is not executed, for example, as shown in FIG. 44 (C1), the effect symbol “7” is stopped and displayed (temporary stop display) in the “right” symbol display area 9R. As shown in 44 (C2), after the effect symbol “4” is stopped and displayed in the “medium” symbol display area 9C (temporary stop display), the effect symbol that is a non-reach combination is stopped (final stop display). Is done. At this time, the effect symbols that are stopped and displayed in the “right” symbol display area 9R and the “middle” symbol display area 9C are determined as the right final stop symbol FZ1-2 and the middle final stop symbol FZ1-3.

  When the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect is executed, for example, as shown in FIG. 44 (D1), the “7” effect symbol is stopped and displayed (temporary stop display) in the “right” symbol display area 9R. Then, as shown in FIG. 44 (D2), by stopping the display of the effect symbol “6” in the “medium” symbol display area 9C (temporary stop display), the effect symbol that becomes the pseudo consecutive chance eye GC6 is stopped. Is displayed. At this time, for example, a temporary stop display such as a fluctuation change display of the effect symbols is performed, and then the effect symbols are changed again in all the symbol display areas 9L, 9C, 9R as shown in FIG. 44 (D3). Thereafter, for example, as shown in FIGS. 44 (D4) to (D6), “6”, “7”, and “4” effect symbols are sequentially applied in a predetermined order of “left” → “right” → “middle”. After the stop display (temporary stop display), the effect symbol which is a non-reach combination is stopped and displayed (final stop display).

  When the “slip” specific effect is executed, for example, as shown in FIG. 44 (E1), the “5” effect symbol is stopped and displayed (temporary stop display) in the “right” symbol display area 9R. Thus, as shown in FIG. 44 (E2), the effect symbol is re-varied at high speed in the “right” symbol display area 9R. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 44 (E3), the effect symbol to be stopped and displayed is changed so that the effect symbol “7” is obtained in the “right” symbol display area 9R. Here, as shown in FIG. 44 (E1), the effect symbols that are temporarily stopped and displayed in the “right” symbol display area 9R are determined based on, for example, the determined right final stop symbol FZ1-2 (FIG. 44). 53). After that, for example, as shown in FIG. 44 (E4), after the effect symbol “4” is stopped and displayed in the “medium” symbol display area 9C (temporary stop display), the effect symbol that is a non-reach combination is stopped. Displayed (final stop display). Further, when a special effect of “slip” is executed, when a big hit is made, an effect symbol that is a combination of big hits is stopped and displayed (final stop display) as a result of the specific effect of “slip”. As an example, when a special effect of “slip” is executed, such as special PG 1-2, when a big hit is made in a non-reach, for example, in the symbol display areas “left”, “middle”, and “right” After symbols such as “1”, “2”, and “2” are temporarily stopped, for example, the effect symbol re-varies at high speed in the symbol display area of “left”. Then, the re-changed symbols are stopped at “2” so as to constitute a combination of jackpot symbols, and the effect symbols that finally become jackpots are stopped and displayed (final stop display).

  45 to 47 are explanatory diagrams illustrating display operation examples when the variation display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is other than “probability”. In the example shown in FIG. 45 (A), for example, the symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R of “left”, “middle”, and “right” correspond to the start of variation of the special symbol in the variation display of the special symbol. In all, the production design changes. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 45B, the effect symbol “6” is stopped (temporarily stopped) in the “left” symbol display area 9L.

  For example, when the specific effect of “slip” is executed as in the case where the variation pattern is Super PA4-2, as shown in FIGS. 45 (C1) to (C3), “Left” and After the effect symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the “right” symbol display areas 9L and 9R, the effect symbols are changed again in the “right” symbol display area 9R and then stopped and displayed. Effect display is performed to change the effect symbol to be stopped and displayed so as to reach the reach state. Further, for example, when a specific effect of “pseudo-continuous” is executed, such as when the variation pattern is Super PA 4-3, as shown in FIGS. 45 (D1) to (D5), all symbols are displayed. After the effect symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R, effect display is performed in which the effect symbols are changed again (pseudo-variable) in all the symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R. After that, the effect symbols “6” in the “left” and “right” symbol display areas 9L and 9R are all stopped and displayed (temporary stop display), so that the variation display state of the effect symbols becomes the reach state.

  In the reach state as shown in FIG. 45 (C3) and FIG. 45 (D5), as shown in FIG. 46 (A), the changing speed of the effect symbol in the “medium” symbol display area 9C decreases. . When the variation pattern is any of normal PA2-5 to normal PA2-8, etc., as shown in FIG. 46B, the number “6” in the “medium” symbol display area 9C is “ A “normal” reach effect that is stopped (temporarily stopped) together with the left and right symbol display areas 9L and 9R is performed. In the example shown in FIG. 46B, the effect symbols constituting the jackpot combination are stopped and displayed in correspondence with the case where the fluctuation display result is “big hit”, but the fluctuation display result is “out”. For example, as shown in FIG. 46 (H), after displaying an effect image indicating that the number indicating “5” is stopped and displayed in the symbol display area 9C having “medium”, “medium” is displayed. Reach out of the reach combination by stopping and displaying effect symbols other than the number indicating “6” in the “medium” symbol display area 9C, such as stopping the effect symbol of the number “5” in the symbol display area 9C. It is only necessary to stop and display the effect symbols constituting the, and end the effect symbol variation display. When the reach effect α1 to the reach effect α3, the reach effect β1, and the reach effect β2 are executed, as shown in FIG. 46C, the change of the effect symbol in the “medium” symbol display area 9C that has been reduced. The speed increases again, and various reach effects are displayed. In the reach effect β1, after the character image CH2 as shown in FIG. 46D is displayed, the corresponding reach effect display proceeds. Further, in the case of any one of the reach effects α1 to the reach effects α3, after the character image CH1 as shown in FIG. 46 (E) is displayed, the reach effect display as shown in FIG. 46 (F) proceeds. To do. Then, in the reach effect α1, as shown in FIG. 46 (G), an effect symbol that is stopped and displayed (temporary stop display) in the first stage effect display appears. In the example shown in FIG. 46 (G), the effect symbols constituting the jackpot combination are stopped and displayed corresponding to the case where the fluctuation display result is “big hit”, but the fluctuation display result becomes “out of place”. In such a case, it is only necessary to stop and display the effect symbols constituting the reach-rejected combination and end the effect symbol variation display. On the other hand, in reach effect α2 and reach effect α3, as shown in FIGS. 46 (H) and (I), the process proceeds to the second stage effect display. In the reach effect β2, the corresponding reach effect display proceeds after the character image CH3 as shown in FIG. 46J is displayed.

  When the second stage effect display progresses as shown in FIG. 46 (I), if the reach effect α2 is reached, the second stage effect display stops (temporary stop display) as shown in FIG. 47 (A). The directed design appears. When the variation display result is “out of”, the displayed effect symbols are not changed, the effect symbols constituting the reach-off combination are stopped and displayed, and the effect symbol variation display is terminated. Further, in the reach effect α3, for example, the process proceeds to a third stage effect display (also referred to as “relief effect”). Then, an effect symbol that is stopped (temporarily stopped) in the third stage effect display appears. Thereafter, the effect symbol is stopped and displayed.

  Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by the effect control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 101) as effect control means mounted on the effect control board 80. The effect control CPU 101 starts executing the main process when the power is turned on. In the main processing, first, initialization processing is performed for clearing the RAM area, setting various initial values, and initializing a timer for determining the activation control activation interval (for example, 2 ms) (S701). Thereafter, the effect control CPU 101 proceeds to a loop process for monitoring a timer interrupt flag (S702). When a timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 101 sets a timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. If the timer interrupt flag is set in the main process, the effect control CPU 101 clears the flag (S703) and executes the effect control process of S704 to S709.

  In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 101 first analyzes the received effect control command, and performs a command analysis process for setting a flag according to the received effect control command (S704). Next, the effect control CPU 101 performs effect control process processing (S705). In the effect control process, the process corresponding to the current control state (effect control process flag) is selected from the processes corresponding to the control state, and display control of the effect display device 9 is executed.

  Next, a first decorative symbol display control process is performed (S706). In the first decorative symbol display control process, display control of the first decorative symbol display 9a is executed. Further, a second decorative symbol display control process is performed (S707). In the second decorative symbol display control process, display control of the second decorative symbol display 9b is executed. Further, a hold storage display control process for controlling the display state of the combined hold storage display unit 18c is executed (S708). Furthermore, a random number update process for updating the count value of a counter (random counter) for generating a random number used for determining the aspect of the effect or the like is executed (S709). Thereafter, the process proceeds to S702. As in the special symbol process executed by the game control microcomputer 560, the first ornament symbol display control process and the second ornament symbol display control process are made common, that is, realized by one program module. Thus, the capacity of the program executed by the production control microcomputer 100 may be reduced.

  49 and 50 are flowcharts showing a specific example of the command analysis process (S704). The effect control command received from the main board 31 is stored in the reception command buffer, but in the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 101 confirms the content of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

  In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 101 first checks whether or not a reception command is stored in a command reception buffer formed in the RAM (S611). Whether it is stored or not is determined by comparing the value of the command reception number counter with the read pointer. The case where both match is the case where the received command is not stored. When the received command is stored in the command receiving buffer, the effect control CPU 101 reads the received command from the command receiving buffer (S612). When reading is performed, the value of the read pointer is incremented by +2 (S613). The reason for +2 is that 2 bytes (1 command) are read at a time.

  As the command receiving buffer, for example, a ring buffer type command receiving buffer capable of storing six 2-byte effect control commands is used. Therefore, the command reception buffer is configured by a 12-byte area of reception command buffers 1 to 12. A command reception number counter indicating in which area the received command is stored is used. The command reception number counter takes a value from 0 to 11. The ring buffer format is not necessarily required.

  The effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 is received by the interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal and stored in the command reception buffer. In the command analysis process, it is analyzed which command (see FIG. 30) among the predetermined commands is the effect control command stored in the buffer area.

  If the received effect control command is a variation pattern command (S614), the effect control CPU 101 stores the variation pattern command in a variation pattern command storage area formed in the RAM (S615). Then, a variation pattern command reception flag is set (S616).

  If the received effect control command is a display result specifying command (S617), the effect control CPU 101 forms the display result specifying command (one of display result 1 specifying command to display result 5 specifying command) in the RAM. The display result specifying command storage area is stored (S618).

  If the received effect control command is a symbol confirmation designation command (S621), the effect control CPU 101 sets a confirmation command reception flag (S622).

  If the received effect control command is a jackpot start 1 designation command or a jackpot start 2 designation command (S623), the effect control CPU 101 sets a jackpot start 1 designation command reception flag or a jackpot start 2 designation command reception flag (S624). ). If the received effect control command is a small hit / accuracy start designation command (S625), the effect control CPU 101 sets a small hit / accuracy start designation command reception flag (S626).

  If the received effect control command is the first symbol variation designation command (S627), the first symbol variation designation command reception flag is set (S628). If the received effect control command is the second symbol variation designation command (S629), the second symbol variation designation command reception flag is set (S630).

  If the received production control command is a power-on designation command (initialization designation command) (S631), the production control CPU 101 displays an initial screen on the production display device 9 indicating that the initialization process has been executed. (S632). The initial screen includes an initial display of predetermined production symbols.

  If the received effect control command is a power failure recovery designation command (S633), a predetermined power failure recovery screen (screen for displaying information notifying the player that the gaming state is continuing) is displayed. Control is performed (S634).

  If the received effect control command is a jackpot end 1 designation command or a jackpot end 2 designation command (S641), the effect control CPU 101 sets a jackpot end 1 designation command reception flag or a jackpot end 2 designation command reception flag (S642). ). If the received effect control command is a small hit / abrupt end specification command (S643), the effect control CPU 101 sets a small hit / abrupt end specification command reception flag (S644).

  If the received effect control command is a special winning opening open designation command (S645), the production control CPU 101 sets a special winning opening open flag (S646). If the received effect control command is a designation command after opening the big prize opening (S647), the production control CPU 101 sets a flag after opening the big prize opening (S648).

  If the received effect control command is another command, the effect control CPU 101 sets a flag corresponding to the received effect control command (S649). Then, the process proceeds to S611.

  FIG. 51 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a variation display mode of decorative symbols (first decorative symbol and second decorative symbol). In this embodiment, the first decorative symbol display 9a and the second decorative symbol display 9b are composed of two LEDs. And as shown in FIG. 51, it lights alternately every predetermined time (for example, 0.5 second). When the display result of the special symbol is the jackpot symbol, the upper LED is turned on as the display result of the decorative symbol reminiscent of the jackpot (see FIG. 51A). Further, when the display result of the special symbol is changed to the off symbol, the lower LED is turned on as the display result of the decorative symbol reminiscent of the off symbol (see FIG. 51B).

  FIG. 52 is an explanatory diagram showing random numbers used by the effect control microcomputer 100. As shown in FIG. 52, in this embodiment, the production control microcomputer 100 includes random numbers SR1-1 to SR1-3 for determining the first to third final stop symbols, random numbers for determining the temporary stop symbols at the time of sliding. SR3, pseudo-continuous first variation temporary stop symbol determining random number SR4-1, pseudo-continuous second variation temporary stopping symbol determining random number SR4-2, first specific effect (sliding) pattern determining random number SR6- 1, a random number SR7 for determining a notice pattern type, a random number SR8 for determining a notice message for button notice, a random number SR9 for determining a notice step for a step-up notice, a random number SR10 for determining a color reliability display, and a pattern reliability display A random number SR11 for determination is used. Note that random numbers other than these may be used in order to enhance the effect.

  The pseudo-random first variation temporary stop symbol random number SR4-1 is an effect symbol (temporary stop) for temporary stop display in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R after the first variation. This is a random number used to determine the symbol. The pseudo-random second variation temporary stop symbol random number SR4-2 is temporarily stopped and displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R after subsequent re-variation. It is a random number used to determine the effect symbol (temporary stop symbol).

  The random number SR3 for determining the temporary sliding stop symbol is used for temporarily or partially in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R when the specific effect of “sliding” is executed. It is a random number used to determine the effect symbol (temporary stop symbol) to be stopped and displayed.

  The random number SR6-1 for determining the first specific effect pattern is used to determine the specific effect pattern corresponding to the content of the effect operation when executing the specific effect of “slip” as one of a plurality of types. Random number.

  The random number SR7 for determining the notice pattern type determines whether or not to execute the notice effect, and is a random number used to decide the notice pattern type when executing the notice effect as one of a plurality of types prepared in advance. It is. The notice effect refers to an effect of notifying that a big hit gaming state is reached during variable display.

  The random number SR8 for determining a button notice notice message is a random number used to decide a notice message as a button notice notice pattern, which will be described later, to one of a plurality of types prepared in advance. The button notice means a notice effect that is executed on condition that the operation button is operated during the variable display.

  The random number SR9 for determining the advance step for the step-up advance notice is a random number used for determining one of a plurality of types of advance notice steps as a later-described advance notice pattern for the step-up advance notice. As described above, the step-up notice is a notice effect in which a notice effect for notifying that a big hit gaming state is displayed during display is performed by a plurality of steps of notice.

  The random number SR10 for determining the color reliability display is a random number used to determine any one of a plurality of types of display patterns for displaying the color reliability indicating the reliability that will be a big hit after the notification in the button notification. It is. The random number SR11 for determining the pattern reliability display is used to determine a display pattern of the pattern reliability display that indicates the reliability that will be a big hit after the advance notice in the step-up notice as one of a plurality of types prepared in advance. It is a random number.

  FIG. 53 is an explanatory diagram of a final stop symbol determination table. FIG. 54 is an explanatory diagram of a left / right outcome determination table. FIG. 55 is an explanatory diagram showing a non-reach combination that does not become the final stop symbol. 56 and 57 are explanatory diagrams showing a final stop symbol determination table. FIG. 58 is an explanatory diagram of a specific effect pattern determination table. FIG. 59 is an explanatory diagram of a temporary stop symbol determination table. FIG. 60 is an explanatory diagram of a temporary stop symbol determination table.

  In the determination table stored in the ROM of the production control microcomputer 100, for example, a final stop symbol determination table shown in FIGS. 53A to 53D as a table for determining a predetermined non-reach combination. 160A to 160D are included.

  The final stop symbol determination table 160A shown in FIG. 53A is a left final stop that becomes a finalized effect symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “left” symbol display area 9L among the predetermined effect symbols that are combinations of predetermined non-reach. It is a table referred to in order to determine the symbol FZ1-1 based on the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol. The final stop symbol determination table 160A is a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the first final stop symbol determination random number SR1-1, and the symbol number “” of the effect symbol that becomes the left final stop symbol FZ1-1. Data (determination values) corresponding to “1” to “8” are included.

  The final stop symbol determination table 160B shown in FIG. 53 (B) is a right final stop that becomes a finalized effect symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “right” symbol display area 9R among the predetermined effect symbols that are combinations of predetermined non-reach. It is a table referred to for determining the symbol FZ1-2 based on the left final stop symbol FZ1-1 and the second final stop symbol determination random number SR1-2. The final stop symbol determination table 160B includes the value of the random number SR1-2 for determining the second final stop symbol in accordance with the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the effect symbols determined as the left final stop symbol FZ1-1. It is a numerical value (determination value) to be compared, and includes data (determination value) corresponding to the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the effect symbol that becomes the right final stop symbol FZ1-2.

  The final stop symbol determination table 160C shown in FIG. 53C is a final final stop symbol that becomes a finalized effect symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “medium” symbol display area 9C among the predetermined effect symbols that are combinations of predetermined non-reach. This is a table referred to for determining the symbol FZ1-3 based on the left final stop symbol FZ1-1, the right final stop symbol FZ1-2, and the third final stop symbol determination random number SR1-3.

  Further, the determination table stored in the ROM of the production control microcomputer 100 includes a left / right appearance determination table 161 as shown in FIG. In the left / right outcome determination table 161, the left / right outcome type DC1-1 corresponds to any of LR0, LR11 to LR18, and LR31 to LR38 based on the combination of the left final stop symbol FZ1-1 and the right final stop symbol FZ1-2. Is determined. The final stop symbol determination table 160C includes a random number SR1-3 for determining the third final stop symbol according to the determination result of whether the left / right outcome type DC1-1 corresponds to LR0, LR11 to LR18, or LR31 to LR38. And a data (determination value) corresponding to the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the effect symbols to be the middle final stop symbol FZ1-3.

  In the final stop symbol determination table 160B shown in FIG. 53 (B), the symbol number of the effect symbol that becomes the left final stop symbol FZ1-1 and the symbol number of the effect symbol that becomes the right final stop symbol FZ1-2 are the same. Is not assigned a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the random number SR1-2 for determining the second final stop symbol. With such an assignment, when a finalized design that is a predetermined non-reach combination is determined as the final stop symbol, the finalized design combination can be prevented from becoming a reach combination or jackpot combination.

  Further, in the final stop symbol determination table 160C shown in FIG. 53 (C), the combination of the left final stop symbol FZ1-1, the right final stop symbol FZ1-2, and the middle final stop symbol FZ1-3 is not assigned in advance. A numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the random number SR1-3 for determining the third final stop symbol is not assigned to the portion that is a combination of the determined effect symbols. For example, even if a combination other than a reach combination or a big hit combination is used, a portion that becomes the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 shown in FIG. 12 or a portion that becomes a constant non-reach combination as shown in FIG. A numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the random number SR1-3 for determining the final stop symbol is not assigned. With this assignment, when a finalized design that is a predetermined non-reach combination is determined as the final stop symbol, the finalized design is a pseudo-continuous chance GC1 to GC8 or a certain non-reach similar to the chance. It can be made not to be a combination.

  In addition, in the determination table stored in the ROM of the production control microcomputer 100, for example, as shown in FIGS. 56 (A) and 56 (B), a table for determining a definite production symbol to be a combination of reach divergence. Final stop symbol determination tables 162A and 162B are included.

  The final stop symbol determination table 162A shown in FIG. 56 (A) has a left final stop symbol FZ2 that is a finalized effect symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “left” symbol display area 9L among the finalized symbols that are combinations of reach divergence. -1 and the right final stop symbol FZ2-2, which is the final effect symbol to be stopped and displayed in the “right” symbol display area 9R, are determined based on the first final stop symbol determination random number SR1-1. It is a table that is referred to. The final stop symbol determination table 162A is a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the first final stop symbol determination random number SR1-1, and is the left final stop symbol FZ2-1 and the right final stop symbol FZ2-2. Data (determination values) corresponding to symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the same rendering symbols (left and right final stop symbols FZ2-1, FZ2-2).

  The final stop symbol determination table 162B shown in FIG. 56 (B) is a final final stop symbol FZ2- that becomes a finalized effect symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “medium” symbol display area 9C among the fixed effect symbols that are out of reach combinations. 3 is a table referred to for determining 3 based on the random number SR1-3 for determining the third final stop symbol. However, in FIG. 56 (B), the symbol difference between the left final stop symbol FZ2-1 and the right final stop symbol FZ2-2 is shown as data that can specify the middle final stop symbol FZ2-3.

  The middle final stop symbol FZ2-3 that constitutes the reach out-of-reach combination is specified by a symbol difference that is a difference value between the symbol numbers of the effect symbols as the left final stop symbol FZ2-1 and the right final stop symbol FZ2-2. That is, in the variation display of the effect symbol, the effect symbol variation is started in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R, and “left” → “right” → “middle”. When the finalized design symbol resulting in the variation display result of the production symbol is stopped and displayed in this order, the “left” and “right” symbol displays other than the “medium” symbol display area 9C where the production symbol is stopped and displayed last. After the left and right final stop symbols FZ2-1 and FZ2-2 that are stopped and displayed in the areas 9L and 9R are determined using the final stop symbol determination table 162A, the "middle" symbol display is performed using the final stop symbol determination table 162B. A difference (design difference) between the middle final stop symbol FZ2-3 stopped and displayed in the area 9C and the left and right final stop symbols FZ2-1 and FZ2-2 is determined. Then, in accordance with the determined symbol difference, a definitive effect symbol that becomes the middle final stop symbol FZ2-3 that is stopped and displayed in the “medium” symbol display area 9C is determined.

  The final stop symbol determination table 162B is a variation pattern of normal PA2-1, normal PA2-2, special PG2-1, special PG2-2, or any of normal PA2-3 and normal PA2-4. If it is one of the fluctuation patterns of Super PA3-1 to Super PA3-3, Super PB3-1 to PB3-3, Super PC3-1 to Super PC3-4, Special PG2-3, Super PA3- 4 is a numerical value (determination value) that is compared with the value of the random number SR1-3 for determining the third final stop symbol according to any of the fluctuation patterns of the super PA 3-6, and the symbol difference “− Data (determination values) corresponding to “2”, “−1”, “+1”, “+2” are included.

  The determination table stored in the ROM of the effect control microcomputer 100 includes, for example, final stop symbol determination tables 163A and 163B shown in FIG. 57 as tables for determining a definite effect symbol that is one of the jackpot combinations. include. The final stop symbol determination tables 163A and 163B shown in FIG. 57 are left-stopped and displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R as the determined effect symbols that become the big hit symbols. It is a table referred to in order to determine the middle right final stop symbol FZ3-1, FZ3-2, FZ3-3 based on the first final stop symbol determination random number SR1-1.

  The final stop symbol determination table 163A is a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the first final stop symbol determination random number SR1-1, and the left middle right final stop symbol FZ3-1, FZ3-2, FZ3. Data corresponding to the symbol numbers “1”, “2”, “3”, “4”, “5”, “6”, “7”, “8” of the normal symbols that are the same as -3 (determination value) including. The final stop symbol determination table 163B is a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the first final stop symbol determination random number SR1-1, and the left middle right final stop symbol FZ3-1, FZ3-2, FZ3. -3 includes data (determination values) corresponding to the symbol numbers “2”, “4”, “6”, and “8” of the same normal symbol.

  The final stop symbol determination table 163A is used when it is determined to be a probable variation big hit, and the final stop symbol determination table 163B is used when it is determined to be a normal big hit (non-probable variable big hit). used.

  Further, in the determination table stored in the ROM of the effect control microcomputer 100, for example, a specific effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 58 is used as a table for determining one of a plurality of types of specific effect patterns. 164A is included. When the specific effect of “slip” is executed, the specific effect pattern determination table 164A shown in FIG. 58 slides the specific effect pattern based on the random number SR6-1 for determining the first specific effect pattern. It is a table referred to in order to determine any of the slips TP1-4. The specific effect pattern determination table 164A includes non-reach PA1-4, normal PA2-2, normal PA2-4, normal PA2-6, normal PA2-8, super PA3-2, super PA3-6, super PA4-2, super PA5-2, Super PB3-2, Super PB4-2, Super PB5-2, Super PC3-2, Super PC3-4, Super PD1-2, Super PE1-2, Special PG1-2, Special PG2-2, Special It is compared with the value of the random number SR6-1 for determining the first specific effect pattern according to the change pattern (see FIGS. 13 and 14) in which the specific effect of “slip” is executed, such as the change pattern of PG3-3. Data (determination value) that is a numerical value (determination value) and corresponds to the specific performance pattern of the slip TP1-1 to the slip TP1-4. No.

  In the specific effect pattern of the slip TP1-1, after changing the effect symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R, the “left” and “right” symbol display areas. After the effect symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in 9L and 9R, the effect symbols are re-fluctuated at high speed in the “right” symbol display area 9R, and then stopped and displayed in the “right” symbol display area 9R. An effect display for changing the effect symbol to be performed is performed.

  In the specific effect pattern of the slip TP1-2, after changing the effect symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R, the “left” and “right” symbol display areas After the effect symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed at 9L and 9R, the effect symbols are re-fluctuated at high speed in the “left” symbol display area 9L, and then stopped and displayed in the “left” symbol display area 9L. An effect display for changing the effect symbol to be performed is performed.

  In the specific effect pattern of the slip TP1-3, after changing the effect symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R, the “left” and “right” symbol display areas. After the effect symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in 9L and 9R, the effect symbols are re-varied to a low speed in the “right” symbol display area 9R, and then stopped and displayed in the “right” symbol display area 9R. An effect display for changing the effect symbol to be performed is performed.

  In the specific effect pattern of the slip TP1-4, after changing the effect symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R, the “left” and “right” symbol display areas. After the effect symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed at 9L and 9R, the effect symbols are re-fluctuated at a low speed in the “left” symbol display area 9L, and then stopped and displayed in the “left” symbol display area 9L. An effect display for changing the effect symbol to be performed is performed.

  For example, when the variation pattern is non-reach PA1-4, depending on the previous effect value (previous effect storage data: a value indicating the variation pattern of the previous effect symbol), the slip TP1-1 to the slip TP1-4. You may make it change distribution of. As an example, the slips TP1-1 to TP1-4 that can be selected are changed according to which of the previous production values is 1 to 4. In addition, each of 1-4 shall show each of slip TP1-1-slip TP1-4. The effect control CPU 101 sets the previous effect value in the storage area in the RAM when the slip effect mode (slip TP1-1 to slip TP1-4) is determined. The specific effect pattern determination table 164A is a table to which a determination value is assigned so that the slip TP1-n is not selected when the previous determination value is n (any of n = 1 to 4). When the effect control CPU 101 determines the slip effect mode using the specific effect pattern determination table 164A configured as described above, the “slip” specific effect is executed according to the variation pattern of the non-reach PA1-4. In this case, it is possible to prevent the specific effect pattern from being the same as the specific effect pattern in the specific effect of “slip” executed last time.

  Also, instead of changing the configuration of the specific effect pattern determination table 164A, the specific effect pattern that is the same as the specific effect pattern in the specific effect of “slip” executed last time is not controlled by the control of the effect control CPU 101. May be. In that case, the specific effect pattern determination table 164A illustrated in FIG. 58 is used, but the determined slip effect mode (slip TP1-1 to slip TP1-4) is specified by the previous determination value. If they match, the effect mode is replaced (for example, if the determined slip effect mode is slip TP1-n, it is replaced with slip TP1- (n + 1)).

  Further, in the determination table stored in the ROM of the effect control microcomputer 100, for example, FIG. 59 is used as a table for determining an effect symbol to be temporarily stopped and displayed when a specific effect of “slip” is executed. Temporary stop symbol determination tables 166A to 166D shown in (A) to (D) are included. Each of the temporary stop symbol determination tables 166A to 166D is, for example, according to whether the specific effect pattern is the slip TP1-1 to the slip TP1-4 according to the table selection rule as shown in FIG. Selected as a usage table. That is, when the specific effect pattern is the slip TP1-1, the temporary stop symbol determination table 166A is selected as the use table. In the case of the slip TP1-2, the temporary stop symbol determination table 166B is selected as the use table. In the case of the slip TP1-3, the temporary stop symbol determination table 166C is selected as the use table. In the case of the slip TP1-4, the temporary stop symbol determination table 166D is selected as the use table.

  The temporary stop symbol determination tables 166A to 166D are used to determine a temporary stop symbol at the time of sliding according to the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the effect symbols that will be the final stop symbols in the symbol display area where the effect symbols are changed again. It is a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the random number SR3 and includes data (determination value) corresponding to the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the effect symbols that are temporarily stopped symbols.

  The temporary stop symbol determination table 166A is a symbol of the effect symbol that becomes the right final stop symbol as the final stop symbol in the “right” symbol display area 9R where the effect symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed according to the specific effect pattern of the slip TP1-1. In accordance with the numbers “1” to “8”, it is a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the random number SR3 for determining the temporary stop symbol at the time of sliding, and the symbol of the effect symbol that becomes the right temporary stop symbol KZ1-1 Data (determination values) corresponding to the numbers “1” to “8” are included.

  The temporary stop symbol determination table 166B is a symbol of the effect symbol which becomes the left final stop symbol as the final stop symbol in the “left” symbol display area 9L where the effect symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed according to the specific effect pattern of the slip TP1-2. In accordance with the numbers “1” to “8”, it is a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the random stop SR3 for determining the temporary stop symbol at the time of sliding, and the symbol of the effect symbol that becomes the left temporary stop symbol KZ1-2 Data (determination values) corresponding to the numbers “1” to “8” are included.

  The temporary stop symbol determination table 166C is a symbol of the effect symbol that becomes the right final stop symbol as the final stop symbol in the “right” symbol display area 9R where the effect symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed according to the specific effect pattern of the slip TP1-3. In accordance with the numbers “1” to “8”, it is a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the random stop SR3 for determining the temporary stop symbol at the time of sliding, and the symbol of the effect symbol that becomes the right temporary stop symbol KZ1-3 Data (determination values) corresponding to the numbers “1” to “8” are included.

  The temporary stop symbol determination table 166D has the symbol of the effect symbol that becomes the left final stop symbol as the final stop symbol in the “left” symbol display area 9L where the effect symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed according to the specific effect pattern of the slip TP1-4. According to the numbers “1” to “8”, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the random number SR3 for determining the temporary stop symbol at the time of slipping, and the symbol of the effect symbol that becomes the left temporary stop symbol KZ1-4 Data (determination values) corresponding to the numbers “1” to “8” are included.

  In the determination table stored in the ROM of the effect control microcomputer 100, for example, FIG. 60 is used as a table for determining the effect symbol that is temporarily stopped and displayed when the specific effect of “pseudo-continuous” is executed. Temporary stop symbol determination tables 167A to 167C shown in (A) to (C) are included.

  Each of the temporary stop symbol determination tables 167A to 167C indicates that the variation pattern is non-reach PA1-5, super PA3-3, super PA3-6, super PA4- 3, Super PA4-6, Super PB3-3, Super PB4-3, Super PB5-3, Special PG1-3, or execution until the final effect symbol that is the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed Is selected as a use table in accordance with the remaining number of all re-variable display operations.

  For example, the remaining number of re-variable display operations is “0” in the variation of the effect design (pseudo continuous variation) in which the finalized design symbol that is the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed, and the temporary stop symbol is stopped one time before that. The final stop is such that the displayed design symbol variation (pseudo-continuous variation) is “1”, and the temporary stop symbol variation is displayed twice before (“pseudo-continuous variation”) is “2”. This corresponds to how many times the pseudo-continuous variation (variation in which the temporary stop symbol is stopped and displayed) is executed before the pseudo continuous variation in which the determined effect symbol that is the symbol is stopped and displayed is executed.

  As an example, the temporary stop symbol determination table 167A includes all revariable display operations that are executed until the final effect symbol that is the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed in response to the variation pattern being non-reach PA1-5. When the remaining number of times is “1”, the left temporary stop symbol KZ2-1, which is the left symbol to be temporarily stopped in the “left” symbol display area 9L, and the right to be temporarily stopped in the “right” symbol display area 9R. The right temporary stop symbol KZ2-2 as the symbol, and the middle temporary stop symbol KZ2-3 as the middle symbol to be temporarily stopped and displayed in the “medium” symbol display area 9C are selected as the use table.

  In addition, the temporary stop symbol determination table 167B has a variation pattern of Super PA3-3, Super PA3-6, Super PA4-3, Super PA4-6, Super PB3-3, Super PB4-3, Super PB5-3, Special PG1. If the remaining number of all re-variable display operations to be executed until the finalized design symbol that is the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed is “1” in response to being any one of −3, “Left” In the symbol display area 9L, the left temporary stop symbol KZ2-1, which is the left symbol to be temporarily stopped and displayed, in the "right" symbol display area 9R, the right temporary stop symbol KZ2-2, which is the right symbol to be temporarily stopped and displayed, "middle" In the symbol display area 9C, the intermediate temporary stop symbol KZ2-3 which is the intermediate symbol to be temporarily stopped and displayed is selected as a use table.

  The temporary stop symbol determination table 167C has a variation pattern of Super PA3-3, Super PA3-6, Super PA4-3, Super PA4-6, Super PB3-3, Super PB4-3, Super PB5-3, Special PG1. If the remaining number of all re-variable display operations to be executed before the finalized design symbol that is the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed is “2” in response to being any of -3, “Left” Left temporary stop symbol KZ3-1, which is the left symbol to be temporarily stopped in the symbol display area 9L, right temporary stop symbol KZ3-2, which is the right symbol to be temporarily stopped in the "right" symbol display area 9R, and "middle". In the symbol display area 9C, the intermediate temporary stop symbol KZ3-3 that is the intermediate symbol to be temporarily stopped and displayed is selected as a use table.

  The temporary stop symbol determination table 167A shown in FIG. 60A and the temporary stop symbol determination table 167B shown in FIG. 60B are respectively the left final stop symbol as the final stop symbol in the “left” symbol display area 9L. In accordance with the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the effect symbols to be It includes data (determination values) corresponding to pseudo-continuous chance eyes GC1 to GC8 configured by a combination of the middle right temporary stop symbols KZ2-1, KZ2-2, and KZ2-3.

  The temporary stop symbol determination table 167C shown in FIG. 60C is determined by using the temporary stop symbol determination table 167B, the left temporary stop symbol KZ2-1, the right temporary stop symbol KZ2-2, and the intermediate temporary stop symbol 2-3. Is a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the random number SR4-2 for temporary stop symbol determination at the time of pseudo-second variation according to which of the pseudo-continuous chance GC1 to GC8, It includes data (determination values) corresponding to the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 configured by a combination of the left middle right temporary stop symbols KZ3-1, KZ3-2, and KZ3-3.

  FIG. 61 is an explanatory diagram showing a temporary stop symbol in a pseudo continuous variation. In the quasi-continuous series with the number of fluctuations of 2 (one time of the first fluctuation and one time of re-variation), the temporary stop symbol of the first fluctuation display is determined using the temporary stop symbol determination table 167A or 167B. In the quasi-continuous with the number of fluctuations of 3 times (1 time after the first time change and 2 times after the first time change), the temporary stop symbol for one change display is determined using the temporary stop symbol determination table 167C, and the temporary stop symbol determination table 167A The temporary stop symbol of the second variation display is determined using 167B. As described above, by determining the temporary stop symbol using the temporary stop symbol determination tables 167A to 167C, for example, as shown in FIG. 61, the number of executions of re-variation (including initial variation) in the pseudo-continuous effect is performed. Correspondingly, the production symbols to be temporarily stopped and displayed in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R are determined as any one of the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8. can do.

  FIG. 62 is an explanatory diagram of a symbol variation control pattern table. The control pattern table stored in the ROM of the effect control microcomputer 100 includes, for example, a symbol variation control pattern table 180 shown in FIG. 62. In the symbol variation control pattern table 180 shown in FIG. 62, the effect symbols in the display area of the effect display device 9 in the period from when the variation of the effect symbols is started until the finalized symbol that is the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed. A plurality of types of data indicating control contents of various effect operations such as an effect display operation in a reach effect, an effect display operation in a specific effect, and an effect display operation in a notice effect are stored as symbol variation control patterns. Yes. In addition, each symbol variation control pattern is, for example, an effect symbol variation display such as an effect control process timer setting value, an effect control process timer determination value, an effect display control data, voice control data, lamp control data, and an end code. The control data for controlling the various types of performance operations is included, and the contents of the various types of performance control, the timing of switching the performance control, and the like are set in time series. In addition, as the symbol variation control pattern table, a symbol control pattern table composed of control data for controlling the effect operation of the effect symbol including the specific effect and the effect operation of the notice effect different from the effect operation of the effect symbol are controlled. By providing a notice control pattern table made up of control data for performing and combining the control data for controlling the effect operation of these effects and the control data for controlling the effect operation of the notice effect, You may comprise so that the production | presentation operation | movement similar to the case where the production | presentation operation of a design and the production | presentation operation of a notice may be performed by one design variation control pattern table.

  FIG. 63 is an explanatory diagram of an effect control pattern table. Of the control pattern tables stored in the ROM of the effect control microcomputer 100, for example, the various effect control pattern tables 182 shown in FIG. 63 include a period in which the game is controlled to the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. A plurality of types of data indicating the contents of various types of effect control are stored as effect control patterns. Each effect control pattern includes, for example, an effect control process timer setting value, an effect control process timer determination value, an effect display control data, an audio control data, a lamp control data, and an end code in a big hit gaming state or a small hit gaming state. The contents of various effect controls according to the progress of the effect operation, the change timing of the effect control, and the like are set in time series.

  Next, a specific example of the notice effect that is executed during the variable display will be described with reference to the explanatory diagrams of FIGS. 64 and 65, the display screen of the effect display device 9 is shown by a rectangle. That is, in FIG. 64 and FIG. 65, a part of the display screen of the circular effect display device 9 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 64 is an explanatory diagram showing a display operation example in the effect display device 9 when a button notice is executed as an example of the notice effect. In FIG. 64, (A) to (F) show the display states when the button notice is executed during the pseudo-variable display as time elapses.

  Referring to FIG. 64, as shown in (A) and (B), “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display corresponding to the start of variation of the special symbol in the special symbol variation display, etc. The change of the effect design is started in all of the areas 9L, 9C, 9R. When it is decided to execute the button advance notice, as shown in (C), an image showing an envelope (hereinafter referred to as an envelope image) in a changing state where the effect symbol is not stopped in any symbol display area. 9P is displayed, an image indicating an operation button (hereinafter referred to as an operation button image) 9Q, an image indicating an operation request message “Please press the button” (hereinafter referred to as an operation request message image) 9S, Is displayed.

  In the envelope image 9P, the color of the envelope is selected according to the ratio of the big hit after the notice effect (for example, “first color display (white)”, “second color display (blue)”, and In order of “third color display (yellow)”, a color is selected so as to indicate that the reliability of the big hit after the button notification is high (the relationship between the big hit reliability is the first color display <the second color display < (Third color display))), the display showing the reliability of the big hit. Thereby, since the reliability of the jackpot is indicated by the color of the envelope before the button notice is given, the player's expectation can be enhanced and the operation of the operation button 30 by the player can be promoted. Such a display indicating the reliability of the big hit is called a color reliability display. Displaying the operation button image 9Q and the operation request message image 9S is performed as a button operation promotion effect. Regarding the color reliability display in the button notice, the color reliability display is not performed for all the fluctuations in the pseudo-ream, but the color reliability display for a specific part of the fluctuations. It may be performed. That is, regarding the color reliability display in the button notice, the color reliability display may be performed for at least one variation.

  In “first color display” to “third color display”, the color reliability display of the same color may be selected a plurality of times in succession, or may be selected out of order. However, the prohibition process is performed so that the order of the reliability of the big hit is not selected in a reverse manner (for example, the second color display is not selected after the third color display is selected). It is. Specifically, for example, when the first color display is selected in the first variation (initial variation) during the variation of the pseudo-series, the first color display having a reliability higher than the first color display in the second variation. The color display with the above reliability color is selected. Further, for example, when the second color display is selected in the first variation (initial variation) during the variation of the pseudo-series, the color display with a color with a reliability higher than the second color display is performed in the second variation. Selected. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the state of the notice effect performed in the pseudo-ream from being low in reliability even though the expectation is given by the pseudo-ream.

  The button operation promotion effect may be any effect as long as it is an effect operation that prompts the player to operate the operation button 30 at a predetermined position on the display screen of the image display device 5, for example. Further, the button operation promotion effect is not limited to the effect display device 9 that displays the effect image, but the one that outputs a predetermined sound from the speaker 27, for example, the upper effect LED 85a, the middle effect LED 85b, and the lower effect. A lighting device such as an LED 85c that lights or blinks in a predetermined lighting pattern, for example, a movable member provided in an effect accessory provided in the game area 7 or outside the game area 7 such as the movable member 78. It is also possible to use a combination of any of these.

  When the button operation promotion effect is performed, an operation effective period for effectively detecting the operation of the operation button 30 by the player is set. And if operation of the operation button 30 by the player is detected within the operation effective period, the execution of the button operation promotion effect is stopped as shown in FIG. Of the plurality of types of effect modes determined, a notice is given that a big hit will be made in any of the effect modes. Specifically, the envelope image 9P is opened, and an effect is shown in which a notice message written on the document as the contents is displayed. As a plurality of types of production modes, a plurality of production modes with different notice messages written in the document are determined in advance, and any one of these production modes is selected, and the notice message according to the selected production mode Is displayed.

  The notice message includes, for example, the messages “...”, “CHANCE”, “REACH”, “extreme heat”, “FEVER”, and “GOOD LUCK”, and any one message is selected. Is displayed. The notice message has a selection ratio set so that the ratio of winning a big hit after the notice effect is different. In this embodiment, the degree of the ratio that becomes a big hit after the notice effect is referred to as the big hit reliability. For example, the reliability of the jackpot is set higher for the other notice messages than for the notice message “... Also, the reliability of the jackpot is set higher for the warning messages “Fever”, “FEVER”, and “GOOD LUCK” than for “CHANCE”. Further, “REACH” is set to be selectable only when reaching after the notice effect. In addition, “FEVER” is set so that it can be selected only when a big hit occurs after the notice effect.

  As described above, in the button notice, when the operation button 30 is operated by the player, the notice message according to the reliability of the jackpot is displayed, so that the interest of the player can be improved.

  After the display of the button notice as shown in (D) is finished, as shown in (F), in the “left”, “middle” and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C and 9R, Display control is performed so as to be in a stop state (when re-change remains) or a complete stop state (when last change).

  On the other hand, when the operation of the operation button 30 by the player is not detected within the operation effective period, the display relating to the button notice as in (D) is not performed, and as shown in (E) and (F), The variation display is continued in the display mode, and the display control is performed so that the effect symbol is in a temporarily stopped state (when re-variation still remains) or a complete stop state (when it is the last variation).

  Note that “REACH” may be set to be selectable even when reach is not achieved after the notice effect. Further, “FEVER” may be set so that it can be selected even when a big hit is not made after the notice effect. In addition, for all notice messages of "...", "CHANCE", "REACH", "Intense heat", "FEVER", and "GOOD LUCK", both when it comes off and when it is a big hit In some cases, the reliability of the jackpot may be made different by making the selection possible as a notice and changing the ratio of winning the jackpot after the notice.

  FIG. 65 is an explanatory diagram showing a display operation example in the effect display device 9 when a step-up notice as an example of the notice effect is executed. In FIG. 65, (A) to (E) show the display states when the step-up notice is executed during the pseudo-variable display as time elapses.

  Referring to FIG. 65, as shown in (A) and (B), “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display corresponding to the start of variation of the special symbol in the variation display of the special symbol, etc. The change of the effect design is started in all of the areas 9L, 9C, 9R. When it is decided to execute the step-up notice, then, as shown in FIGS. 65 (B) to (D), in the changing state where the effect symbols are not stopped in any of the symbol display areas, a plurality of steps are performed. A step-up notice consisting of these steps is executed.

  Specifically, in the step-up notice, the notice indicating that it will be a big hit is divided into a plurality of steps (for example, three steps of Step 1 to Step 3). The step-up notice is continuously displayed up to three times (including re-change) continuously by the pseudo-ream. For each of Step 1 to Step 3, images (hereinafter referred to as character images) 91T, 92T, and 93T showing three humanoid characters having different colors are prepared. In each series of variation display performed continuously, any one of the steps 1 to 3 is selected and displayed, so that three character images corresponding to the selected step are displayed. Whichever is displayed.

  In principle, the step-up notice is a step 1 in which the first character image 91T with the first color (for example, black) is displayed, and the second with the second color (for example, green). Display in a manner that steps up in multiple steps according to the order of step 2 in which the character image 92T is displayed and step 3 in which the third character image 93T with a third color (for example, red) is displayed. Is done. Therefore, for example, when the variable display is performed in a pseudo-continuous variation pattern, the character image is switched and displayed each time the variable display is performed.

  For Step 1 to Step 3 constituting the step-up notice, the reliability of the big hit is set so that the ratio of the big hit after that is displayed in the order of Step 1 <Step 2 <Step 3. ing. As a result, when viewed from the player, in the order of the first character image 91T <the second character image 92T <the third character image 93T, the ratio of the big hit after being displayed is increased. The reliability that is a big hit is set.

  These step 1 to step 3 may be selected by repeating the same step a plurality of times, or may be selected by skipping the order. However, the prohibition process is performed so that the reliability of the big hit is not selected in a manner in which the order is reversed (for example, step 1 is not selected after step 2 is selected). Specifically, for example, when step 1 is selected in the first variation (initial variation) during the variation of the pseudo-series, steps in step 1 or more are selected in the second variation. In addition, for example, when step 2 is selected in the first variation (initial variation) during the variation of the pseudo-series, steps in step 2 or more are selected in the second variation. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the state of the notice effect performed in the pseudo-ream from being low in reliability even though the expectation is given by the pseudo-ream.

  FIG. 65 shows a display example of a typical step-up notice in which three character images are displayed in the principle order as described above. As shown in (B), in step 1, which is the first step in the step-up notice, the first character image 91T is displayed (for example, appears from the end of the screen). Then, in Step 2, which is the second step in the step-up notice, as shown in (C), the second character image 92T is displayed (for example, appears from the end of the screen). Further, in step 3, which is the third step in the step-up notice, as shown in (D), the third character image 93T is displayed (for example, appears from the end of the screen).

  As described above, in the step-up notice, the character images 9T of different colors are sequentially displayed in all the steps 1 to 3 constituting the step-up notice.

  In addition, the character image displayed in each step of the step-up notice is selected and attached with one pattern from a plurality of kinds of patterns in which the selection ratio is set so that the ratio of the big hit after the notice effect is different. (For example, in the order of “first pattern display (solid painting)”, “second pattern display (striped pattern)”, and “third pattern display (spotted pattern)”, the reliability that is a big hit after the step-up notice is given. The pattern display is selected so as to indicate that it is high (the relationship of the big hit reliability is the first pattern display <the second pattern display <the third pattern display). Thereby, in the step-up notice, a pattern corresponding to the reliability of the big hit is displayed and displayed on the character image at each step, so that the player's interest can be improved. Such a display indicating the reliability of the big hit is called a pattern reliability display. As for the pattern reliability display in the step-up notice, the pattern reliability display is not performed for all steps, but may be performed for a specific part of the steps. Good. That is, regarding the pattern reliability display in the step-up notice, the pattern reliability display may be performed for at least one step. In particular, if the pattern reliability display is performed for step 1 as a specific partial step, the player's interest is attracted at the start of the notice effect, so that the player's interest can be further improved.

  In “first pattern display” to “third pattern display”, pattern reliability display of the same pattern may be selected several times in succession, or may be selected out of order. However, the prohibition process is performed so that the order of the reliability of the big hit is not selected in a reverse manner (for example, the second pattern display is not selected after the third pattern display is selected). It is. Specifically, for example, when the first pattern display is selected in the first variation (initial variation) during the variation of the pseudo-series, the first pattern display having the reliability higher than the first pattern display in the second variation. The pattern display with the above reliability pattern is selected. Further, for example, when the second pattern display is selected in the first variation (initial variation) during the pseudo-series variation, the pattern display with a reliability pattern higher than the second pattern display is performed in the second variation. Selected. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the state of the notice effect performed in the pseudo-ream from being low in reliability even though the expectation is given by the pseudo-ream.

  Then, when a big hit occurs after the notice effect, as shown in (E), all character images 9T displayed in the series of variation display are displayed when the last variation display is performed (for example, a screen). Appears from the edge).

  As described above, in the step-up notice, when the variable display is continuously performed, the character image is displayed in such a manner that the reliability of the jackpot is increased every time the variable display is performed. Interest can be improved.

  FIG. 66 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of the notice pattern type determination table 200 stored in the ROM in the effect control microcomputer 100. The notice pattern type determination table 200 is a table that is referred to in order to decide whether or not to execute the notice effect, or to determine the notice pattern type in the case of executing the notice effect. In the notice pattern type determination table 200, the random number SR7 for determining the notice pattern type is the notice pattern type of “no notice effect” or “button notice” in accordance with the change pattern indicated in the change pattern designation command. It is assigned to either the notice pattern type CY1 or the notice pattern type CY2 that is “step-up notice”.

  In the setting of the notice pattern type determination table 200, a variation pattern in which the variation display result is “non-reach deviation variation” (hereinafter referred to as non-reach variation variation pattern) and a variation pattern in which the variation display result is “reach deviation variation” (hereinafter, “reach deviation”). Reach out of reach fluctuation pattern), and fluctuation pattern that results in a "big hit" change display result (hereinafter referred to as big hit fluctuation pattern), "no notice effect", "button notice", and "step up notice" The value of the random number SR7 corresponding to each selection item is set so that the allocation of the selection items is different.

  Specifically, in the setting of the notice pattern classification determination table 200, the ratio of selecting no notice effect is smaller in the case of the big hit fluctuation pattern than in the case of the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern and the case of the reach deviation deviation pattern. . Thereby, when it is a big hit, a notice effect is more easily performed than when it is a loss. Thereby, when the notice effect by the button notice or the step-up notice is performed, the player's sense of expectation regarding the occurrence of the big hit can be enhanced.

  Further, in the setting of the notice pattern type determination table 200, the ratio of selecting the button notice is larger for the big hit fluctuation pattern than for the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern and the reach deviation fluctuation pattern. As a result, when a big hit is made, it is easier to perform a notice of button notice than when it is lost, so that when a notice effect is given by a button notice, the player's expectation about the occurrence of a big hit can be increased. it can. In addition, the ratio of the button notice is selected more in the case of the reach deviation variation pattern than in the case of the non-reach deviation variation pattern.

  Also, in the setting of the notice pattern type determination table 200, the step-up notice is selected more frequently in the big hit fluctuation pattern than in the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern and the reach deviation deviation pattern. As a result, when a big hit is made, it is easier to perform a step-up advance notice than when it is lost, so when a button advance notice is given, the player's expectation about the occurrence of a big hit is increased. Can do. In addition, the step-up notice is selected more frequently in the case of the reach deviation variation pattern than in the case of the non-reach variation pattern.

  Further, in the setting of the notice pattern classification determination table 200, the ratio of selecting the button notice is larger in the case of the big hit fluctuation pattern than in the case of the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern and the reach deviation deviation pattern. More step-up notices than selected. Thereby, when a big hit is made, the button notice is more easily selected than the step-up notice. Therefore, when the button advance notice is selected, the player's sense of expectation for the occurrence of the big hit can be enhanced more than when the step-up notice is selected. It should be noted that, in the event of a loss, the sorting of the notice pattern type determination table 200 may be set so that the step-up notice is more easily selected than the button notice. Also, when the big hit variation pattern is compared to the non-reach shift variation pattern and the reach shift variation pattern, the rate at which the step-up notice is selected is greater than the rate at which the button notice is selected. You may set so that it may increase. In addition, the ratio that the button notice is selected and the ratio that the step-up notice is selected are the same for the big hit fluctuation pattern, the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern, and the reach deviation deviation pattern. May be set.

  FIG. 66 shows an example in which there are two types of notice pattern types that can be selected as the notice effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the notice pattern types that can be selected as the notice effect may be three or more kinds. FIG. 66 shows an example in which only one of a plurality of types of notice pattern types is selected as a selectable notice pattern type. The reason for this is to prevent the effects from overlapping on the display screen of the effect display device 9 when the effect of the announcement is executed simultaneously with a plurality of types of the notice pattern. Therefore, when a plurality of types of notice pattern types are provided on the display screen of the effect display device 9 so that the effects do not overlap, a process for selecting whether or not to execute each of the notice pattern types is performed. Depending on the type, a plurality of selected notice pattern types may be executed simultaneously.

  Also, in the notice pattern type determination table 200 shown in FIG. 66, the ratios for selecting and determining each of “no notice effect”, “button notice”, and “step-up notice” are made different depending on the number of pseudo continuous fluctuations in the fluctuation pattern. It may be. Further, in the notice pattern type determination table 200, the ratio at which the button notice is selected and the ratio at which the step-up notice is selected may be made different according to the number of pseudo continuous fluctuations in the variation pattern.

  FIG. 67 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of a notice selection table as a data table used for selecting a table used when determining a specific notice pattern after the notice pattern type is decided.

  In FIG. 67, (A) shows a big hit button notice selection table. In FIG. 67, (B) shows a button advance notice selection table at the time of reach failure. In FIG. 67, (C) shows a non-reach off button notice selection table. In FIG. 67, (D) shows a big hit step-up notice selection table. In FIG. 67, (E) shows a step-up notice selection table at the time of reach failure. In FIG. 67, (F) shows a step-up notice selection table at the time of non-reach. These notice selection tables are all stored in the ROM of the production control microcomputer 100.

  The jackpot button notice selection table shown in (A) shows a specific notice pattern when a button notice is determined as the notice pattern type when a big hit fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation display result is “big hit” is designated. It is a data table for selecting the notice message determination table as a notice pattern determination table used for determination of this. In the big hit button notice selection table, data is set so that different notice message decision tables are selected according to the total number of change displays (including re-change) performed in the change pattern specified by the effect control command. Has been.

  Specifically, in the big hit button notice selection table shown in (A), the notice message determination table is selected as follows. For example, when a variation pattern that does not become a pseudo-ream (hereinafter referred to as no pseudo-ream) is designated, the first notice message determination table 201A shown in FIG. 68 is selected.

  In addition, when a variation pattern in which a total of two variations are displayed including the first variation (hereinafter referred to as two quasi-continuations) is specified among the variation patterns that become pseudo-continuous, the first variation time (first variation time) 68 is selected to determine the previous notice pattern, and the third notice message decision shown in FIG. 68 is used to determine the second notice pattern at the time of change (at the time of re-variation). The table 201C is selected.

  In addition, when a variation pattern in which a total of three variations are displayed including the first variation (hereinafter referred to as three quasi-continuations) among the variation patterns that become pseudo-continuous is designated, the first variation time (initial variation time) 68 is selected to determine the previous notice pattern, and the fifth notice message decision shown in FIG. 68 is determined to determine the second notice pattern at the time of change (at the time of re-variation). The table 201E is selected, and the sixth notice message determination table 201F shown in FIG. 68 is selected to determine the notice pattern at the time of the third change (at the time of re-change).

  The reach-out button notice selection table shown in (B) is specific when a button notice is determined as the notice pattern type when a reach-out variation pattern with a fluctuation display result of “reach out” is specified. It is a data table for selecting a notice message determination table used for determining a specific notice pattern. In the reach-out button notice selection table, the data is selected so that a different notice message determination table is selected according to the total number of change displays (including re-change) performed in the change pattern specified by the effect control command. Is set.

  Specifically, in the out-of-reach button notice selection table shown in (B), the notice message determination table is selected as follows. For example, when the variation pattern “no pseudo-ream” is designated, the seventh notice message determination table 201G shown in FIG. 69 is selected.

  When the variation pattern of “pseudo-continuous twice” is designated, the eighth notification message determination table 201H shown in FIG. 69 is selected to determine the notification pattern at the first variation (at the first variation), A ninth notice message determination table 201I shown in FIG. 68 is selected in order to determine the notice pattern at the time of the second change (during change).

  Also, when the variation pattern of “pseudo three times” is designated, the tenth notice message determination table 201J shown in FIG. 69 is selected to determine the notice pattern at the time of the first change (at the first change), The eleventh notice message determination table 201K shown in FIG. 69 is selected in order to determine the notice pattern at the time of the second change (at the time of re-change), and the notice pattern at the time of the third change (at the time of change) is decided. The twelfth notice message determination table 201L shown in FIG. 69 is selected.

  The non-reach miss button notice selection table shown in (C) shows the case where a button notice is determined as the notice pattern type when a non-reach break change pattern in which the fluctuation display result is “non-reach miss” is designated. This is a data table for selecting a notice message determination table used for determining a specific notice pattern. In the non-reach off button notice selection table, data is selected so that a different notice message determination table is selected according to the total number of change displays (including re-change) performed in the change pattern specified by the effect control command. Is set.

  In the non-reach off button notice selection table shown in (C), specifically, the notice message determination table is selected as follows. For example, when the variation pattern “no pseudo-ream” is designated, the thirteenth notice message determination table 201M shown in FIG. 69 is selected.

  In addition, when the fluctuation pattern of “pseudo-continuous twice” is designated, the 14th notice message determination table 201N shown in FIG. 69 is selected in order to determine the notice pattern at the time of the first change (at the first change), The fifteenth notice message determination table 201O shown in FIG. 68 is selected in order to determine the notice pattern at the time of the second change (at the time of re-change).

  The jackpot step-up notice selection table shown in (D) is a notice that is used to determine a specific notice pattern when a step-up notice is determined as the notice pattern type when a big hit variation pattern is specified. It is a data table for selecting a step decision table. In the big hit time step-up notice selection table, the data is selected so that a different notice step determination table is selected according to the total number of change displays (including re-change) performed in the change pattern designated by the effect control command. Is set.

  In the big hit step-up notice selection table shown in (D), specifically, the notice step determination table is selected as follows. When the variation pattern of “no quasi-continuous” is designated, the first notice step determination table 202A shown in FIG. 70 is selected.

  When the variation pattern of “pseudo-continuous twice” is designated, the second announcement step decision table 202B shown in FIG. 70 is selected to decide the announcement pattern at the first variation (at the first variation), In order to determine the notice pattern at the time of the second change (at the time of re-change), the third notice step determination table 202C shown in FIG. 70 is selected.

  Further, when the variation pattern of “pseudo-continuous 3 times” is designated, the fourth advance step determination table 202D shown in FIG. 70 is selected to determine the advance notice pattern at the time of the first change (at the time of the first change), In order to determine the notice pattern at the time of the second change (at the time of re-change), the fifth notice step determination table 202E shown in FIG. 70 is selected, and the notice pattern at the time of the third change (at the time of re-change) is determined. The sixth notice step determination table 202F shown in FIG. 70 is selected.

  The reach-up step-up notice selection table shown in (E) indicates that a step-up notice is determined as a notice pattern type when a reach-out change pattern is designated in which the fluctuation display result is “reach out”. It is a data table for selecting the notice step determination table used for the determination of a specific notice pattern. In the step-up notice selection table at the time of a loss of reach, data is selected so that a different notice step determination table is selected according to the total number of change displays (including re-change) performed in the change pattern specified by the production control command. Is set.

  Specifically, in the step-up notice selection table at the time of detachment shown in (E), the notice step determination table is selected as follows. For example, when a variation pattern of “no quasi-continuous” is designated, the seventh notice step determination table 202G shown in FIG. 71 is selected.

  In addition, when the variation pattern of “pseudo-continuous twice” is designated, the eighth advance step determination table 202H shown in FIG. 71 is selected to determine the advance notice pattern at the time of the first change (at the first change). In order to determine the notice pattern at the time of the second change (at the time of re-change), the ninth notice step decision table 202I shown in FIG. 70 is selected.

  When the variation pattern of “pseudo-continuous 3 times” is designated, the tenth notice step decision table 202J shown in FIG. 71 is selected to decide the notice pattern at the time of the first change (at the first change), In order to determine the notice pattern at the time of the second change (at the time of re-change), the eleventh notice step determination table 202K shown in FIG. 71 is selected, and the notice pattern at the time of the third change (at the time of re-change) is determined. The twelfth notice step decision table 202L shown in FIG. 71 is selected.

  In the non-reach miss step-up notice selection table shown in (F), the step-up notice is determined as the notice pattern type when the non-reach miss fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation display result is “non-reach miss” is designated. In some cases, this is a data table for selecting a notice step determining table used for determining a specific notice pattern. In the non-reach out-of-reach step-up notice selection table, a different notice step determination table is selected according to the total number of change displays (including re-change) performed in the change pattern specified by the effect control command. Data is set.

  In the non-reach step-up notice selection table shown in (F), specifically, the notice step determination table is selected as follows. For example, when the variation pattern “no quasi-continuous” is designated, the thirteenth notice step determination table 202M shown in FIG. 71 is selected.

  In addition, when the fluctuation pattern of “pseudo-continuous twice” is designated, the 14th notice step decision table 202N shown in FIG. 71 is selected to decide the notice pattern at the time of the first fluctuation (at the first fluctuation), The fifteenth notice step decision table 202O shown in FIG. 71 is selected in order to decide the notice pattern at the time of the second change (during change).

In addition, the button announcement selection table at the time of big hit, the button announcement selection table at the time of non-reach, the button notice selection table at the time of non-reach, the step-up notice selection table at the time of big hit, the step-up notice selection table at the time of reach losing, and the step at non-reach For each of the up notice selection tables, three or two tables are provided as tables (notice message decision table, notice step decision table) used for determining the notice pattern at the time of the first fluctuation, An example of using different tables according to the number of fluctuations in the pseudo-ream was shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a single table is created by sharing three or two tables used for determining the notice pattern at the time of the first change, and the one table is used in the presence or absence of the pseudo-series and the pseudo-series. The notice selection table may be set so as to be commonly used according to the number of fluctuations. Specifically, for example, in the case of a big hit button notice selection table, the first notice message determination table 201A, the second notice message determination table 201B, and the fourth notice message determination table 201D are shared. In case of non-reach off button notice selection table,
The thirteenth notice message determination table 201M and the fourteenth notice message determination table 201N are shared by one table, so that they are divided according to whether or not they are a big hit, and further divided according to whether or not they are reached in the event of a loss. Common table.

  In addition, for each of the big hit button notice selection table, the reach failure button notice selection table, the big hit step up notice selection table, and the reach break step up notice selection table, the notice pattern determination at the time of the second change is made. In this example, two tables are provided as the tables used for the purpose (notice message determination table and notice step determination table), and the tables are used depending on the presence / absence of the pseudo-series and the number of fluctuations in the pseudo-series. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a single table is created in which two tables used for determining the notice pattern at the time of the second change are created. Accordingly, the notice selection table may be set so as to be used in common. Specifically, for example, in the case of the big hit button notice selection table, whether the third notice message determination table 201C and the fifth notice message determination table 201E are shared by one table or not is determined whether or not it is a big hit. Separate and share the table.

  As described above, when a common table is used as the advance notice reliability display determination table, one of the reliability display determination table for the first variation and the reliability display determination table for the second variation are used. The reliability change determination table for the first variation and the reliability display determination table for the second variation may be shared, respectively.

  Next, the contents of the first notice message determination table 201A to the sixth notice message determination table 201F used when the variable display result is a big hit will be described. FIG. 68 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of the first notice message determination table 201A to the sixth notice message determination table 201F.

  In FIG. 68, (A) to (F) show first notice message determination table 201A to sixth notice message determination table 201F. Each notice message determination table shows the relationship between the extracted value of the random number SR8 and the display content of the notice message to be selected (the notice message in the figure).

  In the first notice message determination table 201A of (A), as shown in the numerical value setting of SR8, based on the extracted value of the random number SR8, “...”, “CHANCE”, “REACH”, “extreme heat”, Settings are made so that any one of the notice messages “FEVER” and “GOOD LUCK” is selected. Therefore, when the fluctuation pattern is “no pseudo-ream”, one of these messages is selected and displayed as a notice message. In the first notice message determination table 201A, SR8 is set so that the ratio of the notice message selected is “.. Numeric data is set.

  In the second notice message determination table 201B of (B), as shown in the numerical value setting of SR8, “...”, “CHANCE”, “extreme heat”, and “GOOD LUCK” based on the extracted value of the random number SR8. Is set so that no other notice message is selected. Therefore, in the first fluctuation when the fluctuation pattern is “twice pseudo-continuous”, any one of “...”, “CHANCE”, “Intense heat”, and “GOOD LUCK” is selected as the notice message. Displayed. In the second notice message determination table 201B, SR8 is set so that the ratio at which the notice message is selected becomes “. Numeric data is set. As shown in (B), in the second notice message determination table 201B, as compared with the first notice message determination table 201A, the ratio of “...”, “REACH”, and “FEVER” is selected. SR8 numerical data is set so that the ratio of selecting “CHANCE”, “extreme heat”, and “GOOD LUCK” increases.

  In the third notice message determination table 201C of (C), as shown in the numerical value setting of SR8, based on the extracted value of the random number SR8, “...”, “CHANCE”, “REACH”, “extreme heat”, Settings are made so that any one of the notice messages “FEVER” and “GOOD LUCK” is selected. Therefore, in the second variation in the variation pattern of “pseudo-continuous twice”, any one of these messages is selected and displayed as a notice message. In the third notice message determination table 201C, basically, the ratio that the notice message is selected is “...”, “CHANCE”> “REACH”> “Intense heat”> “GOOD LUCK”> “FEVER”. The numerical data of SR8 is set so that Also, in the third notice message determination table 201C, the ratio of “...” and “extreme heat” is lower than in the second notice message determination table 201B, and “CHANCE”, “REACH”, “ The numerical data of SR8 is set so that the ratio of selecting “FEVER” and “GOOD LUCK” is high.

  However, with respect to the third notice message determination table 201C, the “pseudo-continuation 2” is set in order to prevent the reliability of the big hit gaming state after the notice effect being executed from being lowered compared to the notice effect selected previously. For the second (this time) change of “Time”, a prohibition process that prohibits the selection of the notice effect that is less reliable than the notice effect selected in the first (previous) change of “Pseudo-Two times” (notice message) Forbidden processing). For example, when “CHANCE” is selected based on the second notice message determination table 201B in the first (previous) fluctuation of “pseudo-continuous twice”, the second (current) fluctuation of “pseudo-continuous twice” , A prohibition process is performed to change the setting so that “...” Having a low reliability is not selected.

  The contents of the prohibition processing of such a notice message are as follows, for example. When a notice message as a notice pattern is determined when executing pseudo-variable display, the previous notice message data for specifying the decided notice message is stored in the previous notice message storage area of the RAM as data indicating the previous notice pattern. (Update storage). Then, when executing the next variable display in the pseudo-ream, the previously selected notice message selected by using the third notice message determination table 201C and the previous notice message specified by the previous notice message data and the trust that becomes a big hit Compare degrees. When the selected notice message is lower in reliability than the previous notice message, the previous notice message is determined as the notice message in the next fluctuation display so that the notice message having lower reliability than the previous fluctuation display is not decided. . On the other hand, when the reliability of the current selection notice message is equal to or higher than the reliability of the previous notice message, the current selection notice message is determined as the notice message in the next variable display. Specifically, the comparison of the reliability that becomes a big hit about the notice pattern in the prohibition processing as described above is performed as follows. For each of the types of notice messages, for example, flags having different numerical values are associated with each other in advance (for example, the flag value is set so that the higher the reliability that is a big hit, the larger the numerical value). The flag corresponding to the type of the notice message is set as data indicating the previous notice message. Then, the flag set as the previous notice message is compared with the flag corresponding to the notice message in the current fluctuation, and based on the magnitude relationship of the numerical value of the flag, whichever is the selected notice message or the previous notice message Judge whether reliability is high.

  In the fourth notice message determination table 201D of (D), as shown in the numerical value setting of SR8, based on the extracted value of the random number SR8, “. Is set so that no other notice message is selected. Therefore, in the first fluctuation when the fluctuation pattern is “3 pseudo-continuous times”, any one of “. Displayed. In the fourth notice message determination table 201D, the numerical data of SR8 is set so that the ratio at which the notice message is selected is “... >>“ CHANCE ”>“ Intense heat ”>“ GOOD LUCK ”. . As shown in (D), in the fourth notice message determination table 201D, the ratio of selecting “...” And “CHANCE” is higher than in the second notice message determination table 201B. The numerical data of SR8 is set so that the ratio of selecting “heat” and “GOOD LUCK” is low.

  In the fifth notice message determination table 201E in (E), as shown in the numerical value setting of SR8, “...”, “CHANCE”, “extreme heat”, and “GOOD LUCK” based on the extracted value of the random number SR8. Is set so that no other notice message is selected. Therefore, in the second fluctuation in the case of the fluctuation pattern of “Pseudo three times”, any one of “...”, “CHANCE”, “Intense heat”, and “GOOD LUCK” is selected as the notice message. Displayed. As shown in (E), in the fifth notice message determination table 201E, the ratio of selecting “...” And “CHANCE” is lower than in the fourth notice message determination table 201D. The numerical data of SR8 is set so that the ratio of selecting “heat” and “GOOD LUCK” is high.

  However, with respect to the fifth notice message determination table 201E, in order to prevent the reliability of the big hit gaming state after the notice effect has been executed compared to the previously selected notice effect, the “pseudo-continuous 3 For the second (current) change of “time”, a prohibition process is performed to prohibit selection of the notice effect with lower reliability than the notice effect selected in the first (previous) change of “pseudo-three times”. . For example, when “CHANCE” is selected based on the fourth notice message determination table 201D for the first (previous) change of “3 pseudo-reams”, the second (current) of “3rd pseudo-reams” is selected. In the fluctuation, a prohibition process is performed to change the setting so that “...” Having a low reliability is not selected. Specifically, as such prohibition processing, the notification message prohibition processing having the above-described contents is performed on the fifth notification message determination table 201E.

  In the sixth notice message determination table 201F of (F), as shown in the numerical value setting of SR8, "...", "CHANCE", "REACH", "Intense heat", based on the extracted value of the random number SR8, Settings are made so that any one of the notice messages “FEVER” and “GOOD LUCK” is selected. Accordingly, in the third variation in the variation pattern of “pseudo-continuous three times”, any one of these messages is selected and displayed as a notice message. In the sixth notice message determination table 201F, basically, the ratio that the notice message is selected is “CHANCE”> “REACH”> “...”> “extreme heat”> “GOOD LUCK”> “FEVER”. Numerical data is set so that Further, in the sixth notice message determination table 201F, the ratio of selecting “...” And “CHANCE” is lower than in the fifth notice message determination table 201E, and “REACH” and “Intense heat”. , “FEVER” and “GOOD LUCK” are set so that the ratio of selecting each of them becomes high.

  However, with respect to the sixth notice message determination table 201F, in order to prevent the reliability of the big hit gaming state after the notice effect is executed, compared to the notice effect selected last time, For the third time (current) change of “Time”, a prohibition process is performed to prohibit selection of the notice effect having a lower reliability than the notice effect selected in the second (previous) change of “pseudo-three times”. . For example, when “CHANCE” is selected based on the fifth notice message determination table 201E in the second (previous) change of “pseudo three times”, the third (current) of “pseudo three times” is selected. In the fluctuation, a prohibition process is performed to change the setting so that “...” Having a low reliability is not selected. Specifically, as such prohibition processing, the notification message prohibition processing having the above-described contents is performed on the sixth notification message determination table 201F.

  Next, the contents of the seventh notice message determination table 201G to the fifteenth notice message determination table 201O used when the fluctuation display result is out of place (including both reach out and non reach out) will be described. FIG. 69 is an explanatory diagram of a configuration example of the seventh notice message determination table 201G to the fifteenth notice message determination table 201O.

  In FIG. 69, the seventh notice message determination table 201G to the fifteenth notice message determination table 201O are shown in (A) to (I). Each notice message determination table shows the relationship between the extracted value of the random number SR8 and the display content of the notice message to be selected (the notice message in the figure).

  In the seventh notice message determination table 201G of (A), as shown in the numerical value setting of SR8, “...”, “CHANCE”, “REACH”, “extreme heat”, In addition, a setting is made so that one of the notice messages of “GOOD LUCK” is selected. Therefore, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of “no quasi-ream” that is out of reach, any one of these messages is selected and displayed as a notice message. In the seventh notice message determination table 201A, the numerical data of SR8 is set so that the ratio of the notice message to be selected is “... Is set. As shown to (A), in the 7th notice message determination table 201G, compared with the 1st notice message determination table 201A at the time of a big hit, each ratio of "..." and "CHANCE" is selected. The numerical data of SR8 is set so that the ratio of “high heat” and “GOOD LUCK” to be selected decreases and becomes higher.

  In the eighth notice message determination table 201H in (B), as shown in the numerical value setting of SR8, “...”, “CHANCE”, “extreme heat”, and “GOOD LUCK” are based on the extracted value of the random number SR8. Is set so that no other notice message is selected. Therefore, in the first fluctuation in the case of the fluctuation pattern of “pseudo-continuous two times” that is out of reach, one of “...”, “CHANCE”, “extreme heat”, and “GOOD LUCK” will be notified. Selected as a message and displayed. As shown in (B), in the eighth notice message determination table 201H, the ratio of selecting “...” And “REACH” is lower than in the seventh notice message determination table 201G. The numerical data of SR8 is set so that the ratio of each of “Intense heat” and “GOOD LUCK” to be selected increases. In addition, in the eighth notice message determination table 201H, the ratio of each of “...” And “CHANCE” selected is higher than that in the second notice message determination table 201B when the jackpot is reached. ”And“ GOOD LUCK ”, the numerical data of SR8 is set so that the ratio of selection is high.

  In the ninth notice message determination table 201I of (C), as shown in the numerical value setting of SR8, based on the extracted value of the random number SR8, “...”, “CHANCE”, “REACH”, “extreme heat”, In addition, a setting is made so that any one of the “GOOD LUCK” notice messages is selected. Accordingly, in the second fluctuation in the case of the fluctuation pattern of “reverse pseudo-twice” which is out of reach, one of these messages is selected and displayed as the notice message. In the ninth notice message determination table 201I, a numerical value is basically set such that the ratio of the notice message selected is “... >>“ REACH ”>“ CHANCE ”>“ Intense heat ”>“ GOOD LUCK ”. Data is set. Also, in the ninth notice message determination table 201I, the ratio of selecting “...”, “CHANCE”, and “GOOD LUCK” is lower than in the eighth notice message determination table 201H. The SR8 numerical data is set so that the ratio of selecting “REACH” and “extreme heat” is high. Also, in the ninth notice message determination table 201I, the ratio of selecting “...” Is higher than in the third notice message determination table 201C when a big hit is made, and other notice messages are selected. The numerical data of SR8 is set so that the ratio is low.

  However, with respect to the ninth notice message determination table 201I, in order to prevent the reliability of the big hit gaming state after the notice effect has been executed compared to the previously selected notice effect, the “pseudo-continuous 2 For the second time (current) change of “time”, a prohibition process is performed to prohibit selection of the notice effect with lower reliability than the notice effect selected in the first (previous) change of “pseudo-continuous 2 times”. . For example, when “CHANCE” is selected based on the eighth notice message determination table 201H, the setting is changed so that “... Prohibition processing is performed. Specifically, as the prohibition processing, the notification message prohibition processing having the above-described contents is performed on the ninth notification message determination table 201I.

  In the tenth notice message determination table 201J in (D), as shown in the numerical value setting of SR8, based on the extracted value of the random number SR8, “...”, “CHANCE”, “Intense heat”, and “GOOD LUCK” Is set so that no other notice message is selected. Therefore, in the first fluctuation in the case of the fluctuation pattern of “pseudo-ream 3 times” that is out of reach, any one of “...”, “CHANCE”, “Intense heat”, and “GOOD LUCK” is a notice message. Is displayed as selected. As shown in (D), the tenth notice message determination table 201J has a higher ratio of selecting “...” And “CHANCE” than the eighth notice message determination table 201H. The numerical data of SR8 is set so that the ratio of selecting “heat” and “GOOD LUCK” is low. In addition, in the tenth notice message determination table 201J, the ratio of selecting “...” Is higher than in the fourth notice message determination table 201D when the jackpot is reached, and “CHANCE”, “Intense heat” and The numerical data of SR8 is set so that the ratio of selecting each “GOOD LUCK” is low.

  In the eleventh notice message determination table 201K of (E), as shown in the numerical value setting of SR8, “...”, “CHANCE”, “extreme heat”, and “GOOD LUCK” based on the extracted value of the random number SR8. Is set so that no other notice message is selected. Therefore, in the second fluctuation in the case of the fluctuation pattern of “reverse three times” of the reach, any one of “... Is displayed as selected. As shown in (E), in the eleventh notice message determination table 201K, compared to the tenth notice message determination table 201J, the numerical data of SR8 is set so that the ratio at which “CHANCE” is selected is higher. . In addition, in the eleventh notice message determination table 201K, each of “...”, “CHANCE”, and “GOOD LUCK” is selected higher than the fifth notice message determination table 201E that is a big hit. Therefore, the numerical data of SR8 is set so that the ratio of selecting “Intense heat” is low.

  However, with respect to the eleventh notice message determination table 201K, in order to prevent the reliability of the big hit gaming state after the notice effect has been executed, compared to the previously selected notice effect, the “pseudo-continuous 3 For the second (current) change of “time”, a prohibition process is performed to prohibit selection of the notice effect with lower reliability than the notice effect selected in the first (previous) change of “pseudo-three times”. . For example, when “CHANCE” is selected based on the tenth notice message determination table 201J for the first (previous) change of “3 pseudo-reams”, the second (current) of “3 pseudo-reams” is selected. In the fluctuation, a prohibition process is performed to change the setting so that “...” Having a low reliability is not selected. Specifically, as such prohibition processing, the notification message prohibition processing having the above-described contents is performed on the eleventh notification message determination table 201K.

  In the twelfth notice message determination table 201L of (F), as shown in the numerical value setting of SR8, “...”, “CHANCE”, “REACH”, “extreme heat”, In addition, a setting is made so that any one of the “GOOD LUCK” notice messages is selected. Accordingly, in the third fluctuation in the case of the fluctuation pattern of “reasonable three times” that is out of reach, one of these messages is selected and displayed as a notice message. In the twelfth notice message determination table 201L, basically, the ratio that the notice message is selected is a numerical value such that “CHANCE”> “... >>“ REACH ”>“ extreme heat ”>“ GOOD LUCK ”. Data is set. In addition, in the twelfth notice message determination table 201L, the ratio of selecting “...”, “CHANCE”, and “extreme heat” is lower than in the eleventh notice message determination table 201K. The numerical data of SR8 is set so that the ratio of selecting “REACH”, “FEVER”, and “GOOD LUCK” is increased.

  However, with respect to the twelfth notice message determination table 201L, in order to prevent the reliability of the big hit gaming state after the notice effect has been executed, compared to the previously selected notice effect, the “pseudo-continuous 3 For the third time (current) change of “Time”, a prohibition process is performed to prohibit selection of the notice effect having a lower reliability than the notice effect selected in the second (previous) change of “pseudo-three times”. . For example, when “CHANCE” is selected based on the eleventh notice message determination table 201K in the second (previous) change of “pseudo three times”, the third (current) of “pseudo three times” is selected. In the fluctuation, a prohibition process is performed to change the setting so that “...” Having a low reliability is not selected. Specifically, as such prohibition processing, the notification message prohibition processing having the above-described contents is performed on the twelfth notification message determination table 201L. In the twelfth notice message determination table 201L, the ratio of “...” And “REACH” to be selected is higher than in the sixth notice message determination table 201F at the time of a big hit, and “CHANCE”, “ The numerical data of SR8 is set so that the ratio of selecting each of “Fever”, “FEVER”, and “GOOD LUCK” is low.

  In the thirteenth notice message determination table 201M in (G), as shown in the numerical value setting of SR8, one of the notice messages of “...” And “CHANCE” is selected based on the extracted value of the random number SR8. The other notice message is set not to be selected. Therefore, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of “no quasi-ream” that is out of reach, either “...” Or “CHANCE” is selected and displayed as a notice message. In the thirteenth notice message determination table 201M, the numerical data of SR8 is set so that the ratio at which the notice message is selected is “... >>“ CHANCE ”.

  In the fourteenth notice message determination table 201N of (H), as shown in the numerical value setting of SR8, one of the notice messages of “...” And “CHANCE” is selected based on the extracted value of the random number SR8. The other notice message is set not to be selected. Therefore, in the first fluctuation in the case of the fluctuation pattern of “non-reach” “pseudo-continuous two times”, either “...” Or “CHANCE” is selected and displayed as the notice message. In the fourteenth notice message determination table 201N, the numerical data of SR8 is basically set so that the ratio at which the notice message is selected is “... >>“ CHANCE ”. As shown in (H), in the fourteenth notice message determination table 201N, the ratio at which “...” Is selected is lower than in the thirteenth notice message determination table 201M, and the ratio at which “CHANCE” is selected. The numerical data of SR8 is set so that becomes higher. Further, in the fourteenth notice message determination table 201N, the numerical data of SR8 is set so that the ratio of selecting “...” Is higher than that in the eighth notice message determination table 201H at the time of “reach out”. Has been.

  In the fifteenth notice message determination table 201O in (I), one of the notice messages “...” And “CHANCE” is selected based on the extracted value of the random number SR8 as shown in the numerical value setting of SR8. The other notice message is set not to be selected. Accordingly, in the second fluctuation in the case of the fluctuation pattern of “non-reach” “pseudo-continuous twice”, either “...” Or “CHANCE” is selected and displayed as the notice message. In the fifteenth notice message determination table 201O, the SR8 numerical data is basically set so that the ratio of the notice message selection is “... >>“ CHANCE ”. As shown in (I), in the fifteenth notice message determination table 201O, the ratio that “...” Is selected is lower than in the fourteenth notice message determination table 201N, and the ratio that “CHANCE” is selected. The numerical data of SR8 is set so that becomes higher. Also, in the fifteenth notice message determination table 201O, the numerical data of SR8 is set so that the ratio of selecting “...” Is higher than that in the ninth notice message determination table 201I at the time of “reach out”. Has been.

  However, with respect to the fifteenth notice message determination table 201O, in order to prevent the reliability that the jackpot gaming state is achieved after the notice effect is executed, compared to the previously selected notice effect, the “pseudo-continuation 2” is set. For the second time (current) change of “time”, a prohibition process is performed to prohibit selection of the notice effect with lower reliability than the notice effect selected in the first (previous) change of “pseudo-continuous 2 times”. . For example, when “CHANCE” is selected based on the 14th notice message determination table 201N for the first (previous) change of “2 pseudo-continuations”, the second (current) of “2 pseudo-continuations” is selected. In the fluctuation, a prohibition process is performed to change the setting so that “...” Having a low reliability is not selected. Specifically, as the prohibition processing, the notification message prohibition processing having the above-described contents is performed on the fifteenth notification message determination table 201O.

  In addition, for each of the notice message determination tables as described above, the upper limit value of the random number value used for selecting and determining the notice message is set differently for the first change, the second change, and the third change. May be. By doing so, it is possible to vary the selection distribution.

  Next, the contents of the first notice step determination table 202A to the sixth notice step determination table 202F used when the variable display result is a big hit will be described. FIG. 70 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of the first notice step determination table 202A to the sixth notice step determination table 202F.

  In FIG. 70, (A) to (F) show a first notice step determination table 202A to a sixth notice step determination table 202F. Each notice step determination table shows the relationship between the extracted value of the random number SR9 and the display contents of the notice step selected (notice step in the figure).

  In the first notice step determination table 202A of (A), as shown in the numerical value setting of SR9, “none (do not display the notice step)”, “step 1”, “step” based on the extracted value of the random number SR9. Settings are made such that either “2” or “Step 3” is selected. Therefore, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of “no quasi-continuous”, any one of “none”, “step 1”, “step 2”, and “step 3” is selected and displayed as a notice step. In the first notice step determination table 202A, the numerical data of SR9 is set so that the ratio at which the notice step is selected is “none”> “step 1”> “step 2”> “step 3”.

  In the second notice step determination table 202B in (B), any one of “none”, “step 1”, and “step 2” is selected based on the extracted value of the random number SR9 as shown in the numerical value setting of SR9. Is set so that other notice steps are not selected. Therefore, in the first variation in the variation pattern of “pseudo-continuous 2 times”, any one of “none”, “step 1”, and “step 2” is selected, and “step 1” or “step 2” is selected. A notice step is displayed when “Step 2” is selected. In the second notice step determination table 202B, numerical data is basically set so that the selected ratio for the notice step is “step 1”> “none”> “step 2”. Further, in the second notice step determination table 202B, the numerical data of SR9 is set so that the ratio of the notice steps including “Step 1” and “Step 2” is higher than that in the first notice step determination table 202A. Is set.

  In the third notice step determination table 202C in (C), either “Step 2” or “Step 3” is selected based on the extracted value of the random number SR9 as shown in the numerical value setting of SR9. Settings are made. Therefore, in the second variation when the variation pattern of “pseudo-continuous twice” is selected, one of “step 2” and “step 3” is selected, and one of these is selected as the notice step. Displayed. In the third notice step determination table 202C, the numerical data is basically set so that the ratio at which the notice step is selected is “step 2”> “step 3”. Also, in the third notice step determination table 202C, the numerical data of SR9 is set so that “none” and “step 1” are not selected as compared with the second notice step determination table 202B. Thus, the reliability of the big hit gaming state after the notice effect is executed is not lowered in the third notice step determination table 202C as compared with the notice effect selected previously. That is, for the second (this time) change at the time of the big hit “pseudo-continuous 2 times”, the first step of “pseudo-continuous 2” is selected by selecting the advance step using the third advance step determination table 202C. The prohibition process for prohibiting selection of the notice effect having lower reliability than the notice effect selected in the previous variation is performed.

  In the fourth notice step determination table 202D of (D), as shown in the numerical value setting of SR9, any one of “none”, “step 1”, and “step 2” is selected based on the extracted value of the random number SR9. Is set so that other notice steps are not selected. Therefore, in the first variation in the variation pattern of “pseudo-continuous 3 times”, any one of “none”, “step 1”, and “step 2” is selected, and “step 1” or “step 2” is selected. A notice step is displayed when “Step 2” is selected. In the fourth notice step determination table 202D, the numerical data is basically set so that the selected ratio for the notice step is “step 1”> “step 2”> “none”. In the fourth notice step determination table 202D, the numerical data of SR9 is set so that the ratio at which “step 2” is selected is higher than that in the second notice step determination table 202B.

  In the fifth notice step determination table 202E of (E), as shown in the numerical value setting of SR9, based on the extracted value of the random number SR9, among the “step 1”, “step 2”, and “step 3” Either one is selected, and other notice steps are not selected. Therefore, in the second variation when the variation pattern of “pseudo-continuous 3 times” is selected, any one of “Step 1”, “Step 2”, and “Step 3” is selected. Is selected and displayed as the advance notice step. In the fifth notice step determination table 202E, the numerical data is basically set so that the ratio at which the notice step is selected is “step 3”> “step 2”> “step 1”. In the fifth notice step determination table 202E, numerical data of SR9 is set so that “None” is not selected as compared with the fourth notice step determination table 202B. In the fifth notice step determination table 202E, the numerical data of SR9 is set so that the ratio of selecting “Step 3” is higher than that in the third notice step determination table 202C.

  However, with respect to the fifth notice step determination table 202E, in order to prevent the reliability that the big hit gaming state is achieved after the notice effect is executed compared to the previously selected notice effect, the “pseudo-continuous 3 For the second (this time) change of “time”, a prohibition process that prohibits selection of a notice effect that is less reliable than the notice effect selected in the first (previous) change of “pseudo three times” (notice step) Forbidden processing). For example, when “step 2” is selected based on the fourth notice step determination table 202D for the first (previous) change of “pseudo three times”, the second (current) of “pseudo three times” In this variation, a prohibition process is performed to change the setting so that “step 1” with low reliability is not selected.

  The contents of the prohibition process of such a notice step are as follows, for example. When a notice step as a notice pattern is determined when executing pseudo-variable display, the previous notice step data for specifying the decided notice step is stored in the previous notice step storage area of the RAM as data indicating the previous notice pattern. (Update storage). Then, when executing the next fluctuation display in the quasi-ream, for the current selection advance notice step selected using the fifth advance step determination table 202E, the previous advance notice step specified by the previous advance notice step data and the trust that becomes a big hit Compare degrees. When the selected advance notice step has a lower reliability than the previous advance notice step, the previous advance notice step is determined as the advance notice step in the next change display so that the advance notice step having a lower reliability than the previous change display is not determined. . On the other hand, when the reliability of the current selection notice step is equal to or higher than the reliability of the previous notice step, the current selection notice step is determined as the notice step in the next change display. Specifically, the comparison of the reliability that becomes a big hit about the notice pattern in the prohibition processing as described above is performed as follows. For each of the plurality of types of advance notice steps, for example, flags having different numerical values are associated in advance (for example, the higher the reliability that is a big hit, the flag value is set so that the numerical value becomes larger). As a data indicating the previous notice step, a flag corresponding to the type of the notice step is set. Then, the flag set as the previous notice step data is compared with the flag corresponding to the notice step in the current fluctuation, and based on the magnitude relation of the numerical value of the flag, Determine which is more reliable.

  In the sixth notice step determination table 202F of (F), as shown in the numerical value setting of SR9, either “Step 2” or “Step 3” is selected based on the extracted value of the random number SR9. Settings are made. Therefore, in the third variation in the variation pattern of “pseudo-continuous 3 times”, one of “Step 2” and “Step 3” is selected, and one of these is selected as the notice step. Displayed. In the sixth notice step determination table 202F, the numerical data is basically set so that the ratio at which the notice step is selected is “step 3”> “step 2”. Also, in the sixth notice step determination table 202F, the numerical data of SR9 is set so that the ratio at which “step 3” is selected is higher than that in the third notice step determination table 202C.

  However, with respect to the sixth notice step determination table 202F, in order to prevent the reliability that the jackpot gaming state is achieved after the notice effect is executed compared to the previously selected notice effect, the “pseudo-continuous 3 For the third time (current) change of “Time”, a prohibition process is performed to prohibit selection of the notice effect having a lower reliability than the notice effect selected in the second (previous) change of “pseudo-three times”. . For example, when “step 3” is selected based on the fifth notice step determination table 202E for the second (previous) change of “pseudo continuous 3 times”, the third (pseudo continuous 3 times) (current) In the fluctuation, the prohibition process is performed to change the setting so that “step 2” with low reliability is not selected. Specifically, as such prohibition processing, the notification step prohibition processing having the above-described contents is performed on the sixth notification step determination table 202F. Thus, the reliability of the big hit gaming state after the notice effect is executed is not lowered in the sixth notice step determination table 202F as compared with the previously selected notice effect.

  Next, the contents of the seventh notice step determination table 202G to the fifteenth notice step determination table 202O used when the fluctuation display result is out of place (including both reach out of reach and non-reach out of reach) will be described. FIG. 71 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of the seventh notice step determination table 202G to the fifteenth notice step determination table 202O.

  In FIG. 71, (A) to (I) show the seventh notice step determination table 202G to the fifteenth notice step determination table 202O. Each notice step determination table shows the relationship between the extracted value of the random number SR9 and the display contents of the notice step selected (notice step in the figure).

  In the seventh notice step determination table 202G of (A), as shown in the numerical value setting of SR9, either “none (do not display the notice step)” or “step 1” is selected based on the extracted value of the random number SR9. The notice step is selected, and other notice steps are not selected. Therefore, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of “no quasi-continuous” that is out of reach, either “none” or “step 1” is selected, and the notice step is displayed only when “step 1” is selected. In the seventh notice step determination table 202G, the numerical data of SR9 is set so that the ratio of selecting “none” is higher than “step 1”.

  In the eighth notice step determination table 202H in (B), any one of “none”, “step 1”, and “step 2” is selected based on the extracted value of the random number SR9 as shown in the numerical value setting of SR9. Is set so that no other notice step is selected. Therefore, in the first fluctuation in the case of the fluctuation pattern of “displacement of two pseudo-reams”, one of “none”, “step 1”, and “step 2” is selected, and “step 1” ”Or“ Step 2 ”is selected, a notice step is displayed. In the second notice step determination table 202B, numerical data is basically set so that the selected ratio for the notice step is “step 1”> “none”> “step 2”. Further, in the second notice step determination table 202B, the numerical data of SR9 is set so that the ratio of the notice steps including “Step 1” and “Step 2” is higher than that in the first notice step determination table 202A. Is set. In the eighth notice step determination table 202H, the numerical data of SR9 is set so that the ratio of selecting “none” is higher than that in the second notice step determination table 202B in the case of a big hit.

  In the ninth notice step determination table 202I in (C), either “Step 1” or “Step 2” is selected based on the extracted value of the random number SR9 as shown in the numerical value setting of SR9. It is set to do. Accordingly, in the second fluctuation in the case of the fluctuation pattern of “displacement of two pseudo-reams” that is out of reach, one of “step 1” and “step 2” is selected, and one of these is the notice step. Is displayed as selected. In the ninth notice step determination table 202I, numerical data is basically set so that the ratio at which the notice step is selected is “step 1”> “step 2”. In the ninth advance step determination table 202I, numerical data of SR9 is set so that “none” and “step 3” are not selected as compared with the eighth advance step determination table 202H. In addition, in the eleventh notice step determination table 202K, the numerical data of SR9 is set so that the ratio at which “step 1” is selected is higher than that in the fifth notice step determination table 202F in the case of a big hit. .

  However, with respect to the ninth notice step determination table 202I, in order to prevent the reliability of the big hit gaming state after the notice effect has been executed compared to the previously selected notice effect, the “pseudo-continuous 2 For the second time (current) change of “time”, a prohibition process is performed to prohibit selection of the notice effect with lower reliability than the notice effect selected in the first (previous) change of “pseudo-continuous 2 times”. . For example, when “step 2” is selected based on the eighth notice step determination table 202H for the first (previous) variation of “pseudo-continuous twice”, the second “pseudo-continuous” (current) In this variation, a prohibition process is performed to change the setting so that “step 1” with low reliability is not selected. As such a prohibition process, the notification step prohibition process having the above-described contents is performed on the ninth notification step determination table 202I. Thus, the reliability of the big hit gaming state after the notice effect is executed is not lowered in the ninth notice step determination table 202I as compared to the notice effect selected previously.

  In the tenth notice step determination table 202J in (D), as shown in the numerical value setting of SR9, any one of “none”, “step 1”, and “step 2” is selected based on the extracted value of the random number SR9. Is set so that no other notice step is selected. Therefore, in the first fluctuation in the case of the fluctuation pattern of “pseudo-continuous three times” that is out of reach, any one of “none”, “step 1”, and “step 2” is selected, and “step 1 ”Or“ Step 2 ”is selected, a notice step is displayed. In the tenth notice step determination table 202J, the numerical data is basically set so that the selected ratio for the notice step is “step 1”> “step 2”> “none”. In the tenth notice step determination table 202J, the numerical data of SR9 is set so that the ratio at which “step 2” is selected is higher than that in the eighth notice step determination table 202H. Also, in the tenth notice step determination table 202J, the numerical data of SR9 is set so that the ratio at which “step 2” is selected is higher than that in the fourth notice step determination table 202D when it is a big hit. .

  In the eleventh notice step determination table 202K of (E), as shown in the numerical value setting of SR9, either “step 1” or “step 2” is selected based on the extracted value of the random number SR9. It is set to do. Accordingly, in the second fluctuation in the case of the fluctuation pattern of “displacement“ 3 pseudo-ream ””, one of “step 1” and “step 2” is selected, and one of these is a notice step. Is displayed as selected. In the eleventh notice step determination table 202K, the numerical data is basically set so that the ratio at which the notice step is selected is “step 1”> “step 2”. In addition, in the eleventh notice step determination table 202K, numerical data of SR9 is set so that “none” and “step 3” are not selected as compared with the tenth notice step determination table 202J. In addition, in the eleventh notice message determination table 202K, the numerical data of SR9 is set so that the ratio at which “step 1” is selected is higher than that in the fifth notice message determination table 202E at the time of a big hit. .

  However, with respect to the eleventh notice step determination table 202K, in order to prevent the reliability of the big hit gaming state after the notice effect has been executed compared to the previously selected notice effect, the “pseudo-continuation 3” is set. For the second (current) change of “time”, a prohibition process is performed to prohibit selection of the notice effect with lower reliability than the notice effect selected in the first (previous) change of “pseudo-three times”. . For example, when “step 2” is selected based on the tenth notice step determination table 202J for the first (previous) change in “pseudo three times”, the second (this time) “pseudo three times” In this variation, a prohibition process is performed to change the setting so that “step 1” with low reliability is not selected. Specifically, as such a prohibition process, the advancement step prohibition process having the above-described content is performed on the eleventh advancement step determination table 202K. As a result, the eleventh notice step determination table 202K is not less reliable than the notice effect selected previously before the big hit gaming state is achieved after the notice effect is executed.

  In the twelfth notice step determination table 202L in (F), as shown in the numerical value setting of SR9, either “Step 1” or “Step 2” is selected based on the extracted value of the random number SR9. It is set to do. Accordingly, in the third fluctuation in the case of the fluctuation pattern of “pseudo-continuous three times” that is out of reach, one of “step 1” and “step 2” is selected, and one of these is the notice step. Is displayed as selected. In the twelfth notice step determination table 202L, the numerical data is basically set so that the ratio at which the notice step is selected is “step 2”> “step 1”. In the twelfth notice step determination table 202L, the numerical data of SR9 is set so that “none” and “step 3” are not selected. In addition, in the twelfth notice step determination table 202L, the ratio of “step 1” being selected and “step 2” being selected is higher than the sixth notice step determination table 202D in the case of a big hit. The numerical data of SR9 is set in

  However, with respect to the twelfth notice step determination table 202L, in order to prevent the reliability of the big hit gaming state after the notice effect has been executed from the previously selected notice effect, the “pseudo-continuous 3 For the third time (current) change of “Time”, a prohibition process is performed to prohibit selection of the notice effect having a lower reliability than the notice effect selected in the second (previous) change of “pseudo-three times”. . For example, when “Step 2” is selected based on the eleventh notice step determination table 202K for the second (previous) change of “Pseudo three times”, the third of “Pseudo three times” (current) In this variation, a prohibition process is performed to change the setting so that “step 1” with low reliability is not selected. Specifically, as such a prohibition process, the notice step prohibition process having the above-described contents is performed on the twelfth notice step determination table 202L. As a result, the twelfth notice step determination table 202L is not less reliable than the notice effect selected previously before the big hit gaming state is achieved after the notice effect is executed.

  In addition, for each of the notice step determination tables as described above, the upper limit value of the random number value used for selecting and determining the notice step is set differently for the first change, the second change, and the third change. May be. By doing so, it is possible to vary the selection distribution.

  FIG. 72 shows a configuration example of a notice reliability selection table as a data table used for selecting a table used when determining the display mode of the notice reliability display indicating the reliability of the notice effect when performing the notice effect. It is explanatory drawing shown. The notification reliability display in this case corresponds to the color reliability display performed at the time of button notification shown in FIG. 64 and the pattern reliability display performed at the time of step-up notification shown in FIG.

  In FIG. 72, (A) shows a big hit button notice reliability selection table. In FIG. 72, (B) shows a loss button notice reliability selection table. In FIG. 72, (C) shows a step-up notice reliability selection table at the time of big hit. In FIG. 72, (D) shows a step-up notice reliability selection table at the time of loss. These notice reliability selection tables are all stored in the ROM of the production control microcomputer 100.

  The big hit button notice reliability selection table shown in (A) determines the display mode of the color reliability display when the button notice is given when the big hit variation pattern in which the fluctuation display result is “big hit” is designated. It is a data table for selecting the color reliability determination table used for this purpose. In the big hit button notice reliability selection table, a different color reliability determination table is selected according to the total number of change displays (including re-change) performed in the change pattern designated by the effect control command. Data is set.

  Specifically, in the big hit button notice reliability selection table shown in (A), the reliability display determination table is selected as follows. For example, when the variation pattern “no quasi-continuous” is designated, the first color reliability display determination table 205A shown in FIG. 73 is selected.

  In addition, when a variation pattern that performs two pseudo-continuations (a total of two variation displays including the initial variation) is specified among the variation patterns that are pseudo-continuous, the color reliability at the first variation (at the first variation) is specified. In order to determine the display mode of the degree display, the second color reliability display determination table 205B shown in FIG. 73 is selected to determine the display mode of the color reliability display at the time of the second variation (during re-variation). The third color reliability display determination table 205C shown in FIG. 73 is selected.

  In addition, when a variation pattern in which three pseudo-sequences (a total of three variations are displayed including the first variation) is designated among the variation patterns that become pseudo-continuations, the color reliability at the first variation (at the first variation) is specified. In order to determine the display mode of the degree display, the fourth color reliability display determination table 205D shown in FIG. 73 is selected, and the display mode of the color reliability display at the time of the second variation (during re-variation) is determined. The fifth color reliability display determination table 205E shown in FIG. 73 is selected, and the sixth color reliability display shown in FIG. 73 is used to determine the display mode of the color reliability display at the time of the third change (at the time of re-change). The decision table 205F is selected.

  In the missed button notice reliability selection table shown in (B), when a notice change pattern (including both reach and non-reach) is specified when the fluctuation display result is “missed”, the button notice is performed. 3 is a data table for selecting a color reliability determination table used for determining a display mode of color reliability display in FIG. In the off button notice reliability selection table, a different color reliability display determination table is selected according to the total number of change displays (including re-change) performed in the change pattern specified by the effect control command. Data is set in.

  Specifically, in the missed button notice reliability selection table shown in (B), the color reliability display determination table is selected as follows. For example, when a variation pattern of “no quasi-continuous” is designated, a seventh color reliability display determination table 205G shown in FIG. 74 is selected.

  In addition, when the variation pattern of “pseudo-continuous twice” is designated, the eighth color reliability display shown in FIG. 74 is used to determine the display mode of the color reliability display at the first variation (at the first variation). The determination table 205H is selected, and the ninth color reliability display determination table 205I shown in FIG. 74 is selected in order to determine the display mode of the color reliability display at the time of the second change (during re-change).

  When the variation pattern of “pseudo-continuous 3 times” is designated, the tenth color reliability display shown in FIG. 74 is used to determine the display mode of the color reliability display at the first variation (at the first variation). The determination table 205J is selected, the eleventh color reliability display determination table 205K shown in FIG. 74 is selected in order to determine the display mode of the color reliability display at the time of the second change (at the time of re-change), and the third time. The twelfth color reliability display determination table 205L shown in FIG. 74 is selected to determine the display mode of the color reliability display at the time of change (at the time of re-change).

  The big hit step-up notice reliability selection table shown in (C) shows the display mode of the pattern reliability display when the step-up notice is performed when the big hit fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation display result is “big hit” is designated. 5 is a data table for selecting a pattern reliability determination table used to determine In the big hit step-up notice reliability selection table, when the step-up notice is determined as the display mode type of the pattern reliability display, the pattern reliability used for determining the display mode of the specific color reliability display It is a data table for selecting a decision table. In the big hit time step-up notice reliability selection table, a different pattern reliability determination table is selected according to the total number of variation displays (including re-variation) performed in the variation pattern specified by the effect control command. Data is set in.

  Specifically, in the big hit step-up notice reliability selection table shown in (C), the pattern reliability determination table is selected as follows. When the variation pattern “no quasi-continuous” is designated, the first pattern reliability determination table 206A shown in FIG. 75 is selected.

  In addition, when the variation pattern of “pseudo-continuous twice” is designated, the second pattern reliability determination shown in FIG. 75 is performed in order to determine the display mode of the pattern reliability display at the first variation (at the first variation). The table 206B is selected, and the third pattern reliability determination table 206C shown in FIG. 75 is selected in order to determine the display mode of the pattern reliability display at the time of the second change (at the time of re-change).

  In addition, when the variation pattern of “pseudo three times” is designated, the fourth pattern reliability determination shown in FIG. 75 is performed in order to determine the display mode of the pattern reliability display at the first variation (at the first variation). The table 205D is selected, the fifth pattern reliability determination table 206E shown in FIG. 75 is selected to determine the display mode of the pattern reliability display at the time of the second variation (at the time of re-variation), and at the time of the third variation. A sixth pattern reliability determination table 206F shown in FIG. 75 is selected to determine the display mode of the pattern reliability display (during re-variation).

  The step-up notice reliability selection table at the time of failure shown in (D) shows a pattern reliability display when an error variation pattern (including both reach and non-reach) in which the variation display result is “miss” is designated. This is a data table for selecting a pattern reliability determination table used for determining a specific pattern reliability display mode when step-up notice is determined as the display mode type. In the off-step step-up notice reliability selection table, a different pattern reliability determination table is selected according to the total number of variation displays (including re-variation) performed in the variation pattern designated by the effect control command. Data is set in.

  Specifically, in the step-up notice reliability selection table at the time of loss shown in (D), the pattern reliability determination table is selected as follows. For example, when a variation pattern of “no quasi-continuous” is designated, a seventh pattern reliability determination table 206G shown in FIG. 76 is selected.

  In addition, when the variation pattern of “pseudo-continuous twice” is designated, the eighth pattern reliability determination shown in FIG. 76 is performed to determine the display mode of the pattern reliability display at the first variation (at the first variation). The table 206H is selected, and the ninth pattern reliability determination table 206I shown in FIG. 76 is selected in order to determine the display mode of the pattern reliability display at the time of the second change (at the time of re-change).

  In addition, when the variation pattern of “pseudo three times” is designated, the tenth pattern reliability determination shown in FIG. 76 is performed in order to determine the display mode of the pattern reliability display at the first variation (at the first variation). The table 206J is selected, and the eleventh pattern reliability determination table 206K shown in FIG. 76 is selected to determine the display mode of the pattern reliability display at the time of the second change (at the time of re-change), and at the time of the third change. A twelfth pattern reliability determination table 206L shown in FIG. 76 is selected to determine the display mode of the pattern reliability display (during re-variation).

  Note that each of the big hit button notice reliability selection table, the off button notice reliability selection table, the big hit step-up notice reliability selection table, and the off button notice reliability selection table at the time of first change Three tables are provided as reliability display determination tables (color reliability display determination table and pattern reliability display determination table) used for determining the reliability display in accordance with the presence / absence of the pseudo-series and the number of fluctuations in the pseudo-series. An example of using different tables is shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a single table is created in which three tables used for determining the reliability display at the time of the first fluctuation are created. The notice reliability selection table may be set so that it can be used in common. Specifically, for example, in the case of the big hit button notice reliability selection table, the first color reliability display determination table 205A, the second color reliability display determination table 205B, and the fourth color reliability display determination table 205D are displayed. The table is shared according to whether or not it is a big hit, such as common to one table.

  In addition, each of the big hit button notice reliability selection table, the off button notice reliability selection table, the big hit step-up notice reliability selection table, and the off button notice reliability selection table at the time of the second change Example of providing two tables as the reliability display determination table (color reliability display determination table, pattern reliability display determination table) used for determining the reliability display in the system, and using different tables according to the number of fluctuations in the pseudo-continuous showed that. Specifically, for example, in the case of the big hit button notice reliability selection table, the third color reliability display determination table 205C and the fifth color reliability display determination table 205E are shared. The table is shared according to whether or not it is a big hit. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a single table is created by sharing the three tables used for determining the reliability display at the time of the second fluctuation, and the presence or absence of the pseudo-series and the number of fluctuations in the pseudo-series. The notice reliability selection table may be set so that it can be used in common.

  In addition, with regard to the above-described step-up notice, an example is shown in which step 3 is not selected in the final change (change that is one of the first to third times) when it is off. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the allocation of the notice step determination table may be set so that step 3 can be selected in the final change (change that is one of the first to third times). As for the step-up notice described above, an example is shown in which step 3 is not selected in the first fluctuation when a big hit is made. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the allocation of the notice step determination table may be set so that step 3 can be selected in the first fluctuation.

  As described above, when a common table is used as the advance notice reliability display determination table, one of the reliability display determination table for the first variation and the reliability display determination table for the second variation are used. The reliability change determination table for the first variation and the reliability display determination table for the second variation may be shared, respectively.

  Next, the contents of the first color reliability display determination table 205A to the sixth color reliability display determination table 205F used when the variation display result is a big hit will be described. FIG. 73 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of the first color reliability display determination table 205A to the sixth color reliability display determination table 205F.

  In FIG. 73, (A) to (F) show a first color reliability display determination table 205A to a sixth color reliability display determination table 205F. In each color reliability display determination table, the relationship between the extracted value of the random number SR10 and the selected notification reliability display content (notification reliability display in the figure) is shown. In each of the first color reliability display determination table 205A to the sixth color reliability display determination table 205F, “first color display (white)”, “second color display (blue) based on the extracted value of the random number SR10. ) ”And“ third color display (yellow) ”are selected. As a result, with respect to the button notice at the time of big hit, the color corresponding to the color display determined in any of the first color reliability display determination table 205A to the sixth color reliability display determination table 205F, as shown in FIG. Color reliability display is performed. Specifically, the color reliability display is performed by displaying the envelope image 9P in the color display color thus determined.

  In the first color reliability display determination table 205A in (A), as shown in the numerical value setting of SR10, the selection ratio of the color display is “first color display”> “second color display”> “third color display”. The numerical data is set so that “

  In the second color reliability display determination table 205B in (B), “second color display” and “third color display” are compared with the first color reliability display determination table 205A as shown in the numerical value setting of SR10. The numerical data of SR10 is set so that the ratio at which “1” is selected increases and the ratio at which “first color display” is selected decreases. As a result, in the first variation when the variation pattern is “twice pseudo-continuous”, “second color display” and “third color display” are at a higher rate than in the case of “no pseudo-continuous”. Will be selected.

  In the third color reliability display determination table 205C in (C), “first color display” and “second color display” are compared with the second color reliability display determination table 205B, as shown in the numerical setting of SR10. The numerical data of SR10 is set so that the ratio at which “3” is selected decreases and the ratio at which “third color display” is selected increases. As a result, the “third color display” is selected at a higher rate in the second variation when the variation pattern is “pseudo-continuous twice” than in the first variation. However, for the third color reliability display determination table 205C, in order to prevent the reliability of the big hit gaming state after the notice effect has been executed, compared with the previously selected color reliability display, When “second color display” or “third color display” is selected for the first (previous) variation of “pseudo continuous two times”, the second (current) variation of “pseudo continuous two times” is selected. Then, a prohibition process (color reliability prohibition process) is performed to change the setting so that a color display having a lower color reliability is not selected.

  The content of such color reliability prohibition processing is, for example, as follows. When the color reliability display (any one of the first color display to the third color display) is determined as the reliability display pattern when the pseudo-variable display is executed, the previous reliability specifying the determined color reliability display The previous color reliability display data as the degree display data is stored (updated) in the previous color reliability display storage area of the RAM as data indicating the previous color reliability display pattern. Then, the previous color reliability specified by the previous color reliability display data for the currently selected color reliability display selected using the third color reliability display determination table 205C when executing the next variation display in the pseudo-series. Compare the degree display and the reliability of the big hit. When the color reliability display selected this time is lower than the previous color reliability display, the color reliability display in the next variation display is not determined so that the color reliability display having a lower reliability than the previous variation display is not determined. The previous color reliability display is determined. On the other hand, when the reliability of the currently selected color reliability display is equal to or higher than the reliability of the previous color reliability display, the currently selected color reliability display is determined as the color reliability display in the next variation display. Specifically, the comparison of the reliability that is a big hit for the color reliability display in the prohibition processing as described above is performed as follows. For each of the multiple types of color reliability display, for example, flags having different numerical values are associated in advance (for example, the flag value is set so that the higher the reliability that is a big hit, the higher the numerical value). As the data indicating the previous color reliability display, a flag corresponding to the type of the previous color reliability display is set. Then, the flag set as the previous color reliability display is compared with the flag corresponding to the color reliability display in the current variation, and the currently selected color reliability display and It is determined which has higher reliability in the previous color reliability display.

  In the fourth color reliability display determination table 205D in (D), “second color display” and “third color display” are compared with the second color reliability display determination table 205A, as shown in the numerical setting of SR10. The numerical data of SR10 is set so that the ratio at which “1” is selected increases and the ratio at which “first color display” is selected decreases. As a result, in the first variation when the variation pattern of “pseudo-continuous three times” is set, the “first-order variation” is higher than the first variation of “no pseudo-continuous” and “pseudo-continuous two times”. “Two color display” and “third color display” are selected.

  In the fifth color reliability display determination table 205E in (E), as shown in the numerical value setting of SR10, “first color display” and “second color display” are compared with the fourth color reliability display determination table 205D. The numerical data of SR10 is set so that the ratio at which “3” is selected decreases and the ratio at which “third color display” is selected increases. As a result, the “third color display” is selected at a higher rate in the second variation when the variation pattern is “pseudo three times” than in the first variation.

  However, with respect to the fifth color reliability display determination table 205E, in order to prevent the reliability of the big hit gaming state from being reduced after the notice effect is executed, as compared with the previously selected color reliability display, For the second (current) change in “Pseudo 3 times”, select a color reliability display that is lower in reliability than the color reliability display selected in the first (previous) change in “3rd consecutive” Prohibition processing to prohibit is performed. For example, when “second color display” is selected based on the fourth color reliability display determination table 205D for the first (previous) change of “pseudo three times”, “pseudo three times” 2 In the first (current) variation, a prohibition process is performed so that “first color display” with low reliability is not selected. Specifically, as such prohibition processing, the color reliability prohibition processing having the above-described contents is performed on the fifth color reliability display determination table 205E. As a result, the fifth color reliability display determination table 205E does not have a lower reliability in which the big hit gaming state is achieved after the notice effect is executed, as compared with the previously selected color reliability display.

  In the sixth color reliability display determination table 205F in (F), as shown in the numerical value setting of SR10, “first color display” and “second color display” are compared with the fifth color reliability display determination table 205E. The numerical data of SR10 is set so that the ratio at which “3” is selected is low and the ratio at which “third color display” is selected is high. As a result, in the third variation when the variation pattern is “pseudo three times”, “third color display” is selected at a higher rate than in the first variation.

  However, with respect to the sixth color reliability display determination table 205F, in order to prevent the reliability of the big hit gaming state after the notice effect has been executed, compared to the previously selected color reliability display, Selection of color reliability display with lower reliability than the color reliability display selected in the second (previous) change of “pseudo-triple 3” for the third (pseudo-run 3) change Prohibition processing to prohibit is performed. For example, when “second color display” is selected based on the fifth color reliability display determination table 205E for the second (previous) change of “pseudo three times”, “pseudo three times” 3 In the first (current) variation, a prohibition process is performed so that “first color display” with low reliability is not selected. Specifically, as such prohibition processing, the color reliability prohibition processing having the above-described contents is performed on the sixth color reliability display determination table 205F. As a result, regarding the sixth color reliability display determination table 205F, the reliability of the big hit gaming state after the notice effect is executed does not decrease as compared with the previously selected color reliability display.

  Next, the contents of the seventh color reliability display determination table 205G to the twelfth color reliability display determination table 205L used when the variation display result is out of order will be described. FIG. 74 is an explanatory diagram of a configuration example of the seventh color reliability display determination table 205G to the twelfth color reliability display determination table 205L.

  74, (A) to (F) show a seventh color reliability display determination table 205G to a twelfth color reliability display determination table 205L. In each color reliability display determination table, the relationship between the extracted value of the random number SR10 and the selected notification reliability display content (notification reliability display in the figure) is shown. In each of the seventh color reliability display determination table 205G to the twelfth color reliability display determination table 205L, as in the case of the first color reliability display determination table 205A to the sixth color reliability display determination table 205F, a random number is used. Based on the extracted value of SR10, any one of “first color display (white)”, “second color display (blue)”, and “third color display (yellow)” is selected. . Thereby, regarding the button notice at the time of disconnection, the color corresponding to the color display determined in any of the seventh color reliability display determination table 205G to the twelfth color reliability display determination table 205L, as shown in FIG. Color reliability display is performed. Specifically, the color reliability display is performed by displaying the envelope image 9P in the color display color thus determined.

  In the seventh color reliability display determination table 205G in (A), as shown in the numerical setting of SR10, the selection ratio of the color display is “first color display”> “second color display”> “third color display”. The numerical data is set so that “ In the seventh color reliability display determination table 205G, compared to the first color reliability display determination table 205A at the time of the big hit, the ratio of selecting “first color display” is higher, and “second color display”. In addition, the numerical data of SR10 is set so that the ratio at which “third color display” is selected decreases.

  In the eighth color reliability display determination table 205H in (B), “second color display” and “third color display” are compared with the seventh color reliability display determination table 205G, as shown in the numerical setting of SR10. The numerical data of SR10 is set so that the ratio at which “1” is selected increases and the ratio at which “first color display” is selected decreases. As a result, in the first variation when the variation pattern of “pseudo-continuous twice” is selected, “second color display” and “third color display” are selected at a higher rate than in the case of “no pseudo-continuous”. Will be. In addition, in the eighth color reliability display determination table 205H, the ratio of “first color display” is higher than that in the second color reliability display determination table 205B when the big hit, and the “second color” The numerical data of SR10 is set so that the ratio of selecting “display” and “third color display” is low.

  In the ninth color reliability display determination table 205I in (C), as shown in the numerical value setting of SR10, the ratio of selecting “first color display” is lower than that in the eighth color reliability display determination table 205H. Thus, the numerical data of SR10 is set so that the ratio of selecting “second color display” and “third color display” is increased. As a result, in the second variation when the variation pattern is “pseudo-continuous twice”, “second color display” and “third color display” are selected at a higher rate than in the first variation. The Rukoto. Further, in the ninth color reliability display determination table 205I, the ratio of “first color display” is higher than that in the third color reliability display determination table 205C when the big hit, and the “second color” The numerical data of SR10 is set so that the ratio of selecting “display” and “third color display” is low.

  However, for the ninth color reliability display determination table 205I, compared to the previously selected color reliability display, in order to prevent the reliability of the big hit gaming state after the notice effect is executed, it is not lowered. For the second (this time) variation of “pseudo-continuous 2 times”, the selection of the color reliability display having a lower reliability than the color reliability display selected in the first (previous) variation of “pseudo-continuous 2 times” Prohibition processing to prohibit is performed. For example, when “second color display” is selected on the basis of the eighth color reliability display determination table 205H for the first (previous) change of “pseudo continuous twice”, “pseudo continuous twice” 2 In the first (current) variation, a prohibition process is performed so that “first color display” with low reliability is not selected. Specifically, as such prohibition processing, the color reliability prohibition processing having the above-described contents is performed on the ninth color reliability display determination table 205I. Thus, the ninth color reliability display determination table 205I does not have lower reliability in which the big hit gaming state is executed after the notice effect is executed, compared to the previously selected color reliability display.

  In the tenth color reliability display determination table 205J in (D), as shown in the numerical value setting of SR10, the ratio of selecting “first color display” is lower than that in the eighth color reliability display determination table 205H. Thus, the numerical data of SR10 is set so that the ratio of selecting “second color display” and “third color display” is increased. As a result, in the first variation when the variation pattern is “3 pseudo-reams”, the second variation has a higher rate than the first variation of “no pseudo-reams” and “twice pseudo-reams”. “Color display” and “third color display” are selected. In addition, in the tenth color reliability display determination table 205J, the ratio of “first color display” is higher than in the fourth color reliability display determination table 205D when the big hit, and “second color” The numerical data of SR10 is set so that the ratio of selecting “display” and “third color display” is low.

  In the eleventh color reliability display determination table 205K in (E), as shown in the numerical value setting of SR10, the ratio of selecting “first color display” is lower than that in the tenth color reliability display determination table 205J. Thus, the numerical data of SR10 is set so that the ratio of selecting “second color display” and “third color display” is increased. As a result, in the second variation in the variation pattern of “pseudo three times”, “second color display” and “third color display” are selected at a higher rate than in the first variation. The Rukoto. In addition, in the eleventh color reliability display determination table 205K, the ratio of “first color display” to be selected is higher than in the fifth color reliability display determination table 205E in the case of a big hit. The numerical data of SR10 is set so that the ratio of selecting “display” and “third color display” is low.

  However, with respect to the eleventh color reliability display determination table 205K, in order to prevent the reliability of the big hit gaming state after the notice effect has been executed, compared to the previously selected color reliability display, For the second (current) change in “Pseudo 3 times”, select a color reliability display that is lower in reliability than the color reliability display selected in the first (previous) change in “3rd consecutive” Prohibition processing to prohibit is performed. For example, when “second color display” is selected based on the tenth color reliability display determination table 205J for the first (previous) change of “pseudo three times”, “pseudo three times” 2 In the first (current) variation, a prohibition process is performed so that “first color display” with low reliability is not selected. Specifically, as such prohibition processing, the color reliability prohibition processing having the above-described contents is performed on the eleventh color reliability display determination table 205K. As a result, the eleventh color reliability display determination table 205K does not decrease the reliability of the big hit gaming state after the notice effect is executed as compared with the previously selected color reliability display.

  In the twelfth color reliability display determination table 205L in (F), “first color display” and “second color display” are compared with the eleventh color reliability display determination table 205K, as shown in the numerical setting of SR10. The numerical data of SR10 is set so that the ratio at which “3” is selected decreases and the ratio at which “third color display” is selected increases. As a result, in the third variation in the “pseudo three times” variation pattern, “second color display” and “third color display” are selected at a higher rate than in the second variation. The Rukoto. Further, in the twelfth color reliability display determination table 205L, the ratio of “first color display” to be selected is higher than in the sixth color reliability display determination table 205F in the case of a big hit. The numerical data of SR10 is set so that the ratio of selecting “display” and “third color display” is low.

  However, for the twelfth color reliability display determination table 205L, compared to the previously selected color reliability display, in order to prevent the reliability in which the big hit gaming state is achieved after the notice effect has been executed, Selection of color reliability display with lower reliability than the color reliability display selected in the second (previous) change of “pseudo-triple 3” for the third (pseudo-run 3) change Prohibition processing to prohibit is performed. For example, when “second color display” is selected based on the eleventh color reliability display determination table 205K for the second (previous) variation of “pseudo three times”, “pseudo three times” 2 In the first (current) variation, a prohibition process is performed so that “first color display” with low reliability is not selected. Specifically, as such prohibition processing, the color reliability prohibition processing having the above-described contents is performed on the twelfth color reliability display determination table 205L. As a result, the twelfth color reliability display determination table 205 </ b> L does not decrease the reliability of the big hit gaming state after the notice effect is executed, as compared with the previously selected color reliability display.

  In addition, regarding the determination of the color reliability display described above, an example in which the display determination table is separately selected and determined in two cases, when the variation display result is a big hit and when the variation display result is off. Indicated. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the determination of the color reliability display includes three cases: when the variation display result is a big hit, when the variation display result is out of reach, and when the variation display result is out of reach. In such a case, the display determination table may be separately selected and determined. As for the color reliability display, when the variation display result is a non-reachable display result, a prohibition process is performed so that the color reliability is not increased in the re-variation when the display result is not likely to be a big hit. It may be. In addition, when a pseudo-ream that does not reach is performed, a prohibition process may be performed so that the color reliability is not increased in the re-variation. By performing such prohibition processing, it is possible to ensure that the color reliability display corresponding to the reliability that is a big hit is performed.

  Further, in each color reliability display determination table as described above, the upper limit value of the random value used for the selection determination of the color reliability is different for the first variation, the second variation, and the third variation. May be set. By doing so, it is possible to vary the selection distribution.

  Next, the contents of the first pattern reliability display determination table 206A to the sixth pattern reliability display determination table 206F used when the variation display result is a big hit will be described. FIG. 75 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of the first pattern reliability display determination table 206A to the sixth pattern reliability display determination table 206F.

  75, (A) to (F) show the first pattern reliability display determination table 206A to the sixth pattern reliability display determination table 206F. In each pattern reliability display determination table, the relationship between the extracted value of the random number SR11 and the selected notification reliability display content (notification reliability display in the figure) is shown. In each of the first pattern reliability display determination table 206A to the sixth pattern reliability display determination table 206F, “first pattern display (solid painting)”, “second pattern display ( One of the pattern displays is selected from “stripe pattern” and “third pattern display (spot pattern)”. Thereby, regarding the step-up notice at the time of the big hit, the pattern according to the pattern display determined in any of the first pattern reliability display determination table 206A to the sixth pattern reliability display determination table 206F, as shown in FIG. A reliable pattern display is performed. Specifically, the pattern reliability display is performed by displaying 91T, 92T, and 93T).

  In the first pattern reliability display determination table 206A in (A), as shown in the numerical value setting of SR11, the selection ratio of pattern display is “first pattern display”> “second pattern display”> “third pattern display”. The numerical data is set so that “

  In the second pattern reliability display determination table 206B in (B), “second pattern display” and “third pattern display” are compared with the first pattern reliability display determination table 206A, as shown in the numerical setting of SR11. The numerical data of SR11 is set so that the ratio of selecting “1” increases and the ratio of “first pattern display” decreases. As a result, in the first variation when the variation pattern is “two pseudo-continuations”, “second pattern display” and “third pattern display” are at a higher rate than in the case of “no pseudo-continuations”. Will be selected.

  In the third pattern reliability display determination table 206C in (C), “first pattern display” and “second pattern display” are compared with the second pattern reliability display determination table 206B, as shown in the numerical setting of SR11. The numerical data of SR11 is set so that the ratio of selecting “3rd pattern display” is increased and the ratio of selecting “third pattern display” is increased. As a result, the “third pattern display” is selected at a higher rate in the second variation when the variation pattern is “pseudo-continuous twice” than in the first variation. However, regarding the third pattern reliability display determination table 206C, in order to prevent the reliability of the big hit gaming state after the notice effect has been executed, compared to the previously selected pattern reliability display, When “2nd pattern display” or “3rd pattern display” is selected for the first (previous) variation of “2 pseudo-continuations”, the second (current) variation of “pseudo-continuous 2 times” is selected. Then, a prohibition process (pattern reliability prohibition process) is performed to change the setting so that a pattern display having a lower pattern reliability is not selected.

  The contents of such pattern reliability prohibition processing are as follows, for example. When the pattern reliability display (any one of the first pattern display to the third color pattern display) is determined as the reliability display pattern when the pseudo-variable display is performed, the previous pattern specifying the determined pattern reliability display The previous color pattern reliability display data, which is reliability display data, is stored (updated) in the previous pattern reliability display storage area of the RAM as data indicating the previous pattern reliability display pattern. Then, the previous pattern reliability specified by the previous pattern reliability display data is selected for the currently selected pattern reliability display selected using the third pattern reliability display determination table 206C when the next variation display in the pseudo-series is executed. Compare the degree display and the reliability of the big hit. When the reliability of the selected pattern reliability display is lower than that of the previous pattern reliability display, the pattern reliability display in the next fluctuation display is determined so that the pattern reliability display with lower reliability than the previous fluctuation display is not determined. Then, the previous pattern reliability display is determined. On the other hand, when the reliability of the currently selected pattern reliability display is equal to or higher than the reliability of the previous pattern reliability display, the currently selected pattern reliability display is determined as the pattern reliability display in the next variation display. Specifically, the comparison of the reliability that becomes a big hit for the pattern reliability display in the prohibition processing as described above is performed as follows. For each of the multiple types of pattern reliability display, for example, flags having different numerical values are associated in advance (for example, the flag value is set so that the higher the reliability that is a big hit, the higher the numerical value). As the data indicating the previous pattern reliability display, a flag corresponding to the type of the previous pattern reliability display is set. Then, the flag set as the previous pattern reliability display is compared with the flag corresponding to the pattern reliability display in the current variation, and the currently selected pattern reliability display and It is determined which has higher reliability in the previous pattern reliability display.

  In the fourth pattern reliability display determination table 206D in (D), “second pattern display” and “third pattern display” are compared with the second pattern reliability display determination table 206A, as shown in the numerical setting of SR11. The numerical data of SR11 is set so that the ratio of selecting “1” increases and the ratio of “first pattern display” decreases. As a result, in the first variation when the variation pattern is “3 pseudo-reams”, the “first variation” is higher than the first variation of “no pseudo-reams” and “2 pseudo-reams”. “Two pattern display” and “Third pattern display” are selected.

  In the fifth pattern reliability display determination table 206E of (E), as shown in the numerical value setting of SR11, “first pattern display” and “second pattern display” are compared with the fourth pattern reliability display determination table 206D. The numerical data of SR11 is set so that the ratio of selecting “3rd pattern display” is increased and the ratio of selecting “third pattern display” is increased. As a result, the “third pattern display” is selected at a higher rate in the second variation in the variation pattern of “pseudo three times” than in the first variation.

  However, regarding the fifth pattern reliability display determination table 206E, in order to prevent the reliability that the big hit gaming state is performed after the notice effect is performed, compared to the previously selected pattern reliability display, For the second (this time) variation of the “pseudo-continuous 3 times”, the selection of the pattern reliability display whose reliability is lower than the pattern reliability display selected in the first (previous) variation of the “pseudo-continuous 3 times” Prohibition processing to prohibit is performed. For example, when “second pattern display” is selected based on the fourth pattern reliability display determination table 206D for the first (previous) change of “pseudo series 3 times”, “pseudo series 3 times” 2 In the first (current) variation, a prohibition process is performed so that “first pattern display” with low reliability is not selected. Specifically, as such prohibition processing, the pattern reliability prohibition processing having the above-described contents is performed on the fifth pattern reliability display determination table 206E. As a result, the fifth pattern reliability display determination table 206E does not have lower reliability in which the big hit gaming state is executed after the notice effect is executed, as compared to the previously selected pattern reliability display.

  In the sixth pattern reliability display determination table 206F of (F), as shown in the numerical value setting of SR11, compared to the fifth pattern reliability display determination table 206E, “first pattern display” and “second pattern display”. The numerical data of SR11 is set so that the ratio of selecting “3rd pattern display” is increased and the ratio of selecting “third pattern display” is increased. As a result, the “third pattern display” is selected at a higher rate in the third variation in the variation pattern of “pseudo three times” than in the first variation.

  However, with respect to the sixth pattern reliability display determination table 206F, in order to prevent the reliability that the big hit gaming state is performed after the notice effect is performed, as compared with the previously selected pattern reliability display, Selection of pattern reliability display with lower reliability than the pattern reliability display selected in the second (previous) fluctuation of “pseudo 3 times” for the 3rd time (current time) change of “3 times of pseudo time series” Prohibition processing to prohibit is performed. For example, when “second pattern display” is selected based on the fifth pattern reliability display determination table 206E for the second (previous) variation of “pseudo three times”, “pseudo three times” 3 In the first (current) variation, a prohibition process is performed so that “first pattern display” with low reliability is not selected. Specifically, as such prohibition processing, the pattern reliability prohibition processing having the above-described contents is performed on the sixth pattern reliability display determination table 206F. As a result, regarding the sixth pattern reliability display determination table 206F, the reliability of the big hit gaming state after the notice effect is executed does not decrease as compared with the previously selected pattern reliability display.

  Next, the contents of the seventh pattern reliability display determination table 206G to the twelfth pattern reliability display determination table 206L used when the variation display result is out of order will be described. FIG. 76 is an explanatory diagram of a configuration example of the seventh pattern reliability display determination table 206G to the twelfth pattern reliability display determination table 206L.

  In FIGS. 76A to 76F, the seventh pattern reliability display determination table 206G to the twelfth pattern reliability display determination table 206L are shown in FIGS. In each pattern reliability display determination table, the relationship between the extracted value of the random number SR11 and the selected notification reliability display content (notification reliability display in the figure) is shown. In each of the seventh pattern reliability display determination table 206G to the twelfth pattern reliability display determination table 206L, as in the case of the first pattern reliability display determination table 206A to the sixth pattern reliability display determination table 206F, random numbers are used. Based on the extracted value of SR11, any one of “first pattern display (solid painting)”, “second pattern display (striped pattern)”, and “third pattern display (spotted pattern)” is displayed. Selected. As a result, with respect to the step-up notice at the time of loss, the pattern according to the pattern display determined in any of the seventh pattern reliability display determination table 206G to the twelfth pattern reliability display determination table 206L, as shown in FIG. A reliable pattern display is performed. Specifically, the pattern reliability display is performed by displaying 91T, 92T, and 93T).

  In the seventh pattern reliability display determination table 206G in (A), as shown in the numerical setting of SR11, the selection ratio of the pattern display is “first pattern display”> “second pattern display”> “third pattern display”. The numerical data is set so that “ In the seventh pattern reliability display determination table 206G, compared to the first pattern reliability display determination table 206A at the time of the big hit, the ratio of selecting “first pattern display” is higher, and “second pattern display” is selected. And the numerical data of SR11 is set so that the ratio at which “third pattern display” is selected decreases.

  In the eighth pattern reliability display determination table 206H in (B), “second pattern display” and “third pattern display” are compared to the seventh pattern reliability display determination table 206G, as shown in the numerical setting of SR11. The numerical data of SR11 is set so that the ratio of selecting “1” increases and the ratio of “first pattern display” decreases. As a result, the second variation display and the third variation display are selected at a higher rate in the first variation when the variation pattern is “twice pseudo-continuous” than when “no pseudo-ream” is selected. Will be. Further, in the eighth pattern reliability display determination table 206H, the ratio of “first pattern display” to be selected is higher than that in the second pattern reliability display determination table 206B in the case of a big hit. The numerical data of SR11 is set so that the ratio of selecting “display” and “third pattern display” is low.

  In the ninth pattern reliability display determination table 206I in (C), as shown in the numerical value setting of SR11, the ratio of “first pattern display” is lower than that in the eighth pattern reliability display determination table 206H. Thus, the numerical data of SR11 is set so that the ratio of selecting “second pattern display” and “third pattern display” is increased. As a result, in the second variation when the variation pattern is “pseudo-continuous twice”, “second pattern display” and “third pattern display” are selected at a higher rate than in the first variation. The Rukoto. Further, in the ninth pattern reliability display determination table 206I, the ratio of “first pattern display” to be selected is higher than that in the third pattern reliability display determination table 206C in the case of a big hit. The numerical data of SR11 is set so that the ratio of selecting “display” and “third pattern display” is low.

  However, with respect to the ninth pattern reliability display determination table 206I, in order to prevent the reliability in which the big hit gaming state is obtained after the notice effect is executed, as compared with the pattern reliability display previously selected, Selection of pattern reliability display with lower reliability than the pattern reliability display selected in the first (previous) fluctuation of “2 times of pseudo-ream” for the second (current) simulation of “2 times of pseudo-ream” Prohibition processing to prohibit is performed. For example, when “second pattern display” is selected on the basis of the eighth pattern reliability display determination table 206H for the first (previous) change of “pseudo series twice”, “pseudo series twice” 2 In the first (current) variation, a prohibition process is performed so that “first pattern display” with low reliability is not selected. Specifically, as such prohibition processing, the pattern reliability prohibition processing having the above-described contents is performed on the ninth pattern reliability display determination table 206I. As a result, the ninth pattern reliability display determination table 206I does not have lower reliability in which the big hit gaming state is executed after the notice effect is executed as compared with the previously selected pattern reliability display.

  In the tenth pattern reliability display determination table 206J in (D), as shown in the numerical value setting of SR11, the ratio at which “first pattern display” is selected is lower than that in the eighth pattern reliability display determination table 206H. Thus, the numerical data of SR11 is set so that the ratio of selecting “second pattern display” and “third pattern display” is increased. As a result, in the first variation when the variation pattern is “3 pseudo-reams”, the second variation has a higher rate than the first variation of “no pseudo-reams” and “twice pseudo-reams”. The “pattern display” and the “third pattern display” are selected. Further, in the tenth pattern reliability display determination table 206J, the ratio of “first pattern display” to be selected is higher than that in the fourth pattern reliability display determination table 206D in the case of a big hit. The numerical data of SR11 is set so that the ratio of selecting “display” and “third pattern display” is low.

  In the eleventh pattern reliability display determination table 206K in (E), as shown in the numerical value setting of SR11, the ratio at which “first pattern display” is selected is lower than that in the tenth pattern reliability display determination table 206J. Thus, the numerical data of SR11 is set so that the ratio of selecting “second pattern display” and “third pattern display” is increased. As a result, in the second variation when the variation pattern is “pseudo-continuous three times”, “second pattern display” and “third pattern display” are selected at a higher rate than in the first variation. The Rukoto. In addition, in the eleventh pattern reliability display determination table 206K, the ratio of selecting the “first pattern display” is higher than in the fifth pattern reliability display determination table 206E in the case of a big hit. The numerical data of SR11 is set so that the ratio of selecting “display” and “third pattern display” is low.

  However, with respect to the eleventh pattern reliability display determination table 206K, in order to prevent the reliability of the big hit gaming state from being reduced after the notice effect is executed, as compared with the pattern reliability display previously selected, For the second (this time) variation of the “pseudo-continuous 3 times”, the selection of the pattern reliability display whose reliability is lower than the pattern reliability display selected in the first (previous) variation of the “pseudo-continuous 3 times” Prohibition processing to prohibit is performed. For example, when “second pattern display” is selected on the basis of the tenth pattern reliability display determination table 206J for the first (previous) change of “pseudo three times”, “pseudo three times” 2 In the first (current) variation, a prohibition process is performed so that “first pattern display” with low reliability is not selected. Specifically, as such prohibition processing, the pattern reliability prohibition processing having the above-described contents is performed on the eleventh pattern reliability display determination table 206K. As a result, the eleventh pattern reliability display determination table 206K does not decrease the reliability of the big hit gaming state after the notice effect is executed, as compared to the previously selected pattern reliability display.

  In the twelfth pattern reliability display determination table 206L in (F), as shown in the numerical value setting of SR11, compared to the eleventh pattern reliability display determination table 206K, “first pattern display” and “second pattern display”. The numerical data of SR11 is set so that the ratio at which “3” is selected decreases and the ratio at which “third pattern display” is selected increases. As a result, the second variation display and the third variation display are selected at a higher rate in the third variation when the variation pattern is “pseudo-continuous three times” than in the second variation. The Rukoto. In addition, in the twelfth pattern reliability display determination table 206L, the ratio of selecting “first pattern display” is higher than in the sixth pattern reliability display determination table 206F in the case of a big hit. The numerical data of SR11 is set so that the ratio of selecting “display” and “third pattern display” is low.

  However, with respect to the twelfth pattern reliability display determination table 206L, in order to prevent the reliability of the big hit gaming state from being reduced after the notice effect is executed, as compared with the previously selected pattern reliability display, Selection of pattern reliability display with lower reliability than the pattern reliability display selected in the second (previous) fluctuation of “pseudo 3 times” for the 3rd time (current time) change of “3 times of pseudo time series” Prohibition processing to prohibit is performed. For example, when “second pattern display” is selected based on the eleventh pattern reliability display determination table 206K for the second (previous) variation of “pseudo three times”, “pseudo three times” 2 In the first (current) variation, a prohibition process is performed so that “first pattern display” with low reliability is not selected. Specifically, as such prohibition processing, the pattern reliability prohibition processing having the above-described contents is performed on the twelfth pattern reliability display determination table 206L. As a result, in the twelfth pattern reliability display determination table 206L, the reliability of the big hit gaming state after the notice effect is executed does not decrease as compared with the previously selected pattern reliability display.

  As for the determination of the pattern reliability display described above, an example in which the display determination table is separately selected and determined in two cases, that is, when the variation display result is a big hit and when the variation display result is lost. Indicated. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the determination of the pattern reliability display includes three cases when the variation display result is a big hit, when the variation display result is out of reach, and when the variation display result is out of reach. In such a case, the display determination table may be separately selected and determined.

  Further, in each pattern reliability display determination table as described above, the upper limit value of the random number value used for the pattern reliability selection determination is different for the first variation, the second variation, and the third variation. You may set as follows. By doing so, it is possible to vary the selection distribution.

  FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing the effect control process (S705) in the main process shown in FIG. In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 101 performs one of S800 to S807 according to the value of the effect control process flag. In each process, the following process is executed.

  Fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process (S800): It is confirmed whether or not a variation pattern command is received from the game control microcomputer 560. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag set in the command analysis process is set. If the variation pattern command has been received, the value of the effect control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation start process (S801).

  Production symbol variation start processing (S801): Control is performed so that variation of the production symbol and the decoration symbol is started. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol changing process (S802).

  Production symbol variation processing (S802): Controls the switching timing of each variation state (variation speed) constituting the variation pattern and monitors the end of the variation time. Then, when the variation time ends, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation stop process (S803).

  Effect symbol variation stop processing (S803): Based on the reception of the effect control command (design determination designation command) for instructing all symbols to stop, the variation of the effect symbol (and the decorative symbol) is stopped and the display result (stop symbol) Control to derive and display. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process (S804) or the variation pattern command reception waiting process (S800).

  Big hit display process (S804): After the end of the variation time, the effect display device 9 is controlled to display a screen for notifying the occurrence of big hit or small hit. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the in-round processing (S805).

  In-round processing (S805): Display control during round is performed. In addition, in a gaming machine that executes a so-called probability variation promotion effect, a probability variation promotion effect is executed when a flag indicating that the probability variation promotion effect is being executed, which indicates execution of the probability variation promotion effect, is set. If the round end condition is satisfied, if the final round has not ended, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the post-round processing (S806). If the final round has ended, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit end process (S807).

  Post-round processing (S806): Display control between rounds is performed. If the round start condition is satisfied, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the in-round processing (S805).

  Big hit end effect processing (S807): In the effect display device 9, display control is performed to notify the player that the big hit game state has ended. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (S800).

  FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command reception waiting process (S800) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the variation pattern command reception waiting process, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag is set (S811). If the variation pattern command reception flag is set, the variation pattern command reception flag is reset (S812). Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation start process (S801) (S813).

  79 and 80 are flowcharts showing the effect symbol variation start process (S801) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the effect symbol variation start process, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not it is determined to be off (S501). Whether or not it is determined to be out of place is determined by, for example, whether or not a display result 1 designation command is stored in the display result specifying command storage area. Note that whether or not it is determined to be out of play may be confirmed based on a change pattern command that can specify whether or not to make a big hit. If it is determined to be off, it is confirmed whether or not a command corresponding to the non-reach variation pattern is received as the variation pattern command (S502). Whether or not a command corresponding to the non-reach variation pattern has been received is determined, for example, based on data stored in the variation pattern command storage area.

  When it is determined that the command corresponding to the non-reach variation pattern has been received, the effect control CPU 101 determines a stop symbol of the effect symbol that does not reach (S504). In the process of S504, the final stop symbol determination table 160A shown in FIG. 53A is selected as the use table. Next, the value of the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is extracted. Then, based on the value of the extracted random number SR1-1, the effect symbol that becomes the left final stop symbol FZ1-1 is determined by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 160A. Next, the final stop symbol determination table 160B shown in FIG. 53 (B) is selected as a use table. Subsequently, the value of the random number SR1-2 for determining the second final stop symbol is extracted. Then, based on the value of the extracted random number SR1-2, the effect symbol to be the right final stop symbol FZ1-2 is determined by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 160B. Further, based on the combination of the left final stop symbol FZ1-1 and the right final stop symbol FZ1-2, by referring to the left / right output determination table 161 shown in FIG. 54, the left / right output type DC1-1 is Determine which of the multiple types. Next, the final stop symbol determination table 160C shown in FIG. 53C is selected as the use table. Further, the value of the random number SR1-3 for determining the third final stop symbol is extracted. Then, based on the value of the extracted random number SR1-3 and the left and right outcome type DC1-1, the effect symbol that becomes the middle final stop symbol FZ1-3 is determined by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 160C.

  In the process of S504, by referring to the final stop symbol determination tables 160A to 160C and the left / right outcome determination table 161, by determining the effect symbols to be the left middle right final stop symbols FZ1-1 to FZ1-3, the effect symbol Don't make the stop symbol of a combination of reach or jackpot. Further, even if the combination is not a reach combination or a jackpot combination, the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 shown in FIG. 12 or a fixed non-reach combination as shown in FIG.

  If it is determined in the process of S502 that the pattern is not a non-reach variation pattern, the effect control CPU 101 determines a stop symbol of the effect symbols constituting the reach combination (S505). In the process of S505, the final stop symbol determination table 162A shown in FIG. 56A is selected as the use table. Further, the value of the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is extracted. Then, based on the value of the extracted random number SR1-1, the same effect design to be the left final stop symbol FZ2-1 and the right final stop symbol FZ2-2 is determined by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 162A. Next, the final stop symbol determination table 162B shown in FIG. 56 (B) is selected as the use table. Further, the value of the random number SR1-3 for determining the third final stop symbol is extracted. Then, referring to the final stop symbol determination table 162B based on the value of the extracted random number SR1-3, the effect symbols that become the left and right final stop symbols FZ2-1 and FZ2-2 and the middle final stop symbol FZ2-3 are obtained. The design difference from the production design is determined. The effect control CPU 101 determines an effect symbol to be the middle final stop symbol FZ2-3 according to the determined symbol difference.

  As described above, in the processing of S505, the effect control CPU 101 first uses the final stop symbol determination table 162A, and finally “left” other than the “medium” symbol display area 9C in which the effect symbol is stopped and displayed. The right and left final stop symbols FZ2-1 and FZ2-2 that are stopped and displayed in the “right” symbol display areas 9L and 9R are determined. Next, using the final stop symbol determination table 162B, the effect symbol which becomes the middle final stop symbol FZ2-3 in the “medium” symbol display area 9C where the effect symbol is stopped and displayed last, and the left and right final stop symbol FZ2-1. , The design difference with the effect design to be FZ2-2 is determined, and the effect design to be the middle final stop design FZ2-3 is determined according to the determined design difference.

  If it is not determined to be out of place (S501), referring to FIG. 80, the production control CPU 101 determines whether or not it has been determined to be a sudden or small hit (S507). Whether or not it is determined to be inaccurate or small hit is determined, for example, by whether or not a display result 4 designation command or a display result 5 designation command (see FIG. 30) is stored in the display result specifying command storage area. If it is determined that the accuracy or small hit is determined, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command is one of the variation patterns of special PG1-1 to special PG1-3 (S508). As shown in FIG. 14, the variation patterns of special PG 1-1 to special PG 1-3 are all variation patterns in which the variation display mode of the effect symbol is “non-reach”. If it is determined in the process of S508 that the variation pattern is any of the special PG1-1 to the special PG1-3, the process proceeds to S504, and the effect control CPU 101 becomes the final stop symbol in the process of S504. Determine the design.

  If it is determined in the processing of S508 that the variation pattern is other than the special PG1-1 to special PG1-3, the effect control CPU 101 proceeds to S505 in FIG.

  Referring to FIG. 80, when the accuracy and the small hit are not determined (S507), the final stop symbol of the effect symbol of the big hit combination is determined (S511). In the processing of S511, the effect control CPU 101 selects the final stop symbol determination table 163A shown in FIG. When it is determined to make a big hit, the final stop symbol determination table 163B shown in FIG. 57B is selected as the use table. Further, the value of the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is extracted. Then, based on the value of the extracted random number SR1-1, the combination of the left middle right final stop symbols FZ3-1, FZ3-2, and FZ3-3 that will be the big hit symbol is determined by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 163A. Determine as a stop symbol. In addition, when it is decided to make a probable big hit, a stop symbol that generally reminds of a non-probable big hit such as “2”, “4”, “6”, “8” as the left middle right definite effect symbols. May be derived and displayed (see FIG. 57A), but in the final stop symbol determination table 163A, determination values are not assigned to “2”, “4”, “6”, “8”. Then, when it is determined to be a probable big hit, “2”, “4”, “6”, “8” may not be selected. Also, when it is decided to win a probable big hit, when “2”, “4”, “6”, “8” can be selected as the final left / right determined effect symbols, etc. In addition, by executing a so-called probability change promotion effect, the left middle right determined effect symbol displayed on the effect display device 9 may be changed to “7” or the like. Note that in a gaming machine that does not notify the probability variation state, the probability variation promotion effect is not executed, and it is difficult for the player to grasp the game state (whether or not it is the probability variation state) by the confirmed effect symbol. May be.

  After executing any of the processes of S504, S505, and S511, or after becoming “N” in the process of S508, the effect control CPU 101 executes a notice setting process (S516a in FIG. 79), and then The specific effect setting process is executed (S516 in FIG. 79).

  FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing the advance notice setting process. In the notice setting process, the effect control CPU 101 first decides and sets a notice pattern type determination table 166 shown in FIG. 66 as a table to be used (S531). Then, numerical data indicating the random number SR7 for determining the notice pattern type is extracted (S532). Then, referring to the notice pattern type determination table, according to the variation pattern, any one of no notice effect, button notice, and step notice is selected based on the numerical data indicating the random value SR7 extracted in S532. Thus, the notice pattern type is determined and stored (S533). In the determination of S533, it is determined whether or not it is determined that there is no notice effect (S534).

  If it is determined in S533 that there is no notice effect (Y in S534), the notice setting process is terminated. On the other hand, when the notice pattern type is determined to be one of the button notice and the step-up notice in S533 (N in S534), as described with reference to FIG. 67, the decided notice pattern type is determined. 67 (A) to (F) shown in FIGS. 67A to 67F as a notice selection table according to the information on the display result and the information on the display result specified based on the variation pattern (big hit, reach out of reach, non-reach out of place). One of the tables is selected and set (S535).

  Next, referring to the received variation pattern command, it is determined whether the variation pattern to be executed corresponds to no pseudo-continuation, two pseudo-continuations, or three pseudo-continuations, and the notice selection table determined in S535 Is used to indicate the change pattern to be executed (no quasi-continuation, two quasi-continuations, three quasi-continuations), and the respective notices at the time of the first to third changes required for the change display in the change pattern. Select and set the data table used to determine the pattern (one table when there are no pseudo-series, two tables when there are two pseudo-series, and three tables when there are three pseudo-series) (set) S536). Specifically, in S536, when the button notice is selected, the notice message determination table is selected and determined as described above, and when the step-up notice is selected, the notice step determination table is selected and determined as described above. That is, when there is no quasi-continuation, only the first time, when the quasi-continuation is two times, the first and second times, and when the quasi-continuation is three times, the notice message decision table or notice step decision table used for the first to third fluctuations. Select and set. Then, the numerical data indicating the random number SR8 for determining the notice message or the numerical data indicating the random value SR9 for determining the notice step is extracted according to the type of the notice (S537).

  Next, based on the random number value extracted in S537, the notice pattern of the required fluctuation times among the first to third fluctuations is stored in one, two, or three data tables set in S536. Each data table is determined according to the order of fluctuation times and stored (S538). In S538, when the button notice is selected, the notice message of the required fluctuation times among the first to third fluctuations is selected as described above before the fluctuation display in the pseudo-series is started. When the step-up notice is selected, the notice step of the required fluctuation times among the first to third fluctuations is performed before the change display in the pseudo-series is started. In this way, selection and determination are made in order using the selected notice step determination table. In the determination of the notice pattern in S538, the prohibition process (the notice message prohibition process or the notice step prohibition process as described above) is performed so that the reliability that becomes a big hit is not selected in such a manner that the reliability decreases as the number of times of change proceeds. ) Is performed. More specifically, among the first to third fluctuations, the required fluctuation notice pattern is determined according to the order of the fluctuation times, but is determined each time the notice pattern of each fluctuation is decided. The previous notice pattern data indicating the notice pattern is stored in the RAM 55 as described above, and is used for prohibition processing when the notice pattern of the next variable time is determined. Thereby, in the determination of the notice pattern, the notice pattern is not selected in such a manner that the reliability that becomes a big hit decreases as the order of fluctuation times progresses.

  Next, as described with reference to FIG. 72, according to the information of the determined notice pattern type and the information of the display result specified based on the variation pattern (big hit, miss), the notice reliability selection table As shown in (A) to (D) of FIG. 72, any one of the notice reliability selection tables shown in FIG. Although not shown, when the notice effect is not performed as in the case where “no notice” is determined in the step-up notice, the notice reliability is not displayed and the processes of S539 to S542 described later are executed. The notice setting process ends. Even when the notice effect is not performed, the process of S539 to S542 may be executed to display the notice reliability.

  Next, referring to the received variation pattern command, it is determined whether the variation pattern to be executed corresponds to no pseudo-continuation, two pseudo-continuations, or three pseudo-continuations, and the notice reliability determined in S539 Using the selection table, depending on the variation pattern to be executed (no quasi-continuation, two quasi-continuations, three quasi-continuations), each of the first to third variations required for the variation display in the variation pattern Select and decide the data table used to determine the notice reliability display pattern (one table when there is no pseudo-series, two tables when there are two pseudo-series, and three tables when there are three pseudo-series) And set (S540). Specifically, in S540, when the button advance notice is selected, the color reliability display determination table is selected and determined as described above, and when the step-up advance notice is selected, the pattern reliability display determination table is selected and determined as described above. . That is, the color reliability display determination table or pattern reliability used for the first time in the case of no pseudo-continuation, the first and second times in the case of two pseudo-continuations, and the first to third variations in the case of three pseudo-continuations. Select and set the degree display decision table. Then, in accordance with the type of notice, numerical data indicating the random number value SR10 for determining the color reliability display or numerical data indicating the random value SR11 for determining the pattern reliability display is extracted (S541).

  Next, based on the random value extracted in S541, among the first to third fluctuations, one, two, or three notice reliability display patterns for the required fluctuation times are set in S540. Each data table of the data table is determined according to the order of fluctuation times and stored (S542). Then, the notice setting process ends. In S542, when the button notice is selected, the color reliability display pattern of the required variation times among the first to third variations is selected as described above before the variation display in the pseudo-series is started. The color reliability display determination table is used to select and determine in order, and when the step-up notice is selected, the pattern of the required fluctuation times among the first to third fluctuations is displayed before the fluctuation display in the pseudo-series is started. The reliability display pattern is selected and determined in order by the pattern reliability display determination table selected as described above. In the determination of the notice reliability display pattern in S542, the prohibition process as described above (color reliability prohibition process or color reliability prohibition process or Pattern reliability prohibition processing) is performed. More specifically, among the first to third fluctuations, the required fluctuation notice pattern is determined according to the order of the fluctuation times, but every time the notice reliability display pattern of each fluctuation is decided. The previous reliability display pattern data indicating the determined advance notice reliability display pattern is stored in the RAM 55 as described above, and is used for prohibition processing when determining the advance reliability display pattern for the next variable number of times. As a result, in the determination of the notice reliability display pattern, the notice reliability display pattern is not selected in such a manner that the reliability that becomes a big hit decreases as the order of fluctuation times progresses.

  In this embodiment, an example is shown in which the color reliability display is always performed when the button notification is made, and the pattern reliability display is always performed when the step-up notification is made. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the color reliability display may not be performed at a predetermined ratio when the button notification is performed. Further, the pattern reliability display may not be performed at a predetermined ratio when the step-up notice is given.

  According to the notice setting process of FIG. 81, as shown in S535 to S538, the notice pattern of each change time (the notice pattern of button notice or step-up notice) is put together before the start of a series of fluctuating display as a quasi series. By determining, the control burden (processing burden) of the effect control microcomputer 100 during the variable display can be reduced. In addition, according to the notice setting process of FIG. 81, as shown in S539 to S542, for each fluctuation time during the display of the fluctuating variable display, the notice reliability display pattern (color reliability display pattern of each fluctuation time). Alternatively, by determining (pattern reliability display pattern), it is possible to reduce the control burden (processing burden) of the production control microcomputer 100 before the start of the variable display.

  FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing the specific effect setting process. In the specific effect setting process, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command is a variation pattern that does not include the specific effect (“slip” or “pseudo-run”) (S551). . If the variation pattern does not include the specific effect, the specific effect setting process ends.

  If the variation pattern includes the specific effect, it is determined whether or not the specific effect is “slip” (S552). If it is the specific effect of “slip”, the effect control CPU 101 selects the specific effect pattern determination table corresponding to the specific effect as the use table (S553). If the specific effect of “slip” is selected, the specific effect pattern determination table 164A shown in FIG. 58 is selected.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 determines the specific effect pattern as one of a plurality of types (S554). That is, first, the value of the random number SR6-1 for determining the first specific effect pattern is extracted. Based on the value of the extracted random number SR6-1, the specific effect pattern is determined to be one of the slips TP1-1 to the slip TP1-4 by referring to the specific effect pattern determination table 164A selected in the process of S553. .

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 updates the previous effect value in the predetermined area of the RAM in accordance with the specific effect pattern determined in the process of S554 (S555). For example, when the specific effect pattern of the slip TP1-1 is determined in the process of S554, the previous effect value is updated to 1. When the specific effect pattern of the slip TP1-2 is determined, the previous effect value is updated to 2. When the specific effect pattern of the slip TP1-3 is determined, the previous effect value is updated to 3. When the specific effect pattern of the slip TP1-4 is determined, the previous effect value is updated to 4.

  By executing the process of S555, it is determined every time when it is determined as one of the specific effect patterns of the slip TP1-1 to the slip TP1-4 corresponding to the variation pattern for executing the specific effect of “slip”. The previous effect value corresponding to the specific effect pattern of the slip TP1-1 to the slip TP1-4 is updated. That is, each time the effect operation in the specific effect of “slip” is determined as one of a plurality of types, data indicating the type of the determined effect operation is stored.

  When the specific effect pattern determination table 164A is a table to which a determination value is assigned so that the slip TP1-n is not selected when the previous determination value is n (any of n = 1 to 4), When the control CPU 101 determines the slip effect mode using the specific effect pattern determination table 164A configured as described above, in the process of S554, the “slip” specific effect is determined according to the variation pattern of the non-reach PA1-4. Is executed, it is possible to prevent the specific effect pattern from being the same as the specific effect pattern in the specific effect of “slip” executed last time.

  If it is determined in the process of S552 that the specific effect is other than “slip” (that is, “pseudo-continuous”), the process of S555 indicates the type of the pseudo-continuous effect indicated by the received variation pattern command. Data is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM.

  Next, when the effect control CPU 101 is the “slip” specific effect, the temporary stop symbol is displayed according to the table selection rule shown in FIG. 59E based on the specific effect pattern determined in the process of S554. One of the determination tables 166A to 166D is selected as a use table. Further, the value of the random number SR3 for determining the temporary stop symbol at the time of sliding is extracted. The right temporary stop symbol KZ1-1, the left temporary stop symbol KZ1-2, and the right temporary stop symbol are referred to by referring to any of the selected temporary stop symbol determination tables 166A to 166D based on the extracted random number SR3. The effect design which becomes either 1-3 and the left temporary stop design KZ1-4 is determined.

  The effect control CPU 101 sets the number of executions of the pseudo continuous variation specified by the received variation pattern command to a constant M in the case of the specific effect of “pseudo continuous”. For example, when the number of re-variations (not including the initial variation) in the pseudo-series is one specific effect pattern, the constant M is set to “1” and the number of re-variations (including the initial variation) in the pseudo-series. If there is no specific effect pattern twice, the constant M is set to “2”. In addition, “0” is set to the variable N indicating the determined number of combinations of temporary stop symbols. If the fluctuation pattern is non-reach PA1-5, the temporary stop symbol determination table 167A shown in FIG. 60A is selected as the use table, and the fluctuation patterns are super PA3-3 and super PA3-6. , Super PA4-3, Super PA4-6, Super PB3-3, Super PB4-3, Super PB5-3, Special PG1-3, the temporary stop shown in FIG. 60 (B) The symbol determination table 167B is selected as a use table. Further, the value of the random number SR4-1 for determining the temporary stop symbol at the time of the first pseudo change is extracted. Then, based on the value of the extracted random number SR4-1, by referring to either the selected temporary stop symbol determination table 167A or the temporary stop symbol determination table 167B, any one of the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 The combination of left middle right temporary stop symbols KZ2-1, KZ2-2, and KZ2-3 is determined. Then, it is updated by adding 1 to the variable N, and it is determined whether or not the updated variable N matches the constant M.

  If the updated variable N matches the constant M, the process of S556 is terminated. If the updated variable N does not match the constant M, the effect control CPU 101 selects the temporary stop symbol determination table 167C shown in FIG. Further, the value of the random number SR4-2 for determining the temporary stop symbol at the time of the pseudo-second variation is extracted. Then, referring to the temporary stop symbol determination table 167C based on the value of the extracted random number SR4-2, the left middle right temporary stop symbols KZ3-1, KZ3- 2. Determine the combination of KZ3-3. Then, it is updated by adding 1 to the variable N, and it is determined whether or not the updated variable N matches the constant M. Then, the process ends.

  Referring to FIG. 79, after executing the specific effect setting process of S516, effect control CPU 101 determines any one of a plurality of types of effect control patterns (S517). The effect control CPU 101 determines the specified variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command, the specific effect pattern determined in the process of S516, the notice pattern determined in S538 of FIG. 62) According to the operation) pattern, any one of the effects corresponding to the determined and specified various effect operation patterns among the plurality of types of symbol fluctuation control patterns stored in the symbol fluctuation control pattern table 180 shown in FIG. A control pattern is selected and determined as a usage pattern.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 selects a process table corresponding to the effect control pattern selected in S517 (S518). Then, a process timer (effect setting process timer) in the process data 1 of the selected process table is started. (S519).

  FIG. 83 is an explanatory diagram of a configuration example of the process table. The process table is a table in which process data referred to when the effect control CPU 101 executes control of the effect device is set. That is, the effect control CPU 101 controls effect devices (effect components) such as the effect display device 9 according to the process data set in the process table. The process table includes process data as data obtained by collecting a plurality of combinations of process timer set values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data, sound number data, and movable member control data. The display control execution data includes, for example, data indicating each variation mode constituting the variation mode during the variation display time (variation time) of the variation display of the effect symbol (display of the effect display device 9 in addition to the effect symbol display mode) (Including other aspects of the screen) Specifically, data relating to the change of the display screen of the effect display device 9 is described. Further, the production time in the production mode is set in the process timer set value. The effect control CPU 101 refers to the process table, displays the effect design in the form set in the display control execution data for the time set in the process timer set value, and displays the character image or background displayed on the display screen. Control to display. In addition, the effect control CPU 101 controls the flashing of the light emitter in a manner set in the lamp control execution data and the sound number data, and controls the sound output from the speaker 27. Further, the production control CPU 101 controls the movable member 78 and the vibration motors 86a, 86b, 86c in a manner set in the movable member control data. In the movable member control data, in addition to the control state of the movable member 78, data indicating the control state of the vibration motors 86a, 86b, 86c is also set.

  In the process table, for example, different process data is set for each of the above-described effect operations of the effect pattern such as the pseudo-ream and the slip, and further, whether or not the above-mentioned notification is performed and the effect operation of the notification pattern Different process data is set depending on Therefore, for example, when executing the pseudo-variation pattern, when the notice effect is performed by the notice setting processing of FIG. 81, and the notice pattern is determined, the pseudo-variation pattern is determined according to the determination. Then, the process data that can execute the notice effect with the decided notice pattern is selected (the same applies to the variation patterns other than the pseudo-ream). Further, when a notice effect of button notice is performed, a change display effect is performed based on the process data for executing the variable display without performing the notice effect before the operation button 30 is operated. After the operation, the process data is switched, and the effect of the variable display is performed based on the process data for performing the button notice effect and executing the variable display.

  The process table shown in FIG. 83 is stored in the ROM of the effect control board 80. Moreover, the process table is prepared according to each production control pattern. The process table corresponds to more specifically the symbol variation control pattern table 180 shown in FIG. 62 and the various effect control pattern tables 182 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 84 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an effect executed according to the contents of the process table. The effect control CPU 101 executes display control according to effect control execution data in the process table. That is, when the time according to the timer value set as the process timer set value has elapsed, according to the next effect control execution data in the process table, the effect display device 9, the light emitter such as LED, the speaker 27, the movable member 78, By repeating the process of controlling the vibration motors 86a, 86b, and 86c, an effect in one change in the effect design is realized. In addition, dummy data (data not specifying control) is set in data (for example, movable member control data) corresponding to an effect part that is not controlled during the fluctuation period.

  Referring to FIG. 79, when the effect control CPU 101 executes the process of S519, the contents of process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1, movable member control data 1) are displayed. Therefore, the control of the effect device (the effect display device 9 as the effect part, various lamps as the effect part, the speaker 27 as the effect part, and the movable member 78 and the vibration motors 86a, 86b, 86c as the effect parts). Is started (S520). For example, in accordance with the display control execution data, an instruction is output to the VDP 109 in order to display an image (including an effect symbol) corresponding to the variation pattern on the effect display device 9. In addition, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp driver board 35 in order to perform on / off control of various lamps. In addition, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the sound output board 70 in order to output sound from the speaker 27. Further, a drive signal for operating the movable member 78 and the vibration motors 86a, 86b, 86c is output in accordance with the movable member control data.

  Then, a value corresponding to the variation time specified by the variation pattern command is set in the variation time timer (S521), and the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the effect symbol changing process (S802) (S522). ).

  FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol variation in-process (S802) in the effect control process. In the effect symbol variation processing, the effect control CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (S841), and subtracts 1 from the value of the variation time timer (S842). Then, it is determined whether or not the process timer has timed out (S843).

  Until the process timer times out (S843N), it is determined whether or not process data for performing a button notice effect is set as process data (S843a). Thereby, it is possible to confirm whether or not it is the time of the variable display that can perform the button notice. When it is determined that the process data for performing the button notice effect is not set, the process proceeds to S846 described later. On the other hand, when it is determined that the process data for performing the button notice effect is set, it is confirmed whether or not the current operation is in the valid period (S843b). The change display (including initial change and re-change) each time when the button notice effect is performed is executed in one process. Therefore, the operation valid period is set to a predetermined time from the start of each process when the button notice effect is performed. As a result, it is possible to confirm whether or not the current operation is in an effective period by determining whether or not the process timer has reached a predetermined time in each process. Whether or not the current operation is in the effective period is determined by determining whether or not the time value of the variable display time timer that starts counting from the start of the variable display has reached a predetermined time as the operation effective period. You may make it confirm.

  When it is determined that the operation is not valid, the process proceeds to S846 described later. On the other hand, when it is determined that the operation is valid, it is confirmed whether or not an operation completion flag that is set when the operation button 30 is operated during the operation validity period is set (S343c). If it is determined that the operated flag is set, the process proceeds to S846 described later. On the other hand, when it is determined that the operation completion flag is not set, it is determined whether or not the operation button 30 has been operated based on the level of the operation detection signal input from the operation button 30 (S843d).

  When it is determined that the operation button 30 has not been operated, the process proceeds to S846 described later. On the other hand, when it is determined that the operation button 30 is operated, the above-described operation completion flag is set (S843e), the execution of the button notice effect is started, and the process proceeds to S846 described later.

  When it is determined in S843 that the process timer has timed out (S843Y), it is confirmed whether or not the above-described operated flag is set (S843g). If it is determined that the operated flag is set, the operated flag is reset, and the process proceeds to S844. This is because the operation completion flag is initialized in accordance with the process switching. On the other hand, when it is determined that the operated flag is not set, the process proceeds to S844 as it is. In S844, process data is switched. That is, the process timer is started again by setting the process timer set value set next in the process table in the process timer (S844). Further, the control state for the effect device (effect part) is changed based on process data such as display control execution data, lamp control execution data, sound number data, and movable member control data set next (S845). .

  In the process data for performing the button notice effect, data for executing the button operation promotion effect as shown in FIG. 64 (C) and after the button operation promotion effect as shown in FIGS. 64 (D) and 64 (E) are executed. And data for performing the production. As data for performing an effect after execution of the button operation promotion effect, data for performing a button notice effect as shown in FIG. 64 (D) and no button notice effect as shown in FIG. 64 (E). Are set to be selectively usable. In other words, for the process data for performing the button notice effect, the data for the effect of changing the effect design while performing the button operation promotion effect and the color reliability display effect (with or without the button notice) Common data), data for changing the effect design while performing the button notice effect when the operation button 30 is operated during the operation effective period, and when the operation button 30 is not operated during the operation effective period. Includes data for changing the effect design without performing the button notice effect. The data for changing the effect design while performing the button notification effect and the data for changing the effect design without performing the button notification effect are data selectively used according to the operation of the operation button 30. is there.

  In S846, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the variable time timer has timed out based on the value of the variable time timer (S846). If the change time timer has timed out (Y in S846), the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol change stop process (S803) (S848). On the other hand, when the variable time timer has not timed out (N in S846), it is confirmed whether or not a confirmation command reception flag indicating that a symbol confirmation designation command has been received is set (S847). When the confirmation command reception flag is not set (N in S847), the effect symbol changing process ends. On the other hand, when the confirmation command reception flag is set (Y in S847), the process proceeds to S848. Even if the variation time timer has not timed out (N in S847), the process shifts to control for stopping variation upon receipt of the symbol determination designation command. For example, a long variation time due to noise between substrates is indicated. Even when a variation pattern command is received, the variation of the effect symbol can be terminated when the regular variation time has elapsed (when the variation of the special symbol has ended).

  It should be noted that the fluctuation pattern including the effect of “pseudo ream” (non-reach PA1-5, super PA3-3, super PA3-6, super PB3-3, super PA4-3, super PA4-6, super PA5-3, super The part of executing the processing of S841 to S845 based on PB4-3, super PB5-3, and special PG1-3) corresponds to the revariation effect control process for executing the revariation effect.

  FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol variation stop process (S803) in the effect control process. In the effect symbol variation stop process, the effect control CPU 101 first checks whether or not a stop symbol display flag indicating that the stop symbol of the effect symbol is being displayed is set (S870). If the stop symbol display flag is set, the process proceeds to S877. In this embodiment, when the big hit symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the effect symbol, the stop symbol display flag is set in S876. Then, the stop symbol display flag is reset when the fanfare effect is executed. Therefore, the fact that the stop symbol display flag is set is a stage where the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed but the fanfare effect is not yet executed, so the process of displaying the stop symbol of the effect symbol in S871 to S876 is executed. Without proceeding, the process proceeds to S877.

  When the stop symbol display flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 sets a confirmation command reception flag indicating that the effect control command (design confirmation designation command) for instructing to stop changing the effect symbol is received. It is confirmed whether or not (S871). If the confirmation command reception flag is set, control is performed to stop and display the determined stop symbol (outgoing symbol, small hit symbol or big hit symbol) (S872).

  In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 101 performs control to stop and display the effect symbol in response to receiving the symbol confirmation designation command from the game control microcomputer 560, but the variable time timer has timed out. Based on this, the effect design may be stopped and displayed.

  Next, it is confirmed whether or not a small hit symbol or a big hit display symbol is displayed in the process of S872 (S873). If it is determined in S872 that neither a small winning symbol nor a big winning display symbol is displayed (that is, if a loss symbol is displayed), the production control CPU 101 waits for a variation pattern command to be received. The value is updated according to the process (S800) (S874).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S872 that the small winning symbol or the big winning symbol has been stopped, the effect control CPU 101 sets a stop symbol display flag (S876), indicating that the big hit starting designation command has been received. The big hit start / receipt start command reception flag indicating that a big hit start designation command reception flag (big hit start 1 designation command reception flag or big hit start 2 designation command reception flag) or a small hit / surprise start designation command has been received is set. It is confirmed whether there is (S877). When the big hit start designation command reception flag or the small hit / surprise start designation command reception flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 resets the stop symbol display flag (S878), and displays a process table corresponding to the fanfare effect. Select (S879).

  The effect control CPU 101 resets the set flag when the big hit start designation command reception flag or the small hit / coincidence start designation command reception flag is set. In the process of S879, the effect control CPU 101 is determined to be a normal big hit or a probable big hit (specifically, when receiving a display result 2 designation command or a display result 3 designation command: FIG. 22). 63), when the process table corresponding to the “15-time open game start notification” shown in FIG. 63 is selected and the small hit or the sudden big hit is determined (specifically, the display result 4 designation command) Alternatively, when the display result 5 designation command is received (see FIG. 30), the process table corresponding to the “twice-open game start notification (common in common)” shown in FIG. 63 is selected. Then, the process timer is started by setting the process timer set value in the process timer (S880), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1, movable member control data) 1) In accordance with the effect device (the effect display device 9 as the effect part, various lamps as the effect part, the speaker 27 as the effect part, and the movable member 78 and the vibration motors 86a, 86b, 86c as the effect parts. ) Is executed (S881). Thereafter, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process (S804) (S882).

  Through the control described above, the production control microcomputer 100 temporarily displays the production symbol during the period from the start to the end of the production symbol variation executed based on the determined variation pattern. A re-variation effect is performed in which re-variation for varying display is performed once or a plurality of times. The re-variation effect is configured to include a re-change effect of the first re-change effect mode and a re-change effect of the second re-change effect mode different from the first re-change effect mode. Thereby, it is possible to make the player recognize that the pseudo-continuous effect is being executed by the first re-variation effect mode and the second re-change effect mode, and it is possible to simulate by the plurality of types of re-change effect modes. It is possible to improve the production effect by the rendition.

  Further, the game control microcomputer 560 selects the re-variation effect of the first re-variation effect mode, the re-change effect of the second re-change effect mode, or the re-change effect of the third re-change effect mode as the re-change effect. When the re-variation effect mode selection process is executed and the pre-determining means determines to control to the specific gaming state, the re-variation effect of the first re-variation effect mode and the re-change of the second re-variation effect mode are used as the re-variation effect. The re-change effect of the third re-change effect mode is selected at a higher rate than the change effect. Thereby, the production effect by a pseudo | simulation series can be improved with several types of re-variation production | presentation aspect. In addition, a pseudo-rendition effect linked to the reliability of the specific game state is executed, and the effect of the pseudo-ream effect can be further improved.

  In the above embodiment, a gaming machine provided with two special symbol indicators (first special symbol indicator 8a and second special symbol indicator 8b) as a variation display unit is taken as an example. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine provided with a symbol display.

  In the above-described embodiment, the production control board 80, the audio output board 70, and the lamp driver board 35 are provided as the boards on which the circuit for controlling the production apparatus is mounted. You may mount on one board | substrate. Further, a first effect control board (display control board) on which a circuit for controlling the effect display device 9 and the like is mounted and a circuit for controlling other effect devices (lamps, LEDs, speakers 27 and the like) are mounted. Two boards, such as two production control boards, may be provided.

  In the above-described embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 directly transmits a command to the effect control microcomputer 100. However, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits another command (for example, FIG. 3). The sound output lamp 70, the lamp driver board 35, or the like, or the sound / lamp board having the function of the circuit mounted on the sound output board 70 and the function of the circuit mounted on the lamp driver board 35). A control command may be transmitted and transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 on the effect control board 80 via another board. In that case, the command may simply pass through another board, or the sound output board 70, the lamp driver board 35, and the sound / lamp board are equipped with control means such as a microcomputer, and the control means receives the command. In response to this, control related to voice control and lamp control is executed, and the received command is changed as it is or, for example, to a simplified command to control the effect display device 9. You may make it transmit to 100. Even in that case, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs the display control in accordance with the effect control command received directly from the game control microcomputer 560 in the above-described embodiment. Display control can be performed in response to commands received from the board 35 or the sound / lamp board.

  FIG. 87 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the progress of the effect operation when the notice effect of button notice is executed. Each processing shown in FIG. 87 is a notice determined by executing the symbol variation control pattern determined based on the variation pattern command and the processing of S538 shown in FIG. 81 in the processing of S801 to S803 shown in FIG. Based on the effect control pattern, it may be realized by executing the process of S845 shown in FIG.

  In the process shown in FIG. 87, in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R on the effect display device 9, the variation display of all effect symbols of the left, middle, and right symbols is started. (ST11). Thereafter, various control data (display control data, sound control data, lamp control data, etc.) read from the notice control pattern data set as the notice pattern determined as described above corresponding to the production control process timer value. Based on the above, a button operation promotion effect as shown in FIG. 64C is performed (ST12).

  When the button operation promotion effect is started in ST12, it becomes the operation effective period, and the operation action on the operation button 30 by the player is effectively detected (ST13). The timing when the button operation promotion effect is started and the timing when the operation is valid may be the same timing or different timings. As an example, after the button operation promotion effect is started, after the effect display indicating the countdown operation such as “3” → “2” → “1” is performed, and the operation valid period is set, the button operation promotion effect is started. The timing may be different from the start timing of the operation effective period.

  Thereafter, for example, it is determined whether or not the operation valid period has ended based on the control data read from the symbol variation control pattern or the notice effect control pattern corresponding to the effect control process timer value, or the effect control process timer value itself. (ST14). For example, if the end of the operation valid period is indicated in the control data read from the symbol variation control pattern or the notice effect control pattern corresponding to the effect control process timer value, the detection of the operation on the operation button 30 is invalidated, and the operation What is necessary is just to end an effective period. Alternatively, the operation effective period may be ended when the effect control process timer value matches a predetermined operation effective period end determination value. If the operation valid period has not expired in ST14 (N in ST14), it is determined whether or not a button operation has been detected by checking an operation detection signal transmitted from the operation button 30 (ST15). If it is determined in ST15 that no button operation is detected (N in ST15), the process returns to ST14.

  When it is determined in ST15 that button operation has been detected (Y in ST15), the effect operation is switched to the button effect notification effect and the execution of the button notification effect as shown in FIG. 64D is started. (ST16a). Then, after the notice effect is completed, all symbol derivation display for deriving and displaying the effect symbols in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R is started (step ST17). Also, when it is determined in ST14 that the operation valid period has ended (Y in ST14), all symbols derivation display is started (step ST17). Then, for example, it is determined whether or not the set variation display time has elapsed based on the control data read from the symbol variation control pattern corresponding to the effect control process timer value or the effect control process timer value itself. (ST18). When it is determined that the variable display time set in ST18 has not elapsed (N in ST18), the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R are all produced. Is temporarily stopped (ST19), and the process returns to ST18. Thereby, the temporary stop display started in ST17 is continued until the variable display time elapses. On the other hand, when it is determined in ST18 that the variable display time has elapsed (Y in ST18), the effect symbols are completely stopped in all of the effect symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R of “left”, “middle”, and “right”. Display (ST20), and the variation display of the effect symbol is terminated.

FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing an example of the progress of the effect operation when the notice effect of the step-up notice is executed. Each process shown in FIG. 88 is the advance notice determined by executing the symbol fluctuation control pattern determined based on the fluctuation pattern command and the process of S538 shown in FIG. 81 in the processes of S801 to S803 shown in FIG. Based on the production control pattern,
What is necessary is just to implement | achieve by performing the process of S845 shown in FIG.

  In the process shown in FIG. 88, the left, middle, and right symbols are displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R in the effect display device 9, as in the process shown in FIG. Variation display of all effect symbols is started (ST11). Thereafter, various control data (display control data, sound control data, lamp control data, etc.) read from the notice control pattern data set as the notice pattern determined as described above corresponding to the production control process timer value. Based on the above, the execution of the effect operation of the notice effect of the step-up notice shown in FIG. Then, after the notice effect is completed, all symbol derivation display for deriving and displaying the effect symbols in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R is started (step ST17).

  Then, for example, it is determined whether or not the set variation display time has elapsed based on the control data read from the symbol variation control pattern corresponding to the effect control process timer value or the effect control process timer value itself. (ST18). When it is determined that the variable display time set in ST18 has not elapsed (N in ST18), the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R are all produced. Is temporarily stopped (ST19), and the process returns to ST18. Thereby, the temporary stop display started in ST17 is continued until the variable display time elapses. On the other hand, when it is determined in ST18 that the variable display time has elapsed (Y in ST18), the effect symbols are completely stopped in all of the effect symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R of “left”, “middle”, and “right”. Display (ST20), and the variation display of the effect symbol is terminated.

[Second Embodiment]
Next, a second embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, an example of determining an aspect of a notice pattern (notice message, notice step) at the time of each change of a pseudo-series at the start of a change display for a notice effect such as a button notice and a step-up notice is shown. It was. In the second embodiment, the mode of the notice pattern (notice message and notice step) and the form of the notice reliability display pattern (color reliability display and pattern reliability display) are selected and determined at each change of the pseudo-series. An example will be described.

  In the second embodiment, portions different from the first embodiment will be mainly described. In the second embodiment, the mode of the notice pattern (notice message, notice step) is selected and determined at each change of the pseudo-series. Therefore, the advance notice setting process is performed in S516a in the effect symbol variation start process shown in FIG. 79 of the first embodiment and in the effect symbol variation process in S802. That is, in the notice setting process, the aspect of the notice pattern in the first variation of the notice effect is selected and determined in the effect symbol variation start process, and the form of the notice pattern in the second and subsequent variations is selected in the effect symbol variation process. It is determined. For the notice pattern selected and determined in such a notice setting process, the type of notice effect is determined when the notice setting process is first performed. When the type of the notice effect is determined, if the data specifying the type is stored until the change display in the change pattern in which the notice effect is performed is completed, the data after the type of the notice effect is determined. Based on the data specifying the type and the data specifying the fluctuation pattern, the same type of notice effect is produced using the same notice pattern determination table at each re-variation during the fluctuation display by the fluctuation pattern. A notice pattern can be determined.

  FIG. 89 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol changing process (S802) in the effect control process according to the second embodiment. 89 is different from FIG. 85 in that the notice setting process is performed between S844 and S845 through S845a. Referring to FIG. 89, after the process timer is started in S844, a notice setting process is performed (S845a), and a process of changing the control state of the effect device (effect component) is performed based on the process data ( S845).

  FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing a notice setting process according to the second embodiment. As described above, the notice setting process in the second embodiment is performed in S516a in FIG. 90 of the effect symbol variation start process shown in FIG. This is performed in step S845a. In the advance notice setting process, the effect control CPU 101 first determines whether or not the advance notice pattern type has been determined in the change display with the current change pattern (S530). Specifically, in S530, it is determined whether or not the process of determining the notice pattern type in S533 described later has been completed for the current variation pattern. More specifically, in S533, as described above, the notice pattern type is determined and stored by selecting one of no notice effect, button notice, and step notice. The stored data is stored in a predetermined notice pattern type storage area of the RAM every time the variable display according to the variable pattern is performed, and is cleared when a series of variable display by the variable pattern is completed. Therefore, in S530, it is determined whether or not the notice pattern type has been determined based on determining whether or not data specifying the notice pattern type is stored in the notice pattern type storage area.

  Next, the notice pattern type is determined by executing the same processing as S531 to S533 in FIG. Then, processing similar to S534 and S535 in FIG. 81 is performed. As a result, when the notice pattern type is determined to be either the button notice or the step-up notice, any of the notice selection tables shown in FIGS. 67A to 67F is used as the notice selection table. Will be set.

  Then, referring to the received variation pattern command, it is determined whether the variation pattern to be executed corresponds to no quasi-continuation, two quasi-continuations, or three quasi-continuations, and based on the contents of the process data The number of times of change is determined, and a data table used for determining the corresponding notice pattern at the time of change is selected and set (S536a). In this case, the determination of how many times the current variation is in the variation pattern being executed is made by determining the number of variations based on the contents of the process data used at the time of the determination. In other words, the process data includes data indicating how many times the change is executed. In the notice setting process, the process data is based on the data indicating how many times the change is executed. It is judged whether it is fluctuation. More specifically, among the tables shown in the notice selection table determined in S535, it corresponds to the variation pattern to be executed (no pseudo-continuous, two pseudo-continuous, three pseudo-continuous) and the current number of changes. Select and set only the notice message decision table or notice step decision table to be set. As a result, the notice message determination table or the notice step determination table to be selected differs depending on how many times the current change is set according to the change pattern.

  Next, the numerical data indicating the random number value SR8 for determining the notice message or the numerical data indicating the random value SR9 for determining the notice step is extracted according to the type of the notice (S537). Then, using the data table set in S536a, based on the random value extracted in S537, the notice pattern in the current variation is selected and determined (S538a). In the determination of the notice pattern in S538a, the prohibition process (precaution message prohibition process or notice step prohibition as described above) is not selected so that the reliability that is a big hit is not selected in such a manner that the reliability decreases as the number of times of change proceeds. Processing). More specifically, among the first to third notice patterns of fluctuation times, the present fluctuation times are determined for the current fluctuation times, but each time the notice pattern is decided for each fluctuation time, it is decided. The previous notice pattern data indicating the previous notice pattern is updated and stored in the previous notice message storage area of the RAM 55, and for the prohibition process (the notice message prohibition process or the notice step prohibition process) when determining the notice pattern of the next variable times. Use. Thereby, in the determination of the notice pattern for each variable time, the notice pattern is not selected in such a manner that the reliability that becomes a big hit decreases as the order of the variable times progresses. Next, in order to use such prohibition processing (preliminary message prohibition processing or preliminary announcement step prohibition processing), the data of the previous notice pattern (previous notice message or previous notice step) determined in S538a is stored in the previous notice message storage area of the RAM. (S538b).

  Then, the same processing as S539 in FIG. 81 is performed, and any of the notice reliability selection tables shown in FIGS. 72A to 72D is selected and set as the notice reliability selection table.

  Then, referring to the received variation pattern command, it is determined whether the variation pattern to be executed corresponds to no quasi-continuation, two quasi-continuations, or three quasi-continuations, and based on the contents of the process data The number of times of change is determined, and the data table used for determining the notice reliability display pattern at the time of the corresponding change is selected and set (S540a). In this case, the determination of how many times the current variation is in the variation pattern being executed is performed by the same determination as in the above-described case of S536a. More specifically, in S540a, among the tables shown in the notice selection table determined in S539, the change pattern to be executed (no pseudo-continuation, two pseudo-continuations, three pseudo-continuations) and the current number of changes Only the corresponding color reliability display determination table or pattern reliability display determination table is selected and determined and set. As a result, the selected color reliability display determination table or pattern reliability display determination table differs depending on how many times the current variation is set according to the variation pattern.

  Next, the numerical data indicating the random number value SR10 for determining the color reliability display or the numerical data indicating the random value SR11 for determining the pattern reliability display is extracted according to the type of notice (S541). Then, using the data table set in S540a, based on the random value extracted in S541, the notice reliability display pattern in the current variation is selected and determined (S542a). In the determination of the notice reliability display pattern in S542a, the prohibition process (color reliability prohibition process as described above) is performed so that the reliability that becomes a big hit is not selected in such a manner that the reliability decreases as the order of the fluctuation times progresses. Or pattern reliability prohibition processing) is performed. More specifically, among the first to third noticed reliability display patterns of the fluctuation times, each time the fluctuation times progresses, the notice reliability display pattern of the current fluctuation is determined for the fluctuation times at that time. Each time the notice reliability display pattern is determined at each variable time, the previous reliability display pattern data indicating the determined notice reliability display pattern is updated and stored in the previous pattern reliability display storage area of the RAM 55, and the next It is used for prohibition processing (color reliability prohibition processing or pattern reliability prohibition processing) when determining the notice reliability display pattern of variable times. Thereby, in the determination of the notice reliability display pattern for each variable time, the notice reliability display pattern is not selected in such a manner that the reliability that becomes a big hit decreases as the order of the variable times progresses. Next, for use in such prohibition processing (color reliability prohibition processing or pattern reliability prohibition processing), the notice reliability display pattern (previous color reliability display or previous pattern reliability display) determined in S542a is used. The data is updated and stored in the previous pattern reliability display storage area of the RAM (S542b).

  As a result of the processing as described above, in the second embodiment, at the time of each variation of the pseudo-ream, a notice pattern (a notice message, a notice step) depending on how many times the current change is the change. And a notice reliability display pattern (color reliability display, pattern reliability display) can be selected and determined. Further, according to the notice setting process of FIG. 90, as shown in S535 to S538b, for each fluctuating time during the display of the fluctuating variable display, a notice pattern of each fluctuating time (button notice or step-up notice notice). By determining (pattern), it is possible to reduce the control burden (processing burden) of the production control microcomputer 100 before the start of the variable display. In addition, according to the notice setting process of FIG. 90, as shown in S539 to S542b, the notice reliability display pattern (color reliability display pattern of each variable time) is displayed for each variable time during the display of the variable display as a pseudo-continuous. Alternatively, by determining (pattern reliability display pattern), it is possible to reduce the control burden (processing burden) of the production control microcomputer 100 before the start of the variable display.

  In the second embodiment described above, in the case of performing the notice effect, the notice pattern for the same type of notice effect is determined using the same notice pattern determination table at each re-variation during the variation display by the variation pattern. An example was explained. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the data for specifying the type of the notice effect as described above is not stored, and different types are used by using different notice pattern determination tables at the time of each re-variation during the variation display by the variation pattern. The notice pattern for the notice effect may be determined.

[Third Embodiment]
Next, a third embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment and the second embodiment, for the notice effects such as the button notice and the step-up notice, the form of the notice pattern (notice message, notice step) at the time of each change of the pseudo-series is changed for each change time. An example of determination using a plurality of data tables for determining a notice pattern provided is shown. In the third embodiment, an example will be described in which the mode of the notice pattern (notice message, notice step) is collectively determined by one data table for each fluctuating time at each fluctuation of the pseudo-series. In the third embodiment, an example will be described in which three messages “...”, “CHANCE”, and “FEVER” are used as the notice message in order to clarify the explanation regarding the button notice. As in the first embodiment, the above-described five notice messages may be used as the notice message.

  In the third embodiment, parts different from the first and second embodiments will be mainly described. A notice selection table shown in FIG. 91 is used instead of the notice selection table shown in FIG.

FIG. 91 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of a notice selection table according to the third embodiment.
91A shows a big hit button notice selection table. In FIG. 91, (B) shows a reach failure button notice selection table. In FIG. 91, (C) shows a step-up notice selection table for a big hit. In FIG. 91, (D) shows a step-up notice selection table for a big hit. In FIG. 91, (E) shows a step-up notice selection table at the time of a loss of reach. In FIG. 91, (F) shows a step-up notice selection table at the time of non-reach. These notice selection tables are used in place of the notice selection tables shown in FIGS. 67 (A) to 67 (F).

  The jackpot button notice selection table shown in (A) shows a specific notice pattern when a button notice is determined as the notice pattern type when a big hit fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation display result is “big hit” is designated. It is a data table for selecting a notice message batch decision table as a notice pattern decision table used for the determination. In the big hit button notice selection table, the data is selected so that different notice message batch determination tables are selected according to the total number of change displays (including re-change) performed in the change pattern designated by the effect control command. Is set.

  Specifically, in the big hit button notice selection table shown in (A), the notice message batch determination table is selected as follows. For example, when the variation pattern “no pseudo-ream” is designated, the first notice message batch determination table 203A shown in FIG. 92 is selected. In addition, when a variation pattern of “pseudo-continuous 2 times” is designated among the variation patterns that become pseudo-reams, FIG. 92 shows in order to collectively determine the respective notice patterns for the first and second variations. The second notice message batch determination table 203B is selected. In addition, when a variation pattern of “pseudo-continuous three times” is designated among the variation patterns that become pseudo-continuous, FIG. 92 shows in order to collectively determine the respective notice patterns for the first to third variations. The third notice message batch determination table 203C is selected.

  The reach-out button notice selection table shown in (B) is specific when a button notice is determined as the notice pattern type when a reach-out variation pattern with a fluctuation display result of “reach out” is specified. It is a data table for selecting a notice message batch decision table used for determining a particular notice pattern. In the reach failure button notice selection table, data is selected so that different notice message batch determination tables are selected according to the total number of change displays (including re-change) performed in the change pattern specified by the effect control command. Is set.

  Specifically, in the out-of-reach button notice selection table shown in (B), the notice message batch determination table is selected as follows. For example, when a variation pattern of “no quasi-continuous” is designated, the fourth notice message batch determination table 203D shown in FIG. 93 is selected. In addition, when a variation pattern of “pseudo-continuous 2 times” is designated among the variation patterns that become pseudo-continuous, FIG. 93 shows in order to collectively determine the respective notice patterns at the time of the first and second variations. The fifth notice message batch determination table 203E is selected. In addition, when a variation pattern of “pseudo-continuous three times” is designated among the variation patterns that become pseudo-continuous, FIG. 93 shows in order to collectively determine the respective notice patterns for the first to third variations. The sixth notice message batch determination table 203F is selected.

  The non-reach miss button notice selection table shown in (C) shows the case where a button notice is determined as the notice pattern type when a non-reach break change pattern in which the fluctuation display result is “non-reach miss” is designated. This is a data table for selecting a notice message batch decision table used for determining a specific notice pattern. In the non-reach off button notice selection table, different notice message batch determination tables are selected according to the total number of change displays (including re-change) performed in the change pattern specified by the effect control command. Data is set.

  In the non-reach off button notice selection table shown in (C), specifically, the notice message batch determination table is selected as follows. For example, when a variation pattern of “no quasi-continuous” is designated, the seventh notice message determination table 203G shown in FIG. 93 is selected. In addition, when a variation pattern of “pseudo-continuous twice” is designated, an eighth advance notice message batch determination table 203H shown in FIG. 93 is used to collectively determine the advance notice patterns for the first and second changes. Is selected.

  The jackpot step-up notice selection table shown in (D) is specific when a step-up notice is determined as the notice pattern type when a big hit fluctuation pattern having a fluctuation display result of “big hit” is designated. It is a data table for selecting a notice step batch decision table as a notice pattern determination table used for decision of a notice pattern. In the big hit step-up notice selection table, data is selected so that different notice step batch decision tables are selected according to the total number of change displays (including re-change) performed in the change pattern specified by the effect control command. Is set.

  Specifically, in the jackpot step-up notice selection table shown in (D), the notice step batch decision table is selected as follows. For example, when a variation pattern of “no quasi-continuous” is designated, the first notice step batch determination table 204A shown in FIG. 94 is selected. In addition, when a variation pattern of “pseudo-continuous 2 times” is designated among the variation patterns to be pseudo-continuous, FIG. 94 shows in order to collectively determine the respective notice patterns at the time of the first and second variations. Second notice step batch determination table 204B is selected. In addition, when a variation pattern of “pseudo-continuous 3 times” is designated among the variation patterns that are pseudo-continuous, in order to collectively determine the respective notice patterns at the time of the first to third variations, FIG. 94 shows. The third notice step batch determination table 204C is selected.

  The reach-up step-up notice selection table shown in (E) indicates that a step-up notice is determined as a notice pattern type when a reach-out change pattern is designated in which the fluctuation display result is “reach out”. It is a data table for selecting a notice step batch decision table used for determining a specific notice pattern. In the reach failure button notice selection table, data is selected so that different notice step batch decision tables are selected according to the total number of change displays (including re-change) performed in the change pattern specified by the effect control command. Is set.

  More specifically, in the step-up notice selection table at the time of a missed reach shown in (E), the notice step batch determination table is selected as follows. For example, when a variation pattern of “no quasi-continuous” is designated, the fourth notice step batch determination table 204D shown in FIG. 95 is selected. In addition, when a variation pattern of “pseudo-continuous 2 times” is designated among the variation patterns that are pseudo-continuous, in order to collectively determine the respective notice patterns at the time of the first and second variations, FIG. 95 shows. The fifth notice step batch decision table 204E is selected. In addition, when a variation pattern of “pseudo-continuous 3 times” is designated among the variation patterns that become pseudo-continuous, FIG. 95 shows in order to collectively determine the respective notice patterns for the first to third variations. The eighth notice step batch determination table 204F is selected.

  In the non-reach miss step-up notice selection table shown in (F), the step-up notice is determined as the notice pattern type when the non-reach miss fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation display result is “non-reach miss” is designated. This is a data table for selecting a notice step batch decision table used for determining a specific notice pattern. In the non-reach off step-up notice selection table, different notice step batch determination tables are selected according to the total number of change displays (including re-change) performed in the change pattern designated by the effect control command. Data is set in.

  Specifically, in the non-reach step-up notice selection table shown in (F), the notice step batch determination table is selected as follows. For example, when the variation pattern “no pseudo-ream” is designated, the seventh notice message determination table 204G shown in FIG. 95 is selected. In addition, when a variation pattern of “pseudo-continuous twice” is designated, an eighth advance notice message batch determination table 204H shown in FIG. 95 is used to collectively determine the advance notice patterns for the first and second changes. Is selected.

  Next, the contents of the first notice message batch determination table 203A to the third notice message batch determination table 203C used when the variable display result is a big hit will be described. FIG. 92 is an explanatory diagram of a configuration example of the first notice message batch determination table 203A to the third notice message batch determination table 203C. In the case of the third embodiment, any one of “...”, “CHANCE”, and “FEVER” is selected and used as the notice message.

  In FIG. 92, (A) to (C) show first notice message batch determination table 203A to third notice message batch determination table 203C. In each notice message batch determination table, the relationship between the extracted value of the random number SR8, the display contents of the notice message to be selected (the notice message in the figure), and the setting pattern number (the notice pattern setting number) is shown. Yes.

  In the first notice message batch determination table 203A in (A), one of the notice patterns assigned with the set pattern numbers 1-1 to 1-3 is selected and determined based on the extracted value of the random number SR8. The first notice message batch determination table 203A is set so that one of “...”, “CHANCE”, and “FEVER” is selected as the first notice message. Therefore, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of “no quasi-continuous”, any one of “...”, “CHANCE”, and “FEVER” is selected and displayed as the notice message. In the first notice message batch determination table 203A, numerical data is set so that the ratio of the notice message selection is “... >>“ CHANCE ”>“ FEVER ”.

  In the second notice message batch determination table 203B in (B), any of the notice patterns assigned with the set pattern numbers 2-1 to 2-5 is selected and determined based on the extracted value of the random number SR8. In the second notice message batch determination table 203B, a setting is made so that any one of the notice messages “...” And “CHANCE” is selected based on the extracted value of the random number SR8 in the first fluctuation. Has been. In addition, for the second fluctuation, a setting is made so that one of the notice messages “...”, “CHANCE”, and “FEVER” is selected based on the extracted value of the random number SR8. . In the first fluctuation, “...” Is set to have a higher selected ratio than “CHANCE” and “FEVER”. In the second variation, “CHANCE” and “FEVER” are set to have a higher selection ratio than “...”. Therefore, in the case of the “pseudo-continuous twice” variation pattern, “...” Is easily selected in the first variation, and “CHANCE” or “FEVER” is easily selected in the second variation.

  In the third notice message batch determination table 203C in (C), one of the notice patterns assigned with the set pattern numbers 3-1 to 3-7 is selected and determined based on the extracted value of the random number SR8. In the third notice message batch determination table 203C, one of the notice messages “...” And “CHANCE” is selected based on the extracted value of the random number SR8 in each of the first and second fluctuations. It is set to do so. The third change is set so that any of the notice messages “...”, “CHANCE”, and “FEVER” is selected based on the extracted value of the random number SR8. . In the first fluctuation, “...” Is set to have a higher selected ratio than “CHANCE” and “FEVER”. In the second variation, the ratio of selecting “CHANCE” is set higher than that in the first variation. In the third variation, “CHANCE” and “FEVER” are set to have a higher selection ratio than “...”. Therefore, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of “pseudo-continuous 3 times”, “... In the third variation, “CHANCE” or “FEVER” is easily selected.

  Next, the contents of the fourth notice message batch determination table 203D to the eighth notice message batch determination table 203H used when the fluctuation display result is out of order will be described. FIG. 93 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of the fourth notice message collective decision table 203D to the eighth notice message collective decision table 203H.

  93, (A) to (E) show fourth notice message batch determination table 203D to eighth notice message batch determination table 203H. In each notice message batch determination table, the relationship between the extracted value of the random number SR8, the display contents of the notice message to be selected (the notice message in the figure), and the setting pattern number (the notice pattern setting number) is shown. Yes.

  In the fourth notice message batch determination table 203D in (A), any one of the notice patterns assigned with the set pattern numbers 4-1 to 4-2 is selected and determined based on the extracted value of the random number SR8. The fourth notice message batch determination table 203D is set so that either “...” Or “CHANCE” is selected as the first notice message. Therefore, in the case of the fluctuation pattern “no quasi-continuous”, either “...” Or “CHANCE” is selected and displayed as the notice message. In the fourth notice message batch determination table 203D, numerical data is set so that the ratio of selecting the notice message is “... >>“ CHANCE ”. As shown in (A), the fourth notice message batch determination table 203D has a higher ratio of selecting “...” Than the first notice message batch determination table 203A when the jackpot is reached. SR8 numerical data is set.

  In the fifth notice message batch determination table 203E in (B), any one of the notice patterns to which the set pattern numbers 5-1 to 5-3 are assigned is selected and determined based on the extracted value of the random number SR8. In the fifth notice message batch determination table 203E, the notice message of “...” Or “CHANCE” is selected based on the extracted value of the random number SR8 in each of the first and second fluctuations. It is set to do so. In the first fluctuation, “...” Is set to have a higher selected ratio than “CHANCE”. In the second variation, the ratio of selecting “CHANCE” is set higher than that in the first variation. Therefore, when the variation pattern is “pseudo-continuous twice”, “...” Is easily selected in the first variation, and “CHANCE” is easily selected. As shown in (B), in the fifth notice message batch determination table 203E, the ratio at which “...” Is selected is higher than that in the second notice message batch determination table 203B in the case of a big hit. SR8 numerical data is set.

  In the sixth notice message batch determination table 203F in (C), one of the notice patterns assigned with the set pattern numbers 6-1 to 6-4 is selected and determined based on the extracted value of the random number SR8. In the sixth notice message batch determination table 203F, any one of the notice messages “...” And “CHANCE” is selected based on the extracted value of the random number SR8 in each of the first to third fluctuations. It is set to do so. In the first fluctuation, “...” Is set to have a higher selected ratio than “CHANCE”. In the second variation, the ratio of selecting “CHANCE” is set higher than that in the first variation. In the third variation, “CHANCE” is set to have a higher selection ratio than “...”. Therefore, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of “pseudo-continuous 3 times”, “... “CHANCE” is easily selected in the third variation. As shown in (C), in the sixth notice message batch determination table 203F, the ratio at which “...” Is selected is higher than that in the third notice message batch determination table 203C at the time of a big hit. SR8 numerical data is set.

  In the seventh notice message batch determination table 203G in (D), any one of the notice patterns to which the set pattern numbers 7-1 to 7-2 are assigned is selected and determined based on the extracted value of the random number SR8. The seventh notice message batch determination table 203G is set to select either “...” Or “CHANCE” as the first notice message. Therefore, in the case of the fluctuation pattern “no quasi-continuous”, either “...” Or “CHANCE” is selected and displayed as the notice message. In the seventh notice message batch determination table 203G, numerical data is set so that the ratio of the notice message selection is “... >>“ CHANCE ”. As shown in (D), in the seventh notice message batch determination table 203G, the ratio at which “...” Is selected is higher than in the fourth notice message batch determination table 203D when the reach is lost. The numerical data of SR8 is set in

  In the eighth notice message batch determination table 203H of (E), one of the notice patterns to which the set pattern numbers 8-1 to 8-3 are assigned is selected and determined based on the extracted value of the random number SR8. In the eighth notice message batch determination table 203H, one of the notice messages “...” And “CHANCE” is selected based on the extracted value of the random number SR8 in each of the first and second fluctuations. It is set to do so. In the first fluctuation, “...” Is set to have a higher selected ratio than “CHANCE”. In the second variation, the ratio of selecting “CHANCE” is set higher than that in the first variation. Therefore, when the variation pattern is “pseudo-continuous twice”, “...” Is easily selected in the first variation, and “CHANCE” is easily selected in the first variation. As shown in (E), the eighth notice message batch determination table 203H has a higher ratio of selecting “...” Than the fifth notice message batch determination table 203E when the reach is lost. The numerical data of SR8 is set in

  Next, the contents of the first notice step collective decision table 204A to the third notice step collective decision table 204C used when the variable display result is a big hit will be described. FIG. 94 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of the first notice step collective decision table 204A to the third notice step collective decision table 204C.

  In FIG. 94, (A) to (C) show first notice step collective decision table 204A to third notice step collective decision table 204C. Each notice step batch determination table shows the relationship between the extracted value of the random number SR9, the display contents of the selected notice step (the notice step in the figure), and the setting pattern number (the notice pattern setting number). Yes.

  In the first notice step batch decision table 204A in (A), any of the notice patterns assigned with the set pattern numbers 9-1, 9-2, 9-3 is selected and decided based on the extracted value of the random number SR9. The In the first notice step collective decision table 204A, as the first notice step, one of the notice steps “none (do not display the notice step)”, “step 1”, and “step 2” is selected. Is set to Therefore, in the case of the fluctuation pattern “no quasi-continuous”, any one of “none”, “step 1”, and “step 2” is selected and displayed as the notice step. In the first notice step batch determination table 204A, numerical data is set so that the ratio of selecting the notice step is “none”> “step 1”> “step 2”.

  In the second notice step batch decision table 204B of (B), any of the notice patterns assigned with the set pattern numbers 10-1 to 10-6 is selected and decided based on the extracted value of the random number SR9. In the second notice step batch determination table 204B, for the first change, one of the notice steps “none”, “step 1”, and “step 2” is selected based on the extracted value of the random number SR9. It is set to do so. Further, for the second variation, a setting is made so that either one of “step 2” and “step 3” is selected based on the extracted value of the random number SR9. In the first variation, “Step 3” is not selected, and the ratio to be selected is set in the relationship of “Step 2”> “Step 1”> “None”. In the second variation, “None” and “Step 1” are not selected, and the ratio of “Step 3”> “Step 2” is set. Therefore, in the case of the “pseudo-continuous twice” variation pattern, “step 2” is most easily selected in the first variation, and “step 3” is most easily selected in the second variation.

  In the third notice step batch decision table 204C in (C), any of the notice patterns assigned with the set pattern numbers 9-1 to 9-9 is selected and decided based on the extracted value of the random number SR9. In the third notice step batch decision table 204C, for the first change, one of the notice steps “none”, “step 1”, and “step 2” is selected based on the extracted value of the random number SR9. It is set to do so. For the second variation, a setting is made so that any one of “Step 1”, “Step 2”, and “Step 3” is selected based on the extracted value of the random number SR9. Yes. The third change is set so that either the “step 2” or “step 3” notice step is selected based on the extracted value of the random number SR9. In the first variation, “Step 3” is not selected, and the ratio to be selected is set in the relationship of “Step 2”> “Step 1”> “None”. In the second variation, “None” is not selected, and the selected ratio is set in the relationship of “Step 3”> “Step 2”> “Step 1”. In the third variation, “None” and “Step 1” are not selected, and the ratio of “Step 3”> “Step 2” is set. Therefore, in the case of the variation pattern of “pseudo-continuous 3 times”, “step 2” is most easily selected in the first variation, and “step 3” is most easily selected in the second variation, and 2 in the third variation. “Step 3” is easier to select than the second change.

  Next, the contents of the fourth advance notice step collective decision table 204D to the eighth advance notice step collective decision table 204H used when the fluctuation display result is out of place (including both reach out and non reach out) will be described. FIG. 95 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of the fourth notice step collective decision table 204D to the eighth notice step collective decision table 204H.

  95, (A) to (E) show fourth notice step collective decision table 204D to eighth notice step collective decision table 204H. Each notice step batch determination table shows the relationship between the extracted value of the random number SR9, the display contents of the selected notice step (the notice step in the figure), and the setting pattern number (the notice pattern setting number). Yes.

  In the fourth notice step batch decision table 204D in (A), any of the notice patterns to which the set pattern numbers 12-1 and 12-2 are assigned is selected and determined based on the extracted value of the random number SR9. In the fourth notice step batch determination table 204D, a setting is made so that one of the notice steps “None” and “Step 1” is selected as the first notice step. Therefore, when the variation pattern is “no pseudo-continuous” due to a loss of reach, either “none” or “step 1” is selected and displayed as the advance notice step. In the fourth notice step batch determination table 204D, numerical data is set such that the ratio of the notice step to be selected is “none”> “step 1”. In the fourth notice step collective decision table 204D, the ratio of selecting “none” is higher than the first notice step collective decision table 204A in the case of a big hit, and “step 1” and “step 2”. The numerical value data of SR9 is set so that the ratio of selecting is lower (step 2 is not selected, but step 2 may be selected at a lower ratio than the first notice step batch determination table 204A). Has been.

In the fifth notice step batch decision table 204E in (B), any of the notice patterns to which the set pattern numbers 13-1 to 13-5 are assigned is selected and decided based on the extracted value of the random number SR9. In the fifth notice step collective decision table 204E, for the first change,
Based on the extracted value of the random number SR9, a setting is made so that any one of “None”, “Step 1”, and “Step 2” is selected. Further, for the second variation, a setting is made so that either one of “Step 1” and “Step 2” is selected based on the extracted value of the random number SR9. In the first variation, “Step 3” is not selected, and the ratio to be selected is set in a relationship of “None”> “Step 1”> “Step 2”. In the second variation, “None” and “Step 3” are not selected, and the ratio of “Step 1”> “Step 2” is set. Therefore, in the case of the “pseudo-continuous twice” variation pattern, “none” is most easily selected in the first variation, and “step 1” is most easily selected in the second variation. Also, in the fifth notice step collective decision table 204E, the numerical data of SR9 is set so that the ratio of selecting “none” is higher than that in the second notice step collective decision table 204B at the time of a big hit. Yes.

  In the sixth notice step batch decision table 204F in (C), any of the notice patterns assigned with the set pattern numbers 14-1 to 14-7 is selected and decided based on the extracted value of the random number SR9. In the sixth notice step batch determination table 204F, for the first change, one of the notice steps “None”, “Step 1”, and “Step 2” is selected based on the extracted value of the random number SR9. It is set to do so. Further, for the second variation, a setting is made so that either one of “Step 1” and “Step 2” is selected based on the extracted value of the random number SR9. The third change is set so that one of “Step 1” and “Step 2” is selected based on the extracted value of the random number SR9. In the first variation, “Step 3” is not selected, and the ratio to be selected is set in a relationship of “None”> “Step 1”> “Step 2”. In the second variation, “None” and “Step 3” are not selected, and the ratio of “Step 1”> “Step 2” is set. In the third variation, “None” and “Step 3” are not selected, and the ratio of “Step 1”> “Step 2” is set. The rate at which “Step 1” is selected is higher in the second variation than in the third variation. In the case of the “pseudo-continuous 3 times” variation pattern, “none” is most easily selected in the first variation, “step 1” is most easily selected in the second variation, and the second variation in the third variation. “Step 1” is more easily selected. In addition, in the sixth notice step collective decision table 204F, the value of SR9 is set so that the ratio of selecting “none” and “step 1” is higher than that in the third notice step collective decision table 204C when the big hit. Data is set.

  In the seventh notice step batch decision table 204G in (D), one of the notice patterns assigned with the set pattern numbers 15-1 and 15-2 is selected and decided based on the extracted value of the random number SR9. In the seventh notice step batch determination table 204G, a setting is made so that one of the notice steps “None” and “Step 1” is selected as the first notice step. Therefore, when the fluctuation pattern is “non-reach” and “no quasi-continuous”, either “none” or “step 1” is selected and displayed as the notice step. In the seventh notice step collective decision table 204G, numerical data is set so that the ratio at which the notice step is selected is “none”> “step 1”. Also, in the seventh advance notice step collective decision table 204G, the numerical data of SR9 is set so that the ratio of selecting “none” is higher than the fourth advance notice step collective decision table 204D when the reach is lost. ing.

  In the eighth notice step batch decision table 204H of (E), any one of the notice patterns assigned with the set pattern numbers 16-1 and 16-2 is selected and determined based on the extracted value of the random number SR9. In the eighth notice step batch determination table 204H, the notice step of “none” or “step 1” is selected based on the extracted value of the random number SR9 in each of the first and second fluctuations. Is set to In the first fluctuation, “None” is set to be selected more frequently than “Step 1”. In the second variation, the ratio at which “Step 1” is selected is set to be higher than that in the first variation. Therefore, in the case of the “pseudo-continuous twice” variation pattern, “None” is easily selected in the first variation, and only “Step 1” is selected in the second variation. As shown in (E), in the eighth notice step collective decision table 204H, the ratio at which “step 1” is selected is higher than the fifth notice step collective decision table 204E when the reach is lost. Numerical data of SR9 is set.

  In the third embodiment, in the step corresponding to S535 shown in the first embodiment, the information of the notice pattern type and the information of the display result specified based on the variation pattern (big hit, no reach, no reach) Accordingly, any of the notice selection tables shown in (A) to (F) of FIG. 91 is selected and set as the notice selection table.

  Next, in the step corresponding to S536 shown in the first embodiment, using the notice selection table determined in S535, according to the variation pattern to be executed (no pseudo-continuation, two pseudo-continuations, three pseudo-continuations). One of the data tables shown in FIG. 92 to FIG. 95 is used as a data table used for determining the respective notice patterns for the first to third fluctuations required for the fluctuation display with the fluctuation pattern. A notice message batch decision table or one notice step batch decision table is selected and set.

  Next, in the step corresponding to S537 shown in the first embodiment, the numerical data indicating the random number value SR8 for determining the notification message or the numerical data indicating the random value SR9 for determining the notification step is obtained according to the type of notification. Extract.

  Next, in the step corresponding to S538 shown in the first embodiment, based on the random number value extracted as described above, the notice pattern of the required fluctuation times among the first to third fluctuations is described above. Using the single data table set as described above, the decision is made collectively and the decided notice pattern is stored.

  In the third embodiment, the color reliability display effect and the pattern reliability display effect as shown in the first embodiment are similarly performed. As for each of the color reliability display and the pattern reliability display, as shown in the first embodiment, the reliability display modes (first color display to third color display, first pattern display) at the time of each variation of the pseudo-series. To the third pattern display) may be determined by using a plurality of data tables for determining the reliability display provided for each fluctuation time, and as in the determination of the notice pattern mode in the third embodiment. At the time of each variation of the pseudo-series, the reliability display mode may be determined collectively by one data table for each variation time. It should be noted that, in this way, at the time of each variation of the pseudo-series, the reliability display mode may be collectively determined by one data table for each variation time in the first embodiment.

  In such a third embodiment, at the time of each variation of the pseudo-series, the mode of the notice pattern is collectively selected for each variation time and selected and determined collectively by one data table, so that an individual data table for each variation time is obtained. As compared with the case of selecting and determining using, it is possible to reduce the number of processes required to select and determine the mode of the notice pattern. Thereby, the processing burden of the production control microcomputer 100 can be reduced.

[Fourth Embodiment]
Next, a fourth embodiment will be described. In the fourth embodiment, the notice effects such as the button notice and the step-up notice as described above are executed by a plurality of change patterns instead of the pseudo-continuation performed in the change display executed by one change pattern. An example will be described which is performed in continuous notice over a plurality of variable displays.

  Whether or not the continuous notice is data that will cause a variable display that is a big hit for each of the stored data by using a game control microcomputer (similar to the game control microcomputer 560 described above) in advance. Recognizing and based on the stored data, the microcomputer for effect control provides a continuous notice effect for notifying that a large number of variable displays are displayed before the display result of the variable display that is a big hit is derived and displayed. This is a notice effect executed by (similar to the aforementioned effect control microcomputer 100).

  Specifically, whether or not the game control microcomputer is a data to be displayed as a big hit for each of the stored storage data on the condition that the number of the stored storage data has reached a predetermined number or more Is determined in advance, and it is determined with a predetermined probability whether or not continuous notice is executed. In the determination, it is determined that the continuous notice is executed at a higher probability when there is stored storage data that is a big hit than when there is no stored storage data that is a big hit. When it is determined that the continuous notice is to be executed, the game control microcomputer transmits an effect control command indicating that the continuous notice is to be executed to the effect control microcomputer. In the effect control microcomputer, when the effect control command indicating that such continuous notice is executed is received, the same as the button notice or step-up notice as shown in the first to third embodiments described above. The notice effect (including the color reliability display and the pattern reliability display) in this effect mode may be executed over a plurality of variable displays as a continuous notice. That is, based on a predetermined selection ratio determination condition such as the selection ratio of the notice effect set in each data table shown in FIG. 66 to FIG. A plurality of types of notice effect forms in each variable display when the effect is executed are selected at different ratios. Similarly, for each of the color reliability display and the pattern reliability display, a predetermined selection ratio is determined such as the selection ratio of the notice reliability display effect set in each data table shown in FIGS. Based on the conditions, a plurality of types of notice reliability display effect modes in each variable display when the notice reliability display such as the button notice and the step-up notice is executed in the continuous notice are selected at different ratios.

  When the continuous notice is executed, the number of variable displays for which the continuous notice is performed may be set to a predetermined number, or may be set to a randomly determined number. Further, the determination as to whether or not to execute the continuous notice may be made by the effect control microcomputer, not by the game control microcomputer. In that case, whenever there is a start prize from the game control microcomputer, a hold memory command as an effect control command indicating whether or not the hold memory based on the start prize is a big hit is sent, Based on the on-hold storage command, the effect control microcomputer may determine whether to execute the continuous notice by making the same determination as the game control microcomputer as described above.

  As described above, by performing the button notice and the step-up notice as described above in the continuous notice, it is possible to obtain the same effect as in the case where these notices are given in a pseudo-continuous manner.

Next, main effects obtained by the embodiment described above will be described.
(1) As shown in S520 of FIG. 79, S845 of FIG. 85, and ST15 and ST16a of FIG. 87, on condition that the operation button 30 is operated during the variation display executed in the pseudo-variation variation pattern. 79, the notice effect of the button notice is executed with the notice pattern (notice message) as the notice effect mode selected by the notice setting process shown in S516a to S542 of FIG. 81. A player's willingness to participate can be increased. 67 (A) and 67 (B), a table required for the notice effect at each stage of fluctuation is selected according to the total number of fluctuations (two times and three times) of the pseudo-ream. As described above, the selection ratio of the notice pattern is different in the table selected in accordance with the total number of pseudo-continuations (two times and three times). Therefore, for the notice effect that is executed on the condition that the operation button 30 is operated, the total of the re-variation (the variation including the initial variation and the subsequent re-variation during one variation period) executed in a pseudo-continuous manner. Depending on the number of times, a plurality of types of notice patterns are selected at different selection ratios. Thus, the player's expectation is enhanced with respect to the total number of re-variations that can be related to the result of the jackpot determination by the effect mode of the notice effect executed when the operation button 30 is operated. Can do. Furthermore, because the selection ratio of the notice pattern in the re-variation at each stage is different, even if it is the same pseudo-ream, the selection ratio of the notice pattern is different if the change times when the operation button 30 is operated is different. Variations in the production related to the re-variation display can be increased by the relevance between the number of times of re-variation in the quasi-ream and the selected notice effect mode. By increasing the player's willingness to participate in the game, increasing the player's expectation for the total number of re-variations, and increasing the variation of re-variation effects, It is possible to improve the fun and the interest of the game. Also, as shown in S535 to S538 in FIG. 81, the announcement pattern for each variation time is determined collectively before the start of a series of variation display that becomes a pseudo-continuous, so that the effect control microcomputer 100 during variation display can be controlled. Control burden (processing burden) can be reduced.

  (2) Further, as shown in FIG. 68 and FIG. 69, the table selected according to the total number of pseudo-reams (2 times, 3 times) is a selection of a notice pattern (warning message) for every change of re-variation. The ratio is different. Therefore, as shown in the first embodiment and the second embodiment, with regard to the notice effect that is executed when the operation button 30 is operated, the number of times in the pseudo-ream is the time when the operation button 30 is operated. A plurality of types of notice patterns are selected at different selection ratios depending on whether the notice effect is a fluctuation. As a result, regarding the re-variation that can be related to the result of the jackpot determination by the effect mode of the notice effect performed when the operation button 30 is operated, the number of times in the pseudo ream when the operation button 30 is operated Based on whether it is a notice effect, a different expectation can be given to the player at each re-variation in the pseudo-ream, and the player's expectation can be enhanced. Furthermore, the number of times of re-variation in the pseudo-series and the selected notice effect mode are selected, such as the selection ratio of the notice pattern is different if the number of times of fluctuation when the operation button 30 is operated is different even in the same pseudo-series. Due to the relevance, it is possible to increase the variation of effects related to the re-variable display. As a result, increasing the player's willingness to participate in the game, giving the player a different sense of expectation in each re-variation, and increasing the variation of the re-variation effect, the interest of the re-variation effect Can improve the interest of the game.

  (3) For the step-up notice, the tables necessary for the notice effect at each stage of fluctuation are selected according to the total number of fluctuations (2 times, 3 times) of the pseudo-series in FIGS. 67 (C) and 67 (D). As shown in FIG. 70 and FIG. 71, tables selected according to the total number of pseudo-reams (two times and three times) differ in the selection ratio of the notice pattern (notice step). Therefore, with regard to the notice effect of the step-up notice, there are plural kinds of notice patterns depending on the total number of re-variations (variations including initial fluctuation and subsequent re-variation during one fluctuation period) executed in a pseudo-continuous manner. Are selected at different selection ratios. Thereby, the player's expectation can be enhanced with respect to the total number of re-variations that can be related to the result of the big hit determination by the effect mode of the notice effect by the plurality of notice steps. In addition, because the selection ratio of the notice pattern at the re-variation in each stage is different, even if the same pseudo-ream, the selection pattern of the notice pattern is different if the fluctuation times are different. Depending on the relevance to the notice effect mode, it is possible to increase the variation of the effect related to the re-variable display. By increasing the player's expectation for the total number of re-variations, and increasing the variations of re-variation effects, the fun of re-variation effects will be improved and the interest of the game will be improved. Can do. As for the step-up notice, as shown in S535 to S538 of FIG. 81, by determining the notice pattern of each change time for the step-up notice before the start of a series of fluctuating display that becomes a pseudo series, It is possible to reduce the control burden (processing burden) of the production control microcomputer 100 during the variable display.

  (4) Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 70 and FIG. 71, the table selected according to the total number of pseudo-reams (2 times, 3 times) is a step-up notice notice pattern (notice The selection ratio of step) is different. Therefore, as shown in the second embodiment, for the step-up notice, a plurality of types of notice patterns are selected at different selection ratios according to the notice effect in the number of changes in the pseudo-ream. As a result, the re-variation that can be related to the result of the jackpot determination by the effect mode of the notice effect by the multi-step notice step is determined based on how many times the change in the quasi-rendition is the notice effect. Different expectations can be given to the player in the re-variation of the player, and the player's expectation can be enhanced. In addition, even for the same pseudo-ream, variations in the effects related to re-variable display can be achieved due to the relevance between the multiple stages of the notice step and the notice effect mode selected, such as the selection ratio of the notice pattern differing when the fluctuation times are different. Can be increased. As a result, giving the player a different sense of expectation at each re-variation, and increasing the variation of the re-variation effect, improving the interest of the re-variation effect and improving the fun of the game it can.

  (5) For each notice effect of button notice and step-up notice, a prohibition process for prohibiting selection of a notice pattern with lower reliability than the notice pattern of the previous variable display in S538 of FIG. 81 and S538a of FIG. When the notice pattern of the notice effect is selected, the notice effect selected later is compared with the notice effect selected before, after the notice effect is executed. The notice effect mode is selected so that the reliability of the big hit is not lowered. As a result, despite the fact that the player's expectation has been enhanced by executing the re-variation of the pseudo-ream, the degree of reliability for the big hit by the pre-announcement effect is realized by the effect mode of the notification effect performed in the re-variation of the pseudo-ream. It is possible to prevent the player from giving an impression that the game will decrease.

  (6) In the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 36, when not reaching, one of the non-reach variation pattern type determination tables 136A to 136C is selected in the processing of S100, and the processing of S101 and S102 The variation pattern type is determined in step S104. For example, after the variation pattern determination table including the variation pattern including “pseudo-continuous” is selected in step S103, the processing in steps S104 and S105 is executed. As described above, the determination of the variation display pattern type and the determination of the variation pattern are made differently depending on whether or not the decision to enter the reach state has been made, and the variation can be achieved without increasing the control burden. The number of types of patterns can be increased. In addition, by using a combination of the variation pattern type and the variation pattern, it is possible to realize various types of variation display patterns, and it is not necessary to store all the variation display patterns to be selected in the ROM. It is possible to prevent enlargement of an area for storing information related to display. In addition, even when the reach is not reached, re-variation by the pseudo-ream is executed, and the entertainment of the game can be further improved. In addition, since the means for determining the fluctuation pattern is divided into a means for determining the type of the fluctuation pattern and a means for selecting the fluctuation pattern, for example, the classification determination in the means for determining the type of the fluctuation pattern The design for changing the setting for determining the variation pattern can be changed simply by changing the distribution of the variation display pattern selection in the means for selecting the variation pattern without changing the pattern. can do.

  (7) As a variation pattern for performing re-variation, for example, as shown in Super PA 4-3 in FIG. 14 that performs variation display as shown in FIGS. 45 (D1) to (D5), the reach state is reached after temporary stop in re-variation. After the temporary stop in the re-variation, the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbols, such as the first re-variation pattern and the variation pattern of the special PG 1-2 in FIG. Since the second re-variation pattern, which is a big hit after executing re-variation display in a part of the display areas 9L, 9C, 9R, is included, there are many variations of effects after temporary stop in re-variation. As a result, the re-variation effect can be given unexpectedness, and the entertainment of the game can be further improved.

  (8) When performing re-variation according to S520 in FIG. 79 and S845 in FIG. 85, as a notification effect, an upper effect LED 85a, a middle effect LED 85b, a lower effect LED 85c, and a movable effect as shown in FIGS. Since the notification effect is executed in the notification mode selected from the notification modes based on the patterns of the plurality of types of effects using the member 78, the re-variation display is performed by the combination of the re-change effect and the notification effect. The variation of the production can be made abundant, and the production concerning re-variation can be prevented from becoming monotonous.

  (9) As shown in FIG. 28 and FIG. 29, with respect to the group of non-reach PA1-5, super PA3-3, super PA3-6, and super PB3-3 that can be selected when it is not a big hit, The groups of Super PA4-3, Super PA4-6, Super PA5-3, Super PB4-3, Super PB5-3, and Special PG1-3 that can be selected in the case of FIG. AB, AC, BC, ABC There is a high probability that a combination of re-variation effects in different modes will appear. Therefore, the combination of the selection of the notification mode in the notification effect regarding the re-variation and the reliability that becomes a big hit after the notification effect is executed can further enrich the variation of the effect when the re-change is performed. In addition, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game with respect to re-variation effects.

  (10) As shown in the fourth embodiment, based on the pending storage data, a notice is given that the display result of the variable display that will be a big hit will be a big hit over a plurality of variable displays before the derived display. With regard to the continuous notice effect, the following effects can be obtained by performing the same effect as the button notice effect described above. On the condition that the operation button 30 has been operated, the notice effect is executed in the selected notice effect mode such as the notice message of the button notice and the notice step of the step-up notice, so that the player is willing to participate in the game. Can be increased. As for the notice effect that is executed on the condition that the operation button 30 is operated, as shown in the tables (FIGS. 68 and 69) used for selecting the notice pattern of the button notice, it has been decided to control the jackpot. The selection ratio of the notice effect mode differs depending on the number of notice effects in the variable display in a plurality of variable displays before the display result of the variable display is derived and displayed. That is, based on a predetermined selection ratio determination condition, a plurality of types of notice effect modes in each variable display when the notice effect is executed are selected at different ratios. Thereby, what happens when the operation button 30 is operated with respect to the variation pattern that can be related to the determination result of whether or not to control the jackpot depending on the effect mode of the notice effect executed when the operation button 30 is operated? Based on whether it is a notice effect in the second variation display, it is possible to give the player a different sense of expectation in each variation in such a plurality of variation displays, so as to increase the player's expectation can do. Furthermore, depending on the relevance between the number of variable displays when executing the announcement effect over a plurality of variable displays in continuous notice and the selected notice effect mode, there are variations of effects related to the multiple variable displays. Can be increased. By giving the player a different sense of expectation in each variation in such multiple variation displays, and increasing the variation of the representation related to multiple variation displays, the effect of the representation related to multiple variation displays Can improve the interest of the game.

(11) As shown in the fourth embodiment, based on the stored storage data, a notice is given that the display result of the variable display that will be a big hit will be a big hit over a plurality of variable displays before the derived display. With respect to the continuous notice effect, the following effects can be obtained by performing the same effect as the aforementioned step-up notice effect.
As for the step-up notice effect in which the notice effect is performed in a plurality of notice steps, as shown in the tables (FIGS. 70 and 71) used for selecting the notice pattern of the step-up notice, the fluctuation determined to be controlled by the big hit The selection ratio of the notice effect mode differs depending on the notice effect in the variable display of the number of times of change display before and after the display result of the display is derived and displayed. That is, based on a predetermined selection ratio determination condition, a plurality of types of notice effect modes in each variable display when the notice effect is executed are selected at different ratios. By this, it is the notice effect in the number of fluctuation display regarding the fluctuation pattern that can be related to the determination result of whether or not to control the jackpot by the effect mode of the step-up notice effect performed by a plurality of notice steps. Based on the above, it is possible to give a player a different sense of expectation in each variation in such a plurality of variation displays, and to increase the player's expectation. Furthermore, the variation of the production | presentation regarding multiple times of variable display is increased by the relevance with the number of times of the variable display when performing the announcement effect over the multiple times of variable display in continuous notice, and the announcement effect mode selected. be able to. By giving the player a different sense of expectation in each variation in such multiple variation displays, and increasing the variation of the representation related to multiple variation displays, the effect of the representation related to multiple variation displays Can improve the interest of the game.

Next, modifications, feature points, and the like of the embodiment described above are listed below.
(1) In each of the above embodiments, the effect control board 80, the audio output board 70, and the lamp driver board 35 are provided as the boards on which the circuit for controlling the effect device is mounted. The circuit may be mounted on one substrate. Further, a first effect control board (display control board) on which a circuit for controlling the effect display device 9 and the like is mounted and a circuit for controlling other effect devices (lamps, LEDs, speakers 27, etc.) are mounted. You may make it provide two board | substrates with two production | presentation control boards.

  (2) In each of the embodiments described above, the game control microcomputer 560 directly transmits a command to the effect control microcomputer 100. However, the game control microcomputer 560 may transmit another board (for example, (Sound / lamp board having the functions of the audio output board 70 and the lamp driver board 35 shown in FIG. 3 or the circuit mounted on the audio output board 70 and the function of the circuit mounted on the lamp driver board 35) An effect control command may be transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 on the effect control board 80 via another board. In that case, the command may simply pass through another board, or the sound output board 70, the lamp driver board 35, and the sound / lamp board are equipped with control means such as a microcomputer, and the control means receives the command. In response to this, control related to voice control and lamp control is executed, and the received command is changed as it is or, for example, to a simplified command, and the effect display device 9 and the decorative design indicators 9a and 9b are changed. You may make it transmit to the microcomputer 100 for presentation control to control. Even in that case, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs the display control in response to the effect control command directly received from the game control microcomputer 560 in each of the above-described embodiments. Display control can be performed in accordance with commands received from the driver board 35 or the sound / lamp board.

  (3) Based on the variation pattern command from the game control microcomputer 560, the effect control microcomputer 100 is an effect display device 9 as an effect part, and is used as a special symbol display specified by the symbol variation designation command. Since it is configured to execute the corresponding notice effect, even if two special symbol indicators (special symbol indicator 8a and special symbol indicator 8b) are provided, the player is informed of the progress of the game ( It is possible to make it easy to grasp which variation display means is producing an effect corresponding to the variation display.

  (4) Based on the variation pattern command from the game control microcomputer 560, the effect control microcomputer 100 is an effect display device 9 as an effect component, and is used as a special symbol display specified by the symbol variation designation command. Since it is configured to execute a variation display effect according to the corresponding variation mode, even if two special symbol indicators (special symbol indicator 8a, special symbol indicator 8b) are provided, It is possible to make it easier to grasp the progress status of the game (such as which special symbol display is producing an effect corresponding to the variable display), and abundant game variations.

  (5) In each of the above-described embodiments, a display composed of two LEDs is used as a decorative symbol display. However, the decorative symbol display is not limited to such a configuration. For example, you may comprise one or more 7 segment LED. In addition, the present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine that is not provided with a decorative symbol display.

  (6) The embodiment described above is not limited to a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of prize balls in response to detection of a winning ball, but responds to detection of a winning ball by enclosing a gaming ball. It can also be applied to enclosed game machines that give points.

  (7) The above-described embodiment can also be applied to an apparatus such as a game machine that simulates the operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The program and data for realizing the above-described embodiment are not limited to a form distributed and provided to a computer apparatus or the like by a detachable recording medium, but a storage apparatus that the computer apparatus or the like has in advance. You may take the form that is distributed by pre-installing. Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter. The game execution mode is not only executed by attaching a detachable recording medium, but can also be executed by temporarily storing a program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. It is also possible to execute directly using hardware resources on the other device side on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Further, the game can be executed by exchanging data with other computer devices or the like via a network.

  (8) As described above, in the special symbol process, when the start port switch passing process is provided separately for the first special symbol process and the second special symbol process, for example, a process for determining a big hit Some processes may be made common by executing a common process routine.

  (9) In embodiment mentioned above, the example which comprises the 1st special symbol indicator 8a and the 2nd special symbol indicator 8b by the same kind of indicator (7 segment LED) was shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b may be configured by different types of displays. Specifically, one of the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b may be a seven-segment display and the other may be a dot matrix display. One of the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b is composed of a 7-segment display, and the other is composed of an LED display such as the decorative symbol display 9a, 9b. May be.

  (10) In the above-described embodiment, the display result of the variable display on the normal symbol display 10 that is variably displayed when it is detected that the game ball has passed the gate 32 is the predetermined display result (winning symbol). In this example, the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is controlled to be in the open state. However, not limited to this, the normal symbol display 10 is not provided, and when it is detected that the game ball has passed the gate 32, the display variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to be in the open state. Good.

  (11) In the embodiment described above, the display result of the variable display on the normal symbol display 10 that is variably displayed when it is detected that the game ball has passed the gate 32 is the predetermined display result (winning symbol). In this example, the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is controlled to be in the open state. However, not limited to this, the normal symbol display 10 is not provided, and when it is detected that the game ball has passed the gate 32, the display variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to be in the open state. Good.

  (12) In the above-described embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 determines a specific variation pattern of the pseudo-series (a variation pattern that specifies information related to variation such as the number of variations), and the variation is performed using the effect control command. Instructing the pattern, the production control microcomputer 100 recognizes a specific variation pattern of the pseudo-series (a variation pattern that specifies information related to variations such as the number of variations) based on the rendering control command, and varies the pseudo-series. An example of executing variation display with patterns was shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the production control microcomputer 100 may determine a specific variation pattern of the pseudo-continuous (an effect pattern including a re-change notification effect). For example, on the game control microcomputer 560 side, fluctuations in pseudo-series using S105A and S105B shown in FIG. 36 (random 7 in FIG. 15 and pseudo-continuous effect pattern determination tables 139A and 139B shown in FIGS. 28 and 29). The processing of these steps may be executed on the side of the effect control microcomputer 100 without executing the pattern determination).

  (13) In the above-described embodiment, an example in which the game control microcomputer 560 determines the number of pseudo-series fluctuations is shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the production control microcomputer 100 determines the number of pseudo-series fluctuations. You may make it do. For example, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits a variation pattern command that can specify whether or not to execute a pseudo-ream, and the effect control microcomputer 100 is determined to execute a pseudo-ream. Is received, the number of fluctuations of the pseudo-ream is determined.

  (14) In the above-described embodiment, an example in which the button notice effect is executed only when the operation of the operation button 30 by the player is detected during the operation effective period is shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and even when the operation of the operation button 30 is not detected during the operation valid period, the effect of button notification may be executed at a predetermined rate.

  (15) In the above-described embodiment, an example has been given of the button notice and step-up notice that are performed in the pseudo-ream, and the greater the number of times the change is performed in the pseudo-ream, the higher the reliability that becomes a big hit after the notice. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the reliability that is a big hit may be constant regardless of whether the number of executions of the fluctuation in the pseudo-run is large or small. That is, although the reliability that is a big hit is constant, the effect of button notice and the effect of step-up notice in the control mode as described above may be executed.

  (16) In the above-described embodiment, it is indicated that the prohibition process for prohibiting the selection of the notice pattern with lower reliability than the notice pattern of the previous variation display is executed in S538 of FIG. 81 and S538a of FIG. It was. In this way, in order to prohibit selection of a notice pattern having a lower reliability than the notice pattern of the previous variation display, a notice pattern determination table (a notice message decision table, a notice step decision table) used in each fluctuating time of the pseudo-series. For the above, a table may be used in which only a notice pattern having a reliability higher than the reliability of the notice pattern that can be selected in the previous variation is selectable.

  (17) In the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 66, an example has been shown in which it is determined whether or not to give a button notice or a step-up notice by using a notice pattern type decision table. However, the present invention is not limited to this, it is decided using a separate notice availability determination table to decide whether to give a button notice or a step-up notice, and according to the decision result, a button notice and a step-up will be used as a notice effect. It may be determined using the notice pattern type determination table which notice type is selected as the notice.

  (18) In the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 66, an example in which the notice pattern type determination table is provided separately when a big hit, when reach is lost, and when non-reach is lost is shown. It was. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for determining the notice pattern type, the notice pattern type determination table may be provided separately for a big hit and a case where a big hit occurs. In addition, the notice pattern type determination may be provided separately for reach (including both the case of losing after reach and the case of big hit after reach) and the case of not reaching. Further, the notice pattern type determination may be provided separately for when the reach is out of reach and when the reach is not reached. In addition, the determination of the notice pattern type may be provided separately for the big hit and when the reach is lost. In addition, the determination of the notice pattern type may be provided separately for a big hit and when a non-reach is lost.

  (19) In the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 67, an example in which the button notice selection table is provided separately when a big hit, when reach is lost, and when non-reach is lost is shown. . However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the button notice selection table may be provided separately for a big hit and a case of a loss. Further, the button notice selection table may be provided separately for a big hit and when a reach is lost. Similarly, the step notice selection table may be provided separately for a big hit and when it comes off. Further, the step notice selection table may be provided separately for the big hit and when the reach is lost.

  (20) The effect form of each notice step of the step-up notice described above may be any effect form as long as the player can recognize that effect when stepping up. For example, the effect mode of each notice step may be such that the reach state is determined in the second step and the super reach state is determined in the third step. When such a production mode is adopted, the reach of the game can be improved by stepping up the reach.

  (21) The pseudo-rendition effects described above are executed in the first effect of the effect mode for notifying the number of re-variations executed in the re-variable display pattern for performing the pseudo-ream effect, and in the fluctuating variable display pattern. Either production of the second production that does not notify the number of times of re-variation may be used. Moreover, you may make it provide the fluctuation | variation display pattern means which makes it possible to select and perform either of these 1st effects and a 2nd effect.

  (22) As a notice effect such as the button notice and the step-up notice, the notice effect using only the image, the notice effect using only the sound, the notice effect using only the movable member, and the image and sound are used. What kind of notice effect pattern among the notice effect that uses the image, the movable member, the notice effect that uses the sound and the movable member, and the notice effect that uses the image, the sound, and the movable member May be used. Further, the notice effect may be selected and executed from among the notice effect patterns in a predetermined order, or may be selected and executed at random from these notice effect patterns.

  (23) In the above-described embodiment, in a variation display when the re-variation display pattern is selected by the variation display pattern selection means, a state in which a notice effect for notifying that the specific gaming state is entered can be executed. An example is shown in which the effect control microcomputer 100 includes a notice effect selecting unit that selects whether or not to perform the notice effect and selects a notice effect mode from a plurality of types of the notice effect aspects. . However, such a notice effect selecting means may be provided in the game control microcomputer 560. In that case, information indicating whether or not the notice effect selected by the notice effect selecting means is in an executable state and information indicating the selected notice effect mode when the notice effect is executed The control command sends the game control microcomputer 560 to the effect control microcomputer 100, and the effect control microcomputer 100 executes the effect control as described above according to the information indicated by the command.

  (24) In the above-described embodiment, as a prohibition process for prohibiting the next (current) change in the next (current) change in the notice effect having a lower reliability than the notice effect selected in the previous change in the “pseudo-ream”. , Memorize the type of notice effect in the previous change, the reliability of the jackpot than the previous change based on the data table (notice message decision table, notice step decision table, etc.) for the next (this time) change When a lower one is selected, in the next (current) fluctuation, the execution of the one selected based on the data table is prohibited, and a control for executing the stored notice effect in the previous fluctuation is performed. An example is shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Forbidden processing may be as follows.

  a Memorize the type of notice effect in the previous change. When a random number value (SR8, SR9, etc.) having a lower jackpot reliability than the previous fluctuation is extracted based on the data table for the next (current) fluctuation, a predetermined value is added to the extracted random number value. A calculation (for example, four arithmetic operations such as adding the value of the refresh register) is added, and control is performed so that a notice effect having a reliability higher than the reliability of the notice effect in the previous change is selected.

  b Memorize the type of notice effect in the previous change. In addition, for all types of notice effects to be selected, a data table is provided so that only the notice effects that are higher than the reliability of the jackpot of each notice effect can be selected. Select a data table that can select only the notice effect that is higher than the reliability of the notice effect, and use the data table to determine the reliability that is higher than the reliability of the notice effect in the previous change. Control is made so that the notice effect is selected.

  c Stores the type of notice effect in the previous change. In the effect control microcomputer 100, the data table stored in the ROM is copied to a predetermined area of the RAM so that the data in the data table can be changed. Change the contents of the data table for the next (this time) change so that only the notice effect that is higher than the reliability of the notice effect can be selected according to the previous notice effect (data such as distribution of random values) Then, using such a changeable data table, control is performed so that a notice effect having a reliability higher than the reliability of the notice effect in the previous change is selected.

  (25) In the above-described embodiment, the button announcement and the step-up announcement are used as the announcement effect performed in the pseudo-ream, and the announcement effect indicating that it is a big hit is shown. As a notice effect performed in the pseudo-ream, a notice effect indicating that a reach is achieved by a predetermined notice pattern such as a button notice and a step-up notice may be executed.

  (26) The step-up notice shown in the above-described embodiment may be as follows. A plurality of (two systems) step-up notices (two types of notice effects with different image display contents of the step-up) are provided, and for the step-up notices to be executed, the notice effect form is a plurality of kinds of notice effect forms. The ratio of which one to select and execute may be different. In addition, as for the effect mode of the step-up notice, the image display contents of the step-up are the same, but the step-up progress degree is different (the progress is fast and the progress is slow) as a plurality of types of effect modes. May be included. In addition, as for the effect form of the step-up notice, the image display contents of the step-up may be the same, but those having different step-up start timings may be included as a plurality of kinds of effect forms.

  (27) For the notice effects such as the button notice and the step-up notice shown in the above-described embodiment, the determination of whether or not to execute the notice effect and the determination of the notice effect mode may be sequentially performed. Is performed simultaneously with the determination of whether or not to execute and the notification effect mode (including both the notification effect type such as button notification and step-up notification and the specific notification pattern such as notification message and notification step). You may do it. In addition, regarding the selection and selection of the notice effect, the type of notice effect (type of notice effect such as button notice and step-up notice) is selected and a specific notice pattern such as notice message and notice step. ) Selection and decision may be made sequentially, and the type of notice effect (type of notice effect such as button notice and step-up notice) and notice pattern (specific information such as notice message and notice step) may be selected. (A preliminary announcement pattern) may be selected at the same time.

  (28) It should be noted that the embodiment disclosed this time is illustrative in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than the description above, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

  9 effect display device, 1 pachinko machine, 30 operation buttons, 560 microcomputer for game control, 100 microcomputer for effect control.

Claims (1)

A player is provided with a variable display section that displays a plurality of types of identification information that can each be identified, and when the display result of the identification information derived and displayed on the variable display section is a predetermined specific display result, the player A gaming machine that controls to a specific gaming state advantageous to
Operation means that can be operated by the player;
Pre-decision means for deciding whether to control to the specific gaming state before the display result of the identification information is derived and displayed;
Based on the determination by the pre-determining unit, after temporarily displaying the identification information that is a non-specific display result until the display result is derived and displayed after the variable information is displayed in the variable display section, One variation display pattern is selected from a plurality of predetermined variation display patterns of identification information including a variation variation display pattern for performing variation variation to perform variation variation once or a plurality of variations. Variable display pattern selection means for
Based on the fluctuation display pattern selected by the fluctuation display pattern selection means, the fluctuation display execution means for executing the fluctuation display of the identification information;
In the variable display of the identification information when the re-variable display pattern is selected by the variable display pattern selection means, it is selected whether or not to enable a notice effect for notifying that the specific gaming state is to be executed. In addition, a notice effect selecting means for selecting a notice effect aspect when executing the notice effect from a plurality of types of notice effect aspects;
When the first notice effect mode is selected from the plurality of types of notice effect modes when the notice effect selection unit selects the state where the notice effect can be executed, the re-variable display pattern is selected. The notice effect is executed in the selected first notice effect form on the condition that the operating means is operated during the variable display executed in step 2, and the second notice is selected from the plural kinds of notice effect forms. when the representation embodiment is selected, the Te variable display in odor that runs again variable display pattern, and a prediction effect execution means for executing a prediction effect in the second informational display mode selected,
The notice effect selecting means selects the plurality of types of notice effect aspects at different selection ratios according to the total number of re-variations executed by the re-variable display pattern selected by the variable display pattern selecting means. A gaming machine characterized by

Images